manualshive.com logo in svg

Tektronix MSO54, Programmer'S Manual

The Tektronix MSO54 is a high-performance oscilloscope with advanced analysis capabilities. Packed with features, this versatile device provides accurate measurements and insightful waveform analysis. You can easily understand its functions and usage with the comprehensive printable help manual available for free download at our website.

Share
Download
background image

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples

MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis 2.5

sets the

hysteresis to 2.5% of MAX

MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis?

might return

:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS 5.0000

indicating the hysteresis is set to 5% of MAX.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh

This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number is
speci

fi

ed by x. The measurement number is speci

fi

ed by x.

Group

Measurement

Syntax

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh <NR3>
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh?

Arguments

<NR3>

is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the high

reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples

MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh 95

sets the reference

level to 95% of TOP.

MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh?

might return

:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEHIGH 90.0000

indicating the reference level is set to 90% of TOP.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow

This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number is
speci

fi

ed by x.

Group

Measurement

Syntax

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow <NR3>
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow?

2-418

MSO54, MSO56, MSO58, MSO58LP Programmer

Summary of Contents for MSO54

Page 1: ...xx 5 Series MSO MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP ZZZ Programmer Manual P077130502 077 1305 02 ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...5 Series MSO MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP ZZZ Programmer Manual xx www tek com 077 1305 02 ...

Page 4: ... price change privileges reserved TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc FlexChannel FastFrame OpenChoice iView Pinpoint RT Eye TekVPI FastAcq and e Scope are registered trademarks of Tektronx Inc TekSecure is a trademark of Tektronix Inc 5 Series MSO Programmer documentation 077 1305 02 Released January 16 2018 Contacting Tektronix Tektronix Inc 14150 SW Karl Braun Drive P O...

Page 5: ... Command Entry 2 3 Constructed Mnemonics 2 5 Argument Types 2 7 Command groups 2 11 Acquisition command group 2 11 AFG Command Group 2 12 Alias command group 2 13 Bus command group 2 14 Calibration command group 2 19 Cursor command group 2 20 Digital command group 2 26 Display control command group 2 28 DVM Command Group 2 31 Ethernet Command Group 2 31 File system command group 2 33 Horizontal co...

Page 6: ...m Transfer WFMOutpre and CURVe Query Examples D 1 Example 1 Analog Waveform Channels 1 4 D 1 Example 2 Digital Waveform D 3 Example 3 Digital with 4 Bytes Per Point and Zoom Off D 5 Example 4 Digital with 8 Bytes Per Point and Zoom Off D 8 Example 5 Digital with 4 Bytes Per Point and Zoom On D 10 Example 6 Digital with 8 Bytes Per Point and MagniVu On D 13 Example 7 RF Frequency Domain Waveform D ...

Page 7: ... in that group and a table that lists all the commands and queries for that group You can click a command in the listing to display a detailed description of the command Commands listed in alphabetical order This topic contains all commands listed in alphabetical order Command details syntax and examples are provided Status and events This topic discusses the status and event reporting system for ...

Page 8: ...Preface iv MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP Programmer ...

Page 9: ...n download the User Manual from the Tektronix website at www tek com NOTE Most examples in this document assume that both HEADer and VERBose are set to ON Setting Up Remote Communications Hardware You can remotely control communications between your oscilloscope and a PC via Ethernet or USB cables Ethernet If you are using Ethernet start by connecting an appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet ...

Page 10: ...ed from the port to the host computer meets the USB 3 0 specification for super speed connections Typically such cables should be 3 feet or shorter in length but this is determined by the quality of the cable and with higher quality cables this length can be extended It is also dependent upon the drive capability of the host USB port to which the instrument is connected The use of high quality sho...

Page 11: ...nalyze your data collect screen images or to control the oscilloscope using a program of your own creation Three ways to connect your oscilloscope to a computer are through the VISA drivers the e Scope Web enabled tools or via a socket server Using VISA VISA lets you use your MS Windows computer to acquire data from your oscilloscope for use in an analysis package that runs on your PC such as Micr...

Page 12: ... information see the e Scope setup information below 7 If you want to change socket server parameters select the Socket Server panel and enter new values through the resulting panel controls 8 Run your application software on your computer Quick Tips The USB 3 0 super speed SS device port is the correct USB port for computer connectivity Use the rear and front panel USB 2 0 or 3 0 host ports to co...

Page 13: ...ddress of the instrument Either way you should then see the LXI Welcome page on your Web browser on your computer screen 11 Click Network Configuration to view and edit the network configuration settings 12 For e Scope click the Instrument Control e Scope link on the left side of the LXI Welcome page You should then see a new tab or window open in your browser with e Scope running Using a Socket S...

Page 14: ...AN panel to view the resulting LAN setting panel You can obtain the port by tapping the Socket Server panel and viewing the Port item For example if the oscilloscope IP address was 123 45 67 89 and the port was the default of 4000 you could open a session by writing into the MS Windows Telnet screen open 123 45 67 89 4000 The oscilloscope will send a help screen to the computer when it is done con...

Page 15: ...groups are not available when the instrument is in its default state Measurement Math Bus Search and Mark Plot Adding an instance of one of those components will cause all commands related to that component to be recognized For example sending the MEASUrement ADDNew command adds a measurement at which point the measurement commands will be recognized Conversely once all instances of a component ha...

Page 16: ...able commands Not all commands in these groups start implicit activation ADDNew DELete and LIST commands do not result in implicit activation Creating deleting and listing dynamic instances You can create a new default instance of a dynamic feature by using the ADDNew command For example MEASUrement ADDNew Meas1 will create a new measurement named Meas1 Meas1 will be a Period measurement since the...

Page 17: ...Exclusive OR Group one element is required Optional can be omitted Previous element s may be repeated Command and Query Structure Commands consist of set commands and query commands usually called commands and queries Commands modify oscilloscope settings or tell the oscilloscope to perform a specific action Queries cause the oscilloscope to return data and status information Most commands have bo...

Page 18: ... the header A comma separates arguments from each other Comma A single comma is used between arguments of multiple argument commands Optionally there may be white space characters before and after the comma Space A white space character is used between a command header and the related argument Optionally a white space may consist of multiple white space characters Commands Commands cause the oscil...

Page 19: ...t the information from the response The table below shows the difference in responses Table 2 3 Comparison of Header Off and Header On Responses Query Header Off Header On TIME 14 30 00 TIME 14 30 00 ACQuire NUMAVg 100 ACQUIRE NUMAVG 100 Clearing the oscilloscope You can clear the Output Queue and reset the oscilloscope to accept a new command or query by using the selected Device Clear DCL functi...

Page 20: ...er MODe NORMal and ACQuire NUMAVg 8 can be concatenated into the following single command TRIGger MODe NORMal ACQuire NUMAVg 8 2 If concatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemonic you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate the beginning colon For example you can concatenate the commands ACQuire MODe ENVelope and ACQuire NUMAVg 8 into a single command ACQuire MODe ...

Page 21: ...nt of FASTAcq STATE Terminating This documentation uses EOM End of Message to represent a message terminator Table 2 4 End of Message Terminator Symbol Meaning EOM Message terminator The end of message terminator must be the END message EOI asserted concurrently with the last data byte The last data byte may be an ASCII line feed LF character This oscilloscope does not support ASCII LF only messag...

Page 22: ...x in D x is 0 through 7 Together they define a FlexChannel digital input Cursor Position Mnemonics When cursors are displayed commands may specify which cursor of the pair to use Table 2 7 Cursor Mnemonics Symbol Meaning CURSOR x A cursor selector x is must be 1 or 2 Math Specifier Mnemonics Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header Table 2 8 Math Specifier ...

Page 23: ...e equal to 1 Search Mnemonics Commands can specify a search to use as a mnemonic in the header Table 2 12 Search Mnemonics Symbol Meaning SEARCH x A Search specifier x is 1 Zoom Mnemonics Commands can specify a zoom to use as a mnemonic in the header Table 2 13 Zoom Mnemonics Symbol Meaning ZOOM x A zoom specifier x must be equal to 1 Argument Types Commands use arguments such as enumeration numer...

Page 24: ... characters enclosed by a single quote or double quote The following is an example of a quoted string This is a quoted string This documentation represents these arguments as follows Table 2 15 Quoted String Argument Symbol Meaning QString Quoted string of ASCII text A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7 bit ASCII character set Follow these rules when you use quoted strings 1 ...

Page 25: ...l Meaning NZDig A nonzero digit character in the range of 1 9 Dig A digit character in the range of 0 9 DChar A character with the hexadecimal equivalent of 00 through FF 0 through 255 decimal Block A block of data bytes defined as Block NZDig Dig Dig DChar 0 DChar terminator NZDig specifies the number of Dig elements that follow Taken together the NZDig and Dig elements form a decimal integer tha...

Page 26: ...Command Syntax 2 10 MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP Programmer ...

Page 27: ...ASTAcq STATE Sets or queries the state of fast acquisition mode ACQuire MAXSamplerate Returns the maximum real time sample rate ACQuire MODe Sets or queries the acquisition mode ACQuire NUMACq Returns the number of waveform acquisitions that have occurred since starting acquisition with the ACQuire STATE RUN command ACQuire NUMAVg Sets or queries number of acquisitions for an averaged waveform ACQ...

Page 28: ...OWLevel Sets or queries the low level value of the output waveform in volts AFG NOISEAdd PERCent Sets or queries the AFG additive noise level as a percentage AFG NOISEAdd STATE Sets or queries the AFG additive noise state AFG OFFSet Sets or queries the AFG offset value in volts AFG OUTPut LOAd IMPEDance Sets or queries the AFG output load impedance AFG OUTPut STATE Sets or queries the AFG output s...

Page 29: ...ust be distinct from any keyword or keyword short form An alias name cannot be redefined without first being deleted using one of the alias deletion functions Alias names do not appear in response messages The Alias commands are defined in Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats Deviations between that standard and what is specified here will be considered errors unless specifically noted in the comm...

Page 30: ...s BUS B x AUDio BITDelay Sets or queries the number of delay bits for the specified AUDIO bus BUS B x AUDio BITOrder Specifies the bit order for the specified AUDIO bus BUS B x AUDio CLOCk POLarity Sets or queries the clock polarity for the specified AUDIO bus BUS B x AUDio CLOCk SOUrce Sets or queries the clock source waveform for the specified AUDIO bus BUS B x AUDio CLOCk THReshold Sets or quer...

Page 31: ...ts or queries the Ethernet DATA Plus source threshold for the specified bus BUS B x ETHERnet IPVFOUR Sets or queries whether IPV4 packets are available for triggering on Ethernet BUS B x ETHERnet LOWTHRESHold Sets or queries the Ethernet DATA source Low threshold for the specified bus BUS B x ETHERnet QTAGGING Sets or queries whether Q Tagging packets are available for triggering on Ethernet BUS B...

Page 32: ...format BUS B x LIN POLarity Sets or queries the LIN bus polarity BUS B x LIN SAMPLEpoint Specifies the point to sample during each bit period as a percent for the specified LIN bus BUS B x LIN SOUrce Sets or queries sets the LIN bus source BUS B x LIN SOUrce THReshold Sets or queries the LIN source threshold for the specified bus BUS B x LIN STANDard Sets or queries the LIN bus standard BUS B x LI...

Page 33: ... SCLK source for the specified bus BUS B x SPI CLOCk THReshold Sets or queries the SPI Clock SCLK source threshold for the specified bus BUS B x SPI DATa POLarity Sets or queries the SPI data DATA polarity for the specified bus BUS B x SPI DATa SIZe Sets or queries the number of bits per word for the specified bus BUS B x SPI DATa SOUrce Sets or queries the SPI data DATA source for the specified b...

Page 34: ...ned bus BUSTABle ADDNew Adds the specified bus table BUSTABle DELete Deletes the specified bus table BUSTABle LIST Lists all currently defined bus tables DISplay WAVEView x BUS B x STATE Sets or queries the state of the specified bus in the specified waveview DISplay WAVEView x BUS B x VERTical POSition Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified bus in the specified waveview 2 18 MSO54...

Page 35: ...nds Command Description CAL Instructs the instrument to perform signal path calibration and returns the calibration status when complete Takes several minutes to run CALibrate Returns the calibration status CALibrate INTERNal Starts the signal path calibration Takes several minutes to run CALibrate INTERNal STARt Starts the signal path calibration CALibrate INTERNal STATus Returns the status of th...

Page 36: ...r XYZ format waveform cursors indicate the amplitude position of an XY pair Ch1 vs Ch2 voltage where Ch1 is the X axis and Ch2 is the Y axis relative to the trigger Screen cursors Consist of two pairs of horizontal and vertical bar cursors You can use these cursors to indicate an arbitrary position within the waveform display area Screen cursors are basically just turning on horizontal bars and ve...

Page 37: ...d view DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor STATE Sets or queries the visible state of the specified cursor in the specified view DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor VBArs APOSition Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified view DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor VBArs BPOSition Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified vie...

Page 38: ...source mode in the specified view DISplay PLOTView x CURSor STATE Sets or queries the visible state of the cursor of the specified cursor in the specified view DISplay PLOTView x CURSor VBArs APOSition Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified view DISplay PLOTView x CURSor VBArs BPOSition Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the speci...

Page 39: ...FFTView x CURSor SCREEN BYPOSition Sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor SPLITMODE Sets or queries whether both cursors have same or different source DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor STATE Sets or queries the visible state of the cursor of the specified cursor n the specified view DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor VBArs APOSit...

Page 40: ...r CURSOR x HBArs BUNIts Queries the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified waveview DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x HBArs DELTa Sets or queries the delta V cursor readout value over the history period DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x MODe Sets or queries the cursor tracking mode of the specified cursor in the specified waveview DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x ONEO...

Page 41: ... specified cursor in the specified waveview DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x VBArs UNIts Queries cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified waveview DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x WAVEform APOSition Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified waveview DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x WAVEform BPOSition Sets or queries the ...

Page 42: ...l bit CH x _D x LABel NAMe Sets or queries the label of the specified digital bit REF x _DALL LABel COLor Sets or queries the color of the specified digital group REF x _DALL LABel FONT BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the specified digital group REF x _DALL LABel FONT ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the specified digital group REF x _DALL LABel FONT SIZE Sets or queries the font ...

Page 43: ...ueries the y position of the label of the specified digital channel DIGGRP x D x THReshold Sets or queries the threshold level in volts for specified digital channel DIGGRP x THReshold Sets the digital threshold of all bits on specified digital channel group MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP Programmer 2 27 ...

Page 44: ...pecific have a view parameter in the programmable interface such as DISPLAY WAVEView x or DISPLAY PLOTView x Selected source can also be specified on a per view basis The overall selected source is determined by the selected view and the selected source within that view PlotViews and WaveViews have some differences in command syntax due to differences in view functionality For example WaveViews an...

Page 45: ...ale for plots DISplay REFFFTView x GRIDlines Sets or returns the grid lines setting of the plot DISplay REFFFTView x REF REF x STATE Sets or queries the state of the specified reference waveform in the specified waveview DISplay REFFFTView x XAXIS SCALE Sets or queries the x axis scale setting for REFFFT DISplay SELect BUS Sets or queries the overall selected bus DISplay SELect MATH Sets or querie...

Page 46: ...uto scaled when the math equation changes within the specified waveview DISplay WAVEView x PLOT PLOT x STATE Sets or queries the state of the specified trend waveform in the specified waveview DISplay WAVEView x PLOT PLOT x VERTical POSition Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified time trend in the specified waveview in divisions DISplay WAVEView x PLOT PLOT x VERTical SCAle Sets or...

Page 47: ...he DVM has been on since the last change using the DVM MODe or DVM SOUrce commands or DVM RESET DVM MEASUrement VALue Returns the DVM readout value DVM MODe Specifies or queries the mode to use for the Digital Voltmeter DVM SOUrce Sets or queries the source for the Digital Voltmeter DVM TRIGger FREQuency COUNTer Sets or queries the state of the trigger frequency counter Ethernet Command Group Use ...

Page 48: ...pe ETHERnet NETWORKCONFig Specifies the Ethernet network configuration setting ETHERnet PING Causes the oscilloscope to ping the gateway IP address ETHERnet PING STATus Returns the results from sending the ETHERnet PING command to ping the gateway IP address ETHERnet SUBNETMask Specifies the network subnet mask value 2 32 MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP Programmer ...

Page 49: ...ple the sequence n might be interpreted as a newline character t might be interpreted as a tab character To ensure that this interpretation does not occur you can use double back slashes For example C testfile txt Some FILESystem commands can fail because a file has read only attributes You will not be able to delete or replace such files until this attribute is removed Refer to the operating syst...

Page 50: ...system commands cont Command Description FILESystem RMDir Deletes the named directory FILESystem UNMOUNT DRIve Unmount the USB drive FILESystem WRITEFile Copies the block data to a named file 2 34 MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP Programmer ...

Page 51: ...COUNt Sets or returns the number of frames HORizontal FASTframe MAXFRames Returns the maximum number of frames HORizontal FASTframe MULtipleframes MODe Sets or returns the overlay display type HORizontal FASTframe REF FRAme Sets or returns the reference frame number HORizontal FASTframe REF INCLUde Sets or returns whether the reference frame delta information is shown in the display HORizontal FAS...

Page 52: ...he horizontal FastAcq maximum record length HORizontal MODe MANual CONFIGure Sets or queries which horizontal control scale or record length will also change when the sample rate is adjusted HORizontal MODE RECOrdlength Sets or queries the record length HORizontal MODE SAMPLERate Sets or queries the sample rate HORizontal MODE SCAle Sets or queries the horizontal scale HORizontal POSition Sets or ...

Page 53: ...form is altered math waveforms containing those waveforms as sources are also updated to reflect the changes Also sources must exist but do not need to be displayed to be used in and to update math waveforms NOTE Math commands are present once a math has been added Table 2 30 Math commands Command Description DISplay GLObal MATH x STATE Sets or queries the global state of the specified math DISpla...

Page 54: ... specified math source MATH MATH x SPECTral HORZ Sets or queries the horizontal display scale of the spectral math waveform MATH MATH x SPECTral MAG Sets or queries the units of the SpectralMag function in the specified math definition string MATH MATH x SPECTral PHASE Sets or queries the units of a SpectralPhase function in the specified math definition string MATH MATH x SPECTral SOUrce Sets or ...

Page 55: ...and MEASUrement MEAS GLOBalref 0 Per source settings are used when per source settings are enabled with the command MEASUrement REFLevels TYPE PerSource and per source settings are selected for the measurement with the command MEASUrement MEAS GLOBalref 0 Global reference level commands are of the form MEASUrement REFLevels XXXX Per source reference level commands are of the form MEASUrement CH1 R...

Page 56: ...te the high reference level of the falling edge when the source ref level method is set to percent MEASUrement CH x REFLevels PERCent FALLLow This command sets or queries the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP and 0 is equal to BASE used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge when the source ref level method is set to percent MEASUrement CH x REFLevels PERCent FALLMid This comm...

Page 57: ...PBandwidth This command sets or queries the global loop bandwidth used for PLL clock recovery MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery MEANAUTOCalculate This command sets or queries how often the clock is calculated for constant clock recovery MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery METHod This command sets or queries the global clock recovery method MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery MODel This command sets or queries the global PLL ...

Page 58: ...the state of RJ locking MEASUrement LOCKRJValue Sets or queries the RJ lock value MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels ABSolute FALLHigh This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the falling edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels ABSolute FALLLow This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the fal...

Page 59: ... to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge when the source ref level method is set to percent MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels PERCent RISEMid This command sets or queries the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP and 0 is equal to BASE used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge when the source ref level method is set to percent MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels PERCent TYPE ...

Page 60: ...ion of the cycle cycle statistics for the specified measurement for the current acquisition MEASUrement MEAS x CCRESUlts CURRentacq STDDev This query only command returns the standard deviation cycle cycle for the specified measurement for the current acquisition MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery ADVanced METHod This command sets or queries the advanced clock recovery method when advanced clock rec...

Page 61: ...ement when the measurement type is AC common mode MEASUrement MEAS x COMMONMode SOURCEs This command sets or queries the number of sources for the measurement when the measurement type is AC common mode MEASUrement MEAS x CYCLemode This command sets or queries the cycle mode for the measurement MEASUrement MEAS x DELay EDGE x This command sets or queries the to edge type when EDGE is EDGE1 and the...

Page 62: ...asurement MEASUrement MEAS x GATing This command sets or queries the gating type for the measurement MEASUrement MEAS x GATing ACTive This command sets or queries the gating active level when the gating type is logic MEASUrement MEAS x GATing GLOBal This command sets or queries the gating settings global flag MEASUrement MEAS x GATing HYSTeresis This command sets or queries the gating hysteresis v...

Page 63: ...queries the range settings global flag for the measurement MEASUrement MEAS x MEASRange MAX This command sets or queries the range maximum value for the measurement MEASUrement MEAS x MEASRange MIN This command sets or queries the range minimum value for the measurement MEASUrement MEAS x MEASRange STATE This command sets or queries the range state for the measurement MEASUrement MEAS x PATTERNDET...

Page 64: ...urement MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x PERCent FALLHigh This command sets or queries the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP and 0 is equal to BASE used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to percent MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x PERCent FALLLow This command sets or queries the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP and 0 is equa...

Page 65: ...e mean value for the measurement for the current acquisition MEASUrement MEAS x RESUlts CURRentacq MINimum This query only command returns the minimum value found for the specified measurement since the last statistical reset MEASUrement MEAS x RESUlts CURRentacq PK2PK This query only command returns the peak to peak value for the specified measurement for the current acquisition MEASUrement MEAS ...

Page 66: ...ge MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute RISELow Sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the rising edge MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute RISEMid Sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the rising edge MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute TYPE Sets or queries the reference level type MEASUrement REFLevels BASETop Sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and B...

Page 67: ...SEMid Sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the rising edge MEASUrement REF x REFLevels ABSolute TYPE Sets or queries the reference level type MEASUrement REF x REFLevels BASETop Sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE used to calculate reference levels MEASUrement REF x REFLevels METHod Sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels MEAS...

Page 68: ...iption MEASUrement REF x REFLevels PERCent TYPE Sets or queries the reference level percent type MEASUrement STATIstics CYCLEMode This command sets or queries whether cycle cycle statistics are calculated for all measurements 2 52 MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP Programmer ...

Page 69: ...played menu FPAnel TURN Emulates a knob turn HEADer Sets or queries the Response Header Enable State ID Returns identifying information about the instrument and its firmware IDN Returns the instrument identification code LICense Queries all license parameters LICENSE APPID Returns a comma separated list of the active application IDs LICense COUNt Returns a count of the number of active licenses in...

Page 70: ...ol Sets or queries the protocol for the socket server TEKSecure Initializes both waveform and setup memories TIMe Queries the time displayed by the instrument TIMe ZONe Sets the time zone to the one specified TIMe ZONe UTCDELTa Sets or queries the time zone using the difference between the desired time zone and UTC TOTaluptime Returns the total number of hours the oscilloscope has been turned on s...

Page 71: ...ABel XPOS Sets or queries the x position of the specified trend label PLOT PLOT x LABel YPOS Sets or queries the y position of the specified trend label PLOT PLOT x NUMBins Sets or queries the current histogram resolution PLOT PLOT x SOUrce x Sets or queries the measurement source PLOT PLOT x SPECtrum BASE Sets or queries the spectrum base Undefined for non spectrum plots PLOT PLOT x SPECtrum DYNR...

Page 72: ...ement badge POWer POWer x GATing GLOBal Sets or queries the gating settings for the specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x HARMONICS CLASs Sets or queries the class type for the harmonics measurement in the specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x HARMONICS CMEThod Sets or queries the fundamental current method for the harmonics measurement in the specified power measurement badge ...

Page 73: ...CYCLE EDGEType Sets or queries the clock edge type for positive duty cycle measurement in the specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x PDUTYCYCLE INPUTSOurce Sets or queries the input source for positive duty cycle measurement in the specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x PERIOD EDGe Sets or queries the edge type for period measurement in the specified power measurement badge POWer...

Page 74: ...e specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent FALLMid Sets or queries the falling edge for mid reference level in percentage for the specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent HYSTeresis Sets or queries the hysteresis in percentage for the specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent RISEHigh Sets or queries the rising edge for high...

Page 75: ... the limit of partial odd harmonic current for the specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq POHCM Queries the measured value of partial odd harmonic current for the specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq POHCS Queries the status of partial odd harmonic current for the specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq POPUlation...

Page 76: ...urement in the specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS ILEVELAbs Sets or queries the current level Ton Start Stop in absolute units for switching loss measurement in the specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS ILEVELPct Sets or queries the current level Ton Start Stop in percentage for switching loss measurement in the specified power measurement badge P...

Page 77: ...ple measurement in the specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x SWITCHINGRIPPLE LFREQuency Sets or queries the switching frequency for switching ripple measurement in the specified power measurement badge POWer POWer x TYPe Sets or queries the measurement type for the specified power measurement badge POWERTABle ADDNew Adds the power harmonics table POWERTABle DELete Deletes the power harmo...

Page 78: ...e EVENTtable MEASUrement Saves data measurement results to the specified file SAVe IMAGe Saves a capture of the screen contents to the specified image file SAVe REPOrt Saves a report to the specified file or if no argument is specified uses the folder and file name specified by the related commands SAVe REPOrt COMMents Sets or queries the comments to be included in saved report files SAVe SESsion ...

Page 79: ...IGer is ON SAVEON IMAGe FILEFormat Sets or queries the file format to be used for saved image files SAVEON IMAGe Sets or queries whether to save a screen capture when a trigger occurs SAVEON TRIGger Sets or queries whether to save a file when a trigger occurs SAVEON WAVEform Sets or queries whether to save a waveform when a limit test failure mask failure or trigger occurs SAVEON WAVEform FILEForm...

Page 80: ... TRIGger A BUS ARINC429A SDI VALue Sets or queries the when searching on an ARINC429 SDI field SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ARINC429A SSM VALue Sets or queries the when searching on an ARINC429 SSM field SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ARINC429A DATa QUALifier Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on data in the DATA field for an ARINC429 bus signal SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS A...

Page 81: ...the type of error condition for a CAN bus to search on SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS CAN FD BRSBit Sets or queries the value of the bit rate switch bit BRS bit for a CAN bus to search on SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS CAN FD ESIBit Sets or queries the value of the error state indicator bit ESI bit for a CAN bus to search on SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS CAN FRAMEtype Sets or queries CAN bus trigger...

Page 82: ... Q Tag field SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet TCPHeader ACKnum VALue Specifies the 32 bit value to use when searching on the Ethernet TCP header acknowledgement number SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet TCPHeader DESTinationport VALue Specifies the 16 bit value to use when searching on the Ethernet TCP header destination port number SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet TCPHeader SEQnum...

Page 83: ...der frame id SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY HEADER INDBits Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search header Indicator Bits SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENgth Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search trigger header payload length SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS I2C ADDRess MODe Sets or queries the address mode for the specified I2C bus trigger search to determine where to place ...

Page 84: ...earching on command word addresses for a MIL STD 1553 bus SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND ADDRess VALue Sets or queries the low value when searching on command word addresses for a MIL STD 1553 bus SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND ADDRess HIVALue Sets or queries the high value when searching on command word addresses for a MIL STD 1553 bus SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS...

Page 85: ...n bytes to be used for an RS232 bus search to determine where to place a mark when the search condition is Data SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Sets or queries the bus source for the specified bus trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS SPI CONDition Sets or queries the trigger condition for the specified SPI bus trigger search to determine where to pla...

Page 86: ...r A BUS USB SPLIT PORT VALue Sets or queries the port address for the specified USB bus trigger on split token field search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB SPLIT SC VALue Sets or queries the Start Complete value for the specified USB bus trigger on split token field search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB SPLIT SE VALue Sets ...

Page 87: ...CH SEARCH x TRIGger A EDGE THReshold Sets or queries the source threshold level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc CLOCk THReshold Sets or queries the logic clock threshold for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc DELTatime Specifies the Logic search delta time value SEARCH SEARCH x TRIG...

Page 88: ...RUNT POLarity Specifies the polarity for the runt search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Sets and queries the source for the Runt search input SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT THReshold HIGH Sets or queries the source threshold HIGH level for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT THReshold LOW Sets or queries the source threshold LOW level for ...

Page 89: ...r A TRANsition THReshold HIGH Sets or queries the source threshold HIGH level for a transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANsition THReshold LOW Sets or queries the source threshold LOW level for a transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A WINdow CROSSIng Sets or queries the window trigger threshold cro...

Page 90: ...ps to run DIAg LOOP STOP Stops diagnostics looping DIAg MODe Sets or queries the diagnostics mode DIAg RESUlt Returns the diagnostics results DIAg RESUlt FLAg Returns the status of the diagnostics single area DIAg RESUlt LOG Returns the status of the diagnostic area DIAg SELect Selects or queries an available diagnostic area DIAg STATE Sets the instrument operating state TOUCHSCReen CALibrate Star...

Page 91: ... Standard Event Status Register EVENT Returns event code from the event queue EVMsg Returns event code message from the event queue EVQty Returns number of events that are enabled in the queue OPC Generates the operation complete message in the standard event status register when all pending operations are finished Or returns 1 when all current operations are finished OPT Returns a comma separated...

Page 92: ...B BUS B x ARINC429A ERRTYPe Sets or queries the error type when triggering on an ARINC429 bus signal TRIGger A B BUS B x ARINC429A LABel QUALifier Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on label data for an ARINC429 bus signal TRIGger A B BUS B x ARINC429A LABel VALue Sets or queries the low value when triggering on an ARINC429 label field TRIGger A B BUS B x ARINC429A LABel HIVA...

Page 93: ...TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN DATa SIZe Sets the length of the data string in bytes to be used when triggering on a CAN bus signal TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN DATa VALue Sets the binary data value to be used when triggering on a CAN bus signal TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN ERRType Sets or queries the type of error condition for a CAN bus to triggering on TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN FD BRSBit Sets or queries the value...

Page 94: ...ondition is set to MACLENgth and the qualifier is set to LESSthan MOREthan EQual UNEQual LESSEQual or MOREEQual this command specifies the 16 bit value to trigger on TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet QTAG VALue When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to QTAG this command specifies the 32 bit Q Tag value to trigger on TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet TCPHeader ACKnum VALue When the Ethernet trigger condi...

Page 95: ...e cycle count portion of the binary header string when triggering on the FlexRay bus header TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID Specifies the frame ID portion of the binary header string when triggering on the FlexRay bus header TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray HEADER INDBits Specifies the indicator bits portion of the binary header string when triggering on the FlexRay bus header TRIGger A B BU...

Page 96: ... to triggering on TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B COMMAND ADDRess QUALifier Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on command word addresses for a MIL STD 1553 bus TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B COMMAND ADDRess VALue Sets or queries the low value when triggering on command word addresses for a MIL STD 1553 bus TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B COMMAND ADDRess HIVALue Sets or queries the hi...

Page 97: ...wer limit to be used when triggering on response time inter message gap time for a MIL STD 1553 bus TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B TIMe MORELimit Sets or queries the upper limit to be used when triggering on response time inter message gap time for a MIL STD 1553 bus TRIGger A B BUS B x PARallel DATa VALue Specifies the binary data string used for a Parallel Bus trigger TRIGger A B BUS B x RS232C CO...

Page 98: ...ORT VALue When triggering on a high speed USB split transaction this command specifies the split transaction port address value to trigger on TRIGger A B BUS B x USB SPLit SC VALue When triggering on a high speed USB split transaction this command specifies whether to trigger on the start or complete phase of the split transaction based on the Start Complete bit field value TRIGger A B BUS B x USB...

Page 99: ...th in seconds for a runt trigger TRIGger A B SETHold CLOCk EDGE Specifies the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering TRIGger A B SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Specifies the clock source for the setup and hold triggering TRIGger A B SETHold HOLDTime Specifies the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering TRIGger A B SETHold SETTime Specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation tri...

Page 100: ...er mode TRIGger AUXLevel Sets or queries the Auxiliary Input voltage level to use for an edge trigger TRIGger B BY Sets or queries B trigger time or event qualifiers TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt Sets or queries the number of events that must occur before the B trigger occurs TRIGger B RESET Sets the B reset trigger level to 50 TRIGger B RESET EDGE COUPling Sets or queries the trigger coupling for a sequ...

Page 101: ...erline state of the specified channel label CH x LABel NAMe Defines or queries the label for the channel waveform CH x LABel XPOS Sets or queries the X display coordinate for the channel waveform label CH x LABel YPOS Sets or queries the Y display coordinate for the channel waveform label CH x OFFSet Sets or queries the channel offset CH x POSition Sets or queries the vertical position for the spe...

Page 102: ...he specified reference REF REF x LABel COLor Sets or queries the color of the specified ref label REF REF x LABel FONT BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the specified reference label REF REF x LABel FONT ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the specified reference label REF REF x LABel FONT SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the specified reference label REF REF x LABel FONT TYPE Set...

Page 103: ... VERTical DESKEW FROM SOUrce Sets or queries the source channel for performing channel to channel deskew adjustment VERTical DESKEW TO SOUrce Sets or queries the target channel for performing channel to channel deskew adjustment MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP Programmer 2 87 ...

Page 104: ...n either ASCII or binary format You specify the format with the DATa ENCdg command The instrument uses signed 4 byte integers and floating point values it does not support unsigned floating point values ASCII data is represented by signed integer or floating point values An example ASCII waveform data string can look like this CURVE space 110 109 110 110 109 107 109 107 106 105 103 100 97 90 84 80...

Page 105: ...n of the waveform or you can transfer the entire record You can use the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands to specify the first and last data points of the waveform record When transferring data from the instrument you must specify the first and last data points in the waveform record Setting DATa STARt to 1 and DATa STOP to the record length will always return the entire waveform Waveform data loc...

Page 106: ...ation of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe command DATa ENCdg Sets or queries the format of outgoing waveform data DATa SOUrce Sets or queries the location of waveform data transferred from the instrument DATa SOUrce AVAILable Returns a list of enumerations representing the source waveforms that are currently available for CURVe queries DATa STARt Sets or queries the starting po...

Page 107: ...f Returns the trigger point relative to DATA START for the waveform WFMOutpre WFId Returns a string describing the acquisition parameters for the waveform WFMOutpre XINcr Returns the horizontal sampling interval WFMOutpre XUNit Returns the horizontal units for the waveform WFMOutpre XZEro Returns the sub sample time between the trigger sample and the occurrence of the actual waveform trigger WFMOu...

Page 108: ...t edge of the zoom x axis in the specified plot view DISplay REFFFTView x ZOOM YAXIS FROM Sets or queries the bottom value of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view DISplay REFFFTView x ZOOM YAXIS TO Sets or queries the top value of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view DISplay WAVEView x ZOOM ZOOM x HORizontal POSition Sets or queries the horizontal zoom position of the specified zoom in...

Page 109: ...up Acquisition Syntax ACQuire FASTAcq PALEtte NORMal TEMPerature SPECtral INVErted ACQuire FASTAcq PALEtte Arguments NORMal colors traces according to their channel TEMPerature colors all traces using a multicolored palette where intensity is represented by hue blue for least frequently hit red for most frequently hit All traces share this palette This is the default color palette SPECtral colors ...

Page 110: ...y other value turns this feature on OFF disables the FASTAcq feature ON enables the FASTAcq feature Examples ACQUIRE FASTACQ STATE ON turns on fast acquisition mode ACQUIRE FASTACQ STATE might return ACQUIRE FASTACQ STATE 0 indicating that fast acquisition mode is off ACQuire MAXSamplerate Query Only This query returns the maximum real time sample rate Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire MAXSamplerat...

Page 111: ...e resulting waveform shows an average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform acquisitions The instrument processes the number of waveforms you specify into the acquired waveform creating a running exponential average of the input signal The number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the average waveform is set or queried using the ACQuire NUMAVg command ENVelope specifies...

Page 112: ...ed Commands ACQuire STATE Examples ACQUIRE NUMACQ might return ACQUIRE NUMACQ 350 indicating that 350 acquisitions have occurred since executing an ACQuire STATE RUN command ACQuire NUMAVg This command sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an averaged waveform Ranges from 2 to 10240 Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire NUMAVg NR1 ACQuire NUMAVg Related Commands ACQuire MODe ...

Page 113: ... the number of acquisitions or measurements in the sequence completed so far Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire SEQuence CURrent Examples ACQUIRE SEQUENCE CURRENT might return ACQUIRE SEQUENCE CURRENT 5 ACQuire SEQuence MODe In single sequence acquisition the single sequence stop after count is based on the number of acquisitions Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire SEQuence MODe NUMACQs Arguments NUMAC...

Page 114: ... RUN a new acquisition will be started If the last acquisition was a single acquisition sequence a new single sequence acquisition will be started If the last acquisition was continuous a new continuous acquisition will be started If RUN is issued in the middle of completing a single sequence acquisition for example averaging or enveloping the acquisition sequence is restarted and any accumulated ...

Page 115: ...on the front panel button is equivalent to sending these commands ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE and ACQUIRE STATE 1 Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire STOPAfter RUNSTop SEQuence ACQuire STOPAfter Related Commands ACQuire STATE Arguments RUNSTop specifies that the instrument will continually acquire data if ACQuire STATE is turned on SEQuence specifies that the next acquisition will be a single sequence...

Page 116: ...sets or queries the source name for the Arbitrary Waveform Currently supported sources are either waveform file wfm or text file csv Conditions Requires option AFG Group AFG Syntax AFG ARBitrary SOUrce QString AFG ARBitrary SOUrce Arguments QString is the source name Examples AFG ARBITRARY SOURCE E Waveforms Square wfm sets the source waveform to E Waveforms Square wfm AFG ARBITRARY SOURCE might r...

Page 117: ...G FREQUENCY 312 5000E 3 indicating the frequency is set to 312 5 kHz AFG FUNCtion Sets or queries which AFG function to execute Conditions Requires option AFG Group AFG Syntax AFG FUNCtion SINE SQUare PULSe RAMP NOISe DC SINC GAUSsian LORENtz ERISe EDECAy HAVERSINe CARDIac ARBitrary AFG FUNCtion Arguments SINE SQUare PULSe RAMP NOISe DC The DC level is controlled by AFG OFFSet SINC Sin x x GAUSsia...

Page 118: ...Requires option AFG Group AFG Syntax AFG HIGHLevel NR3 AFG HIGHLevel Arguments Floating point number that represents the AFG high level value in volts Examples AFG HIGHLEVEL 1 0 sets the AFG high level value to 1 0 volts AFG HIGHLEVEL might return AFG HIGHLEVEL 1 5000 indicating the high level is set to 1 5 Volts AFG LOWLevel This command sets or queries the low level value of the output waveform ...

Page 119: ...m is 100 0 and increment is 1 0 Conditions Requires option AFG Group AFG Syntax AFG NOISEAdd PERCent NR3 AFG NOISEAdd PERCent Arguments Floating point number that represents the AFG additive noise level as a percentage Examples AFG NOISEADD PERCENT 50 sets the AFG additive noise level to 50 percent AFG NOISEADD PERCENT might return AFG NOISEADD PERCENT 0 indicating that no noise is added AFG NOISE...

Page 120: ...tax AFG OFFSet NR3 AFG OFFSet Arguments Floating point number that represents the AFG offset in volts Examples AFG OFFSET 1 0 sets the AFG offset to 1 0 volts AFG OFFSET might return AFG OFFSET 0 0E 0 indicating there is no offset AFG OUTPut LOAd IMPEDance Sets or queries the AFG output load impedance Conditions Requires option AFG Group AFG Syntax AFG OUTPut LOAd IMPEDance FIFty HIGHZ AFG OUTPut ...

Page 121: ... AFG Syntax AFG OUTPut STATE 0 1 OFF ON AFG OUTPut STATE Arguments 1 or ON turns on the AFG output state 0 or OFF turns it off Examples AFG OUTPUT STATE ON turns on the AFG output state AFG OUTPUT STATE might return AFG OUTPUT STATE 1 indicating the AFG output is on AFG PERIod Sets or queries the period of the AFG waveform in seconds Conditions Requires option AFG Group AFG Syntax AFG PERIod NR3 A...

Page 122: ...G Syntax AFG PULse WIDth NR3 AFG PULse WIDth Arguments NR3 is the floating point number that represents the pulse width in seconds Examples AFG PULSE WIDTH 100 0E 6 sets the AFG pulse width to 100 microseconds AFG PULSE WIDTH might return AFG PULSE WIDTH 1 0000E 6 indicating the pulse width is set to 1 μs AFG RAMP SYMmetry Sets or queries the AFG ramp symmetry in percent Minimum is 0 0 maximum is ...

Page 123: ...g point number that represents the AFG duty cycle as a percentage Examples AFG SQUARE DUTY 50 0 sets the AFG duty cycle to 50 percent AFG SQUARE DUTY might return AFG SQUARE DUTY 50 0000 indicating the duty cycle is set to 50 ALIas This command sets or queries the state of alias functionality and it is identical to the ALIAS STATE command Group Alias Syntax ALIas OFF ON NR1 ALIas Related Commands ...

Page 124: ...es ALIAS CATALOG might return the string ALIAS CATALOG SETUP1 TESTMENU1 DEFAULT showing that there are three aliases named SETUP1 TESTMENU1 and DEFAULT ALIas DEFine This command assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label These messages are then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a command or query provided that ALIas STATE is turned on The query form of this command...

Page 125: ...p set AUTOSET EXECUTE defines an alias named ST1 that recalls a previously saved setup and performs an autoset ALIAS DEFINE ST1 returns ALIAS DEFINE ST1 247 RECALL SETUP C mySetup set AUTOSET EXECUTE ALIas DELEte No Query Form This command removes a specified alias and is identical to ALIas DELEte NAMe An error message is generated if the named alias does not exist Group Alias Syntax ALIas DELEte ...

Page 126: ...DELEte NAMe without specifying an alias causes an exception error QString must be a previously defined alias Examples ALIAS DELETE NAME STARTUP deletes the alias named STARTUP ALIas STATE This command turns aliases on or off and is identical to the ALIas command The query form of this command returns the state of the aliases Group Alias Syntax ALIas STATE NR1 OFF ON ALIas STATE Arguments NR1 0 tur...

Page 127: ...similar to repeatedly sending EVMsg queries to the instrument Group Status and Error Syntax ALLEv Related Commands ESR EVMsg Examples ALLEV might return ALLEV 2225 Measurement error No waveform to measure 420 Query UNTERMINATED AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT This command sets or queries the idle time from the programmable interface before auto save occurs Group Miscellaneous Syntax AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT NR1 AUTOSA...

Page 128: ...ds AUTOset No Query Form This command no query format sets the vertical horizontal and trigger controls of the instrument to automatically acquire and display the selected waveform Group Miscellaneous Syntax AUTOset EXECute Arguments EXECute autosets the displayed waveform this is equivalent to pressing the front panel AUTOSET button Examples AUTOSET EXECute autosets the displayed waveform AUXout ...

Page 129: ...REFOUT AFG AUXout SOUrce Arguments ATRIGger sets the source at the BNC connector to the main trigger REFOUT sets the source at the BNC connector to the reference output AFG sets the source at the BNC connector to the AFG output Examples AUXOUT SOURCE might return AUXOUT SOURCE ATRIGGER indicating that the source at the BNC connector is set to the A trigger BUS ADDNew No Query Form This command add...

Page 130: ...Rate CUSTom to set the bit rate Conditions Requires option SR AERO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x ARINC429A BITRate LOW HI CUSTom BUS B x ARINC429A BITRate Related Commands BUS B x ARINC429A BITRate CUSTom Arguments Arguments specify the bit rate Examples BUS B1 ARINC429A BITRATE LOW sets the bit rate to handle low speed signals BUS B1 ARINC429A BITRATE might return BUS B1 ARINC429A BITRATE HI indicatin...

Page 131: ...ied ARINC429 bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR AERO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x ARINC429A DATAFORmat DATA SDIDATA SDIDATASSM BUS B x ARINC429A DATAFORmat Arguments DATA specifies a DATA field width of 19 bits covering bits 11 through 29 of the 32 bit packet SDIDATA specifies a DATA field width of 21 bits covering bits 9 through 29 of the 32 bit packet SDIDATASSM specifies a ...

Page 132: ...US B2 ARINC429A POLARITY might return BUS B2 ARINC429A POLARITY NORMAL indicating that the Bus 2 ARINC429 polarity is set to normal BUS B x ARINC429A SOUrce This command sets or queries the source for the specified ARINC429 bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR AERO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x ARINC429A SOUrce CH X Math x REF x BUS B x ARINC429A SOUrce Arguments CH x specifies a...

Page 133: ... NR3 BUS B x ARINC429A THRESHold Related Commands BUS B x ARINC429A SOUrce Arguments NR3 is the ARINC429 lower threshold for the specified bus Examples BUS B3 ARINC429A THRESHOLD 200e 3 sets the Bus 3 ARINC429 upper threshold to 200 mV BUS B2 ARINC429A THRESHOLD might return BUS B2 ARINC429A THRESHOLD 500 0000E 3 indicating the Bus 2 ARINC429 upper threshold is set to 500 mV BUS B x AUDio BITDelay...

Page 134: ...O Group Bus Syntax BUS B x AUDio BITOrder MSB LSB BUS B x AUDio BITOrder Arguments MSB specifies that the most significant bit will be expected first in the order LSB specifies that the least significant bit will be expected first in the order Examples BUS B1 AUDIO BITORDER LSB sets the bit order to LSB BUS B1 AUDIO BITORDER might return BUS B1 AUDIO BITORDER MSB indicating that the MSB is first i...

Page 135: ... Conditions Requires option SR AUDIO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x AUDio CLOCk SOUrce CH x CH x _D x Math x REF x REF x _D x BUS B x AUDio CLOCk SOUrce Arguments CH x specifies an analog channel as the clock source waveform for the audio bus CH x _D x specifies a digital channel as the clock source waveform for the specified audio bus Math x specifies a math waveform as the clock source waveform for th...

Page 136: ... x AUDio CLOCk SOUrce Arguments NR3 is the audio clock source threshold for the specified bus Examples BUS B3 AUDIO CLOCK THRESHOLD 500 0E 3 sets the Bus 3 audio Cclock source threshold to 500 0 mV BUS B2 AUDIO CLOCK THRESHOLD might return BUS B2 AUDIO CLOCK THRESHOLD 1 0 indicates the Bus 2 audio clock source threshold is set to 1 0 V BUS B x AUDio DATa POLarity This command sets or queries the a...

Page 137: ...udio bus The bus is specified by x NOTE This command only applies to the TDM Audio type Conditions Requires option SR AUDIO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x AUDio DATa SIZe NR1 BUS B x AUDio DATa SIZe Arguments NR1 specifies the number of bits per word Examples BUS B1 AUDIO DATA SIZE 8 sets the number of bits per word to 8 BUS B1 AUDIO DATA SIZE might return BUS B1 AUDIO DATA SIZE 24 indicating that the n...

Page 138: ... waveform for the specified audio bus Examples BUS B1 AUDIO DATA SOURCE CH1_D1 sets the data source to D1 of FlexChannel 1 BUS B1 AUDIO DATA SOURCE might return BUS B1 AUDIO DATA SOURCE CH3 indicating that the data source is set to CH3 BUS B x AUDio DATa THReshold This command sets or queries the audio data source threshold for the specified bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option...

Page 139: ...ecified bus Examples BUS B1 AUDio DATa WORDSize 24 sets the audio bits per word to 24 bits BUS B1 AUDio DATa WORDSize might return BUS B1 AUDIO DATA WORDSIZE 24 indicating the bits per word is 24 BUS B x AUDio FRAME CLOCKBITSPERCHANNEL This command sets or queries the audio bits of sync width for the specified bus The bus is specified by x NOTE This command only applies to the TDM Audio type Condi...

Page 140: ... to the TDM Audio type Conditions Requires option SR AUDIO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x AUDio FRAME SIZe NR1 BUS B x AUDio FRAME SIZe Arguments NR1 specifies the number of channels in each frame Examples BUS B1 AUDIO FRAME SIZE 2 sets the frame size to 2 BUS B1 AUDIO FRAME SIZE might return BUS B1 AUDIO FRAME SIZE 8 indicating that the number of channels in each frame is set to 8 BUS B x AUDio TYPe Th...

Page 141: ...cified audio bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR AUDIO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x AUDio WORDSel POLarity NORMal INVERTed BUS B x AUDio WORDSel POLarity Arguments NORMal specifies positive polarity INVERTed specifies negative polarity Examples BUS B1 AUDIO WORDSEL POLARITY NORMal sets normal as the word select polarity BUS B1 AUDIO WORDSEl POLARITY might return BUS B1 AUDIO WO...

Page 142: ...B1 AUDIO WORDSEL SOURCE CH1 sets CH1 as the word select source BUS B1 AUDIO WORDSEL SOURCE CH2_D3 sets D3 of FlexChannel 2 as the word select source BUS B1 AUDIO WORDSEL SOURCE might return BUS B1 AUDIO WORDSEL SOURCE CH2 indicating that the word select source is set to CH2 BUS B x AUDio WORDSel THReshold This command sets or queries the audio word select source threshold for the specified bus The...

Page 143: ...0K RATE25K RATE250K RATE31K RATE33K RATE400K RATE50K RATE500K RATE62K RATE68K RATE800K RATE83K RATE92K CUSTom BUS B x CAN BITRate Related Commands BUS B x CAN BITRate VALue Arguments Arguments specify the bit rate Examples BUS B1 CAN BITRate RATE1M sets the CAN bit rate to 1 Mb BUS B1 CAN BITRate might return BUS B1 CAN BITRATE RATE500K indicating the CAN bit rate is set to 500 k BUS B x CAN BITRa...

Page 144: ...ate CUSTom to set the bit rate Conditions Requires option SR AUTO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x CAN FD BITRate RATE1M RATE2M RATE3M RATE4M RATE5M RATE6M RATE7M RATE8M RATE9M RATE10M RATE11M RATE12M RATE13M RATE14M RATE15M RATE16M CUSTom BUS B x CAN FD BITRate Related Commands BUS B x CAN FD BITRate CUSTom Arguments Arguments specify the bit rate Examples BUS B1 CAN BITRATE RATE1M sets the CAN FD bit ra...

Page 145: ...B1 CAN FD BITRATE CUSTOM 4000000 indicating the bit rate is set to 4 000 000 BUS B x CAN SAMPLEpoint This command sets or queries the sample point for the specified CAN bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR AUTO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x CAN SAMPLEpoint NR1 BUS B x CAN SAMPLEpoint Arguments NR1 is the sample point in percent for the specified CAN bus Examples BUS B1 CAN SAMPLE...

Page 146: ...B1 CAN SINal might return BUS B1 CAN SIGNAL CANH indicating the signal type is CANH BUS B x CAN SOUrce This command sets or queries the CAN source channel for the specified CAN bus The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR AUTO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x CAN SOUrce CH x CH x _D x MATH x REF x REF x _D x BUS B x CAN SOUrce Arguments Arguments specify a channel Examples BUS B1 CAN...

Page 147: ...D 11898 1 2015 FDNONISO sets the CAN bus standard to non ISO CAN FD Bosch 2012 Examples BUS B1 CAN STANDARD FDISO sets the CAN standard to ISO CAN FD BUS B1 CAN STANDARD might return BUS B1 CAN STANDARD CAN2X indicating that the CAN standard is CAN 2 0 BUS B x CAN THReshold This command sets or queries the source channel threshold for the specified CAN bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requ...

Page 148: ...at Arguments NOTE Different bus types support only a subset of these arguments HEX specifies hexadecimal format BINARY specifies binary format MIXEDASCII specifies mixed ASCII format MIXEDHEX specifies mixed hexadecimal format ASCII specifies ASCII format DECIMAL specifies decimal format MIXED specifies mixed format Examples BUS B1 DISplay FORMat BINARY sets the format to binary BUS B1 DISplay FOR...

Page 149: ...command sets or queries the Ethernet D source threshold for the specified bus This threshold only applies when the Ethernet signal type is single ended The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR ENET Group Bus Syntax BUS B x ETHERnet DATAMINUSTHRESHold NR3 BUS B x ETHERnet DATAMINUSTHRESHold Related Commands BUS B x ETHERNET SOUrce DMINus BUS B x ETHERNET SOUrce DPLUs BUS B x ETHERnet...

Page 150: ... Ethernet D source threshold for the specified bus Examples BUS B3 ETHERNET DATAPLUSTHRESHOLD 250 0E 3 sets the Bus 3 Ethernet D source threshold to 250 0000 mV BUS B2 ETHERNET DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD might return BUS B2 ETHERNET DATAPLUSTHRESHOLD 1 0 indicating the Bus 2 Ethernet D source threshold is set to 1 0 V BUS B x ETHERnet IPVFOUR This command sets or queries whether IPV4 packets are available...

Page 151: ... Group Bus Syntax BUS B x ETHERnet LOWTHRESHold NR3 BUS B x ETHERnet LOWTHRESHold Related Commands BUS B x ETHERnet SIGNALTYpe Arguments NR3 is the Ethernet source Low threshold for the specified bus Examples BUS B1 ETHERnet LOWTHRESHold 200e 3 sets the threshold to 200 mV BUS B1 ETHERnet LOWTHRESHold might return BUS B1 ETHERNET LOWTHRESHOLD 500 0000E 3 indicating the threshold is set to 500 mV B...

Page 152: ...tion SR ENET Group Bus Syntax BUS B x ETHERnet SIGNALTYpe SINGLE DIFF BUS B x ETHERnet SIGNALTYpe Arguments SINGLE specifies single ended signals DIFF specifies differential signals Examples BUS B1 ETHERnet SIGNALTYpe SINGLE specifies single ended signals BUS B1 ETHERnet SIGNALTYpe might return BUS B1 ETHERNET SIGNALTYPE DIFF indicating differential signals are specified BUS B x ETHERnet SOUrce Th...

Page 153: ...m as the source for Ethernet data BUS B1 ETHERNET SOURCE might return CH2 indicating that channel 2 is the currently specified source for Ethernet data BUS B x ETHERNET SOUrce DMINus This command sets or queries the Ethernet D source for the specified bus this command specifies the source channel to use when the signal type is single ended The bus is specified by x Group Bus Syntax BUS B x ETHERNE...

Page 154: ...o channel 5 BUS B1 ETHERNET SOUrce DPLUs might return BUS B1 ETHERNET SOURCE DPLUS CH5 indicating the D source is set to channel 5 BUS B x ETHERnet THRESHold This command sets or queries the Ethernet DATA source High threshold for the specified bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR ENET Group Bus Syntax BUS B x ETHERnet THRESHold NR3 BUS B x ETHERnet THRESHold Related Command...

Page 155: ...peed as 10Base T HUNDREDBASETX specifies the Ethernet speed as 100Base T Examples BUS B1 ETHERNET TYPE HUNDREDBASETX specifies the Ethernet speed as 100Base T BUS B1 ETHERNET TYPE might return TENBASET indicating that 10Base T is the currently specified Ethernet speed BUS B x FLEXray BITRate This command sets or queries the FlexRay bus bit rate The bus is specified by x If you select Custom use BU...

Page 156: ...LEXray BITRate CUSTom Arguments NR1 is the FlexRay custom bit rate for the specified bus Examples BUS B1 FLEXray BITRate CUSTom 10000000 sets the bit rate to 10 000 000 BUS B1 FLEXray BITRate CUSTom might return BUS B1 FLEXRAY BITRATE CUSTOM 10000000 indicating the bit rate is set to 10 000 000 BUS B x FLEXray CHannel This command sets or queries the FlexRay channel type for the specified bus The ...

Page 157: ...ESHold Arguments NR3 is the FlexRay data source low threshold for the specified bus Examples BUS B1 FLEXray LOWTHRESHold 50 0e 3 sets the threshold to 50 mV BUS B1 FLEXray LOWTHRESHold might BUS B1 FLEXray LOWTHRESHOLD 0 0E 0 indicating the threshold is set to 0 0 V BUS B x FLEXray SIGnal This command sets or queries the FlexRay signal type for the specified bus The bus number is specified by x Co...

Page 158: ...TO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x FLEXray SOUrce CH x MATH x REF x BUS B x FLEXray SOUrce Arguments Arguments are the available FlexRay sources Examples BUS B1 FLEXRAY SOUrce MATH4 sets the FlexRay source to Math 4 BUS B1 FLEXRAY SOUrce might return BUS B1 FLEXRAY SOURCE CH1 indicating the source is channel 1 BUS B x FLEXray SOUrce TXRX This command sets or queries the FlexRay TxRx data source for the s...

Page 159: ...ESHold NR3 BUS B x FLEXray THRESHold Arguments NR3 is the FlexRay data source high threshold for the specified bus Examples BUS B1 FLEXray THRESHold 50 0 3 sets the high threshold to 50 mV BUS B1 FLEXray THRESHold might return BUS B1 FLEXRAY THRESHOLD 0 0E 0 indicating the high threshold is set to 0 0 V BUS B x FLEXray TXRXTHRESHold This command sets or queries the FlexRay data source TxRx thresho...

Page 160: ...ecifies an analog channel to use as the I2C SCLK source CH x _D x specifies a digital channel to use as the I2C SCLK source MATH x specifies a math waveform to use as the I2C SCLK source REF x specifies a reference waveform to use as the I2C SCLK source REF x _D x specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source waveform for the specified I2C bus Examples BUS B1 I2C CLOCK SOURCE CH1 sets...

Page 161: ... specified I2C bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR EMBD Group Bus Syntax BUS B x I2C DATa SOUrce CH x CH x _D x MATH x REF x REF x _D x BUS B x I2C DATa SOUrce Related Commands BUS B x I2C CLOCk SOUrce BUS B x I2C RWINADDR Arguments CH x specifies an analog channel to use as the I2C SDA source CH x _D x specifies a digital channel to use as the I2C SDA source MATH x specifi...

Page 162: ...2C DATa THReshold Arguments NR3 is the I2C Data SDA source threshold for the specified bus Examples BUS B1 I2C DATa THReshold 50 0e 3 sets the threshold to 50 mV BUS B1 I2C DATa THReshold might return BUS B1 I2C DATA THRESHOLD 0 0E 0 indicating the threshold is set to 0 V BUS B x I2C RWINADDR This command sets or queries the manner in which seven bit I2C addresses are represented in the busform di...

Page 163: ...ating that the entire slave address byte is displayed as a number with the R W signal as its LSB bit 0 and the slave address in bits 7 1 BUS B x LABel COLor This command sets or queries the color of the specified bus label The bus is specified by x Group Bus Syntax BUS B x LABel COLor QString BUS B x LABel COLor Arguments QString is the bus label color To return the color to the default color send...

Page 164: ...specified bus label The bus is specified by x Group Bus Syntax BUS B x LABel FONT ITALic ON OFF 1 0 BUS B x LABel FONT ITALic Arguments ON displays the label in italic font OFF does not display the label in italic font 1 displays the label in italic font 0 does not display the label in italic font Examples BUS B1LABel FONT ITALic OFF turns off italic font BUS B1LABel FONT ITALic might return BUS B...

Page 165: ...TYPE QString BUS B x LABel FONT TYPE Arguments QString is the specified font type Available fonts include DejaVu Sans DejaVu Sans Mono DejaVu Serif Frutiger LT Std Monospace Sans Serif Serif Ubuntu Ubuntu Condensed and Ubuntu Mono Examples BUS B1 LABel FONT TYPE Monospace selects a monospace font BUS B1 LABel FONT TYPE might return BUS B1 LABEL FONT TYPE Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman indicating the fon...

Page 166: ...ied bus The bus is specified by x Group Bus Syntax BUS B x LABel name QString BUS B x LABel name Related Commands BUS B x TYPe Arguments QString is an alphanumeric string of text enclosed in quotes The text string is limited to 30 characters It contains the text label information for the bus Examples BUS B1 LABEL NAME TEST sets the waveform label for the bus B1 to Test BUS B1 LABEL NAME might retu...

Page 167: ... by x Group Bus Syntax BUS B x LABel YPOS NR3 BUS B x LABel YPOS Arguments NR3 is the y position in pixels relative to the baseline of the waveform of the specified bus label Examples BUS B1 LABel YPOS 1 0e1 set the y position to 10 0 BUS B1 LABel YPOS might return BUS B1 LABEL YPOS 0 0E 0 indicating the y position is 0 0 pixels from the baseline of the waveform BUS B x LIN BITRate This command se...

Page 168: ...bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR AUTO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x LIN BITRate CUSTom NR1 BUS B x LIN BITRate CUSTom Related Commands BUS B x LIN BITRate Arguments NR1 is the LIN custom bit rate for the specified bus Examples BUS B1 LIN BITRate CUSTom 9000 sets the bit rate to 9 000 BUS B1 LIN BITRate CUSTom might return BUS B1 LIN BITRate CUSTom 10000 indicating the bit rate is set...

Page 169: ... or queries the LIN source polarity for the specified bus The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR AUTO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x LIN POLarity INVerted NORmal BUS B x LIN POLarity Arguments INVerted specifies inverted polarity NORmal specifies normal polarity Examples BUS B1 LIN POLarity Inverted sets the polarity to inverted BUS B1 LIN POLarity might return BUS B1 LIN POLARIT...

Page 170: ...ommand sets or queries the LIN data source for the specified bus The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR AUTO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x LIN SOUrce CH x CH x _D x MATH x REF x REF x _D x BUS B x LIN SOUrce Arguments Arguments specify the available sources Examples BUS B1 LIN SOUrce MATH4 sets the source to MATH 4 BUS B1 LIN SOUrce might return BUS B1 LIN SOURCE CH1 indicating ...

Page 171: ...bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR AUTO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x LIN STANDard MIXed V1X V2X BUS B x LIN STANDard Arguments MIXed specifies both versions 1 x and 2 x of the LIN standard V1X specifies the version 1 x of the LIN standard V2X specifies the version 2 x of the LIN standard Examples BUS B1 LIN STANDard V1X sets the standard to version 1 x BUS B1 LIN STANDard might...

Page 172: ... STD 1553 lower threshold is set to 500 mV BUS B x MIL1553B POLarity This command sets or queries the source polarity for the specified MIL STD 1553 bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR AERO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x MIL1553B POLarity NORMal INVERTed BUS B x MIL1553B POLarity Arguments NORMal specifies normal polarity INVERTed specifies inverted polarity Examples BUS B3 MIL15...

Page 173: ...xamples BUS B1 MIL1553B RESPONSETIME MAXIMUM 15 0E 6 specifies the maximum response time to a valid command received to be 15 0 microseconds BUS B1 MIL1553B RESPONSETIME MAXIMUM might return BUS B1 MIL1553B RESPONSETIME MAXIMUM 12 000E 6 indicating a maximum response time of 12 microseconds BUS B x MIL1553B RESPonsetime MINimum This command sets or queries the minimum response time to a valid comm...

Page 174: ...ditions Requires option SR AERO Group Bus Syntax BUS B x MIL1553B SOUrce CH x Math x REF x BUS B x MIL1553B SOUrce Arguments CH x specifies an analog channel as the source waveform for the MIL STD 1553 bus Math x specifies a math waveform as the source waveform for the MIL STD 1553 bus REF x specifies a reference waveform as the source waveform for the MIL STD 1553 bus Examples BUS B1 MIL1553B SOU...

Page 175: ...mV BUS B x PARallel ALLTHResholds This command sets or queries a threshold value for sources for the parallel bus Use the BUS B x PARallel ALLTHResholds APPly command to set the thresholds to this value The bus is specified by x Group Bus Syntax BUS B x PARallel ALLTHResholds NR3 Related Commands BUS B x PARallel ALLTHResholds APPly Arguments NR3 is the source threshold Examples BUS B4 PARALLEL AL...

Page 176: ... PARallel BIT n SOUrce This command sets or queries the specified bit source for specified parallel bus The bus is specified by x The bit is specified by n and is an integer in the range of 1 to 64 Group Bus Syntax BUS B x PARallel BIT n SOUrce CH x CH x _D x MATH x REF x REF x _D x NONE Related Commands BUS B x PARallel BIT n SOUrce THReshold Arguments CH x is the specified bit source CH x _D x i...

Page 177: ...Commands BUS B x PARallel BIT n SOUrce Arguments NR3 is the specified bit source threshold for the specified parallel bus Examples BUS B3 PARALLEL BIT2SOURCE THRESHOLD 1 0 sets the threshold of bit source 2 of parallel Bus 3 to 1 0 V BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT4SOURCE THRESHOLD might return BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT4SOURCE THRESHOLD 250 00000E 3 indicates the threshold of bit source 4 of parallel Bus 1 is curre...

Page 178: ...e signal BUS B x PARallel CLOCk ISCLOCKED This command determines whether the bus operates in a clocked or asynchronous fashion The bus is specified by x Group Bus Syntax BUS B x PARallel CLOCk ISCLOCKED OFF ON NR1 BUS B x PARallel CLOCk ISCLOCKED Arguments OFF argument specifies an asynchronous bus ON argument specifies a clocked bus NR1 0 specifies an asynchronous bus any other value specifies a...

Page 179: ...nce channel to use as the bus clock source Examples BUS B1 PARALLEL CLOCK SOURCE CH3_D6 sets the Parallel clock source for the bus B1 to D6 of FlexChannel 3 BUS B1 PARALLEL CLOCK SOURCE might return BUS B1 PARALLEL CLOCK SOURCE CH8_D9 indicating that the Parallel clock source for the bus B1 is set to D9 of FlexChannel 8 BUS B x PARallel CLOCKSOUrce THReshold This command sets or queries the clock ...

Page 180: ...TE300 RATE1K RATE2K RATE9K RATE19K RATE38K RATE115K RATE921K BUS B x RS232C BITRate Arguments Arguments are the available bit rates Examples BUS B1 RS232C BITRATE RATE9K sets the bit rate for the RS 232C bus B1 to 9000 bits per second BUS B1 RS232C BITRATE might return BUS B1 RS232C BITRATE 9000 indicating that the bit rate for the RS 232C bus B1 is set to 9000 bits per second BUS B x RS232C BITRa...

Page 181: ... by x Conditions Requires option SR COMP Group Bus Syntax BUS B x RS232C DATABits 7 8 9 BUS B x RS232C DATABits Arguments NR1 specifies the number of bits in the RS 232C data frame Examples BUS B1 RS232C DATABITS 8 sets the data bits to 8 for the RS 232C bus B1 BUS B1 RS232C DATABITS might return BUS B1 RS232C DATABITS 8 indicating that the data bits is set to 8 for the RS 232C bus B1 BUS B x RS23...

Page 182: ...US B1 RS232C DELIMITER might return BUS B1 RS232C DELIMITER NULL indicating that the delimiter to 0x00 for the RS 232C bus B1 BUS B x RS232C DISplaymode This command sets or queries the RS 232C display mode for the specified bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR COMP Group Bus Syntax BUS B x RS232C DISplaymode FRame PACKET BUS B x RS232C DISplaymode Related Commands BUS B x R...

Page 183: ...RS232C PARity Arguments NONe specifies no parity EVEN specifies even parity ODD specifies odd parity Examples BUS B1 RS232C PARITY ODD sets the parity for the RS 232C bus B1 to odd BUS B1 RS232C PARITY might return BUS B1 RS232C PARITY NONE indicating that the display mode for the RS 232C bus B1 is set to none BUS B x RS232C POLarity This command sets or queries the RS 232C source polarity for bus...

Page 184: ...S B x RS232C SOUrce Arguments CH x specifies an analog channel to use as the RS 232C source CH x _D x specifies a digital channel of a specified FlexChannel to use for the RS 232C source MATH x specifies a math channel to use for the RS 232C source REF x specifies a reference channel to use for the RS 232C source REF x _D x specifies a digital reference waveform as the source waveform for the spec...

Page 185: ...s Requires option SR EMBD Group Bus Syntax BUS B x SPI BITOrder LSB MSB BUS B x SPI BITOrder Related Commands BUS B x SPI DATa SIZe Arguments LSB specifies that each bit becomes the recovered value s new LSB after shifting previously recovered bits one place to the left The decoding happens right to left MSB specifies that each successive bit from the bus s data line becomes the new MSB of the rec...

Page 186: ...ing edge of the signal Examples BUS B1 SPI CLOCK POLARITY FALL sets the SPI clock polarity to the falling edge for the bus B1 BUS B1 SPI CLOCK POLARITY might return BUS B1 SPI CLOCK POLARITY RISE indicating that the SPI clock polarity for the bus B1 is set to the rising edge BUS B x SPI CLOCk SOUrce This command sets or queries the SPI clock SCLK source for the specified bus The bus is specified b...

Page 187: ...e SPI clock source for the bus B1 is set to MATH1 BUS B x SPI CLOCk THReshold This command sets or queries the SPI Clock SCLK source threshold for the specified bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR EMBD Group Bus Syntax BUS B x SPI CLOCk THReshold NR3 BUS B x SPI CLOCk THReshold Arguments NR3 is the SPI Clock SCLK source threshold for the specified bus Examples BUS B1 SPI CL...

Page 188: ...This command sets or queries the number of bits per word for the specified SPI bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR EMBD Group Bus Syntax BUS B x SPI DATa SIZe NR1 BUS B x SPI DATa SIZe Arguments NR1 is the data size for the specified bus The minimum value is 2 and maximum is 32 Examples BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 7 sets the data size for SPI bus B1 to seven bits per word BUS B1 S...

Page 189: ...fies a digital reference waveform as the data source waveform for the specified SPI bus Examples BUS B1 SPI DATA SOURCE CH2 sets the SPI data source for the bus B1 to CH2 BUS B1 SPI DATA SOURCE might return BUS B1 SPI DATA SOURCE CH3 indicating that the SPI data source for the bus B1 is set to CH3 BUS B x SPI DATa THReshold This command sets or queries the SPI Data SDA source threshold for the spe...

Page 190: ...up Bus Syntax BUS B x SPI FRAMING IDLE SS BUS B x SPI FRAMING Arguments IDLE specifies IDLE SPI framing SS specifies SS SPI framing Examples BUS B1 SPI FRAMING IDLE sets the SPI framing to IDLE BUS B1 SPI FRAMING might return BUS B1 SPI FRAMING SS indicating that the SPI framing is set to SS BUS B x SPI IDLETime This command sets or queries the SPI idle time for the specified bus The bus is specif...

Page 191: ...HIGH BUS B x SPI SELect POLarity Related Commands BUS B x SPI SELect SOUrce Arguments LOW sets an active low polarity HIGH sets an active high polarity Examples BUS B1 SPI SELECT POLARITY HIGH sets the SPI Slave Select polarity for the bus B1 to active high BUS B1 SPI SELECT POLARITY might return BUS B1 SPI SELECT POLARITY HIGH indicating that the SPI Slave Select polarity for the bus B1 is set to...

Page 192: ... SPI SELECT SOURCE MATH3 sets the SPI Slave Select source for the bus B1 to MATH3 BUS B1 SPI SELECT SOURCE might return BUS B1 SPI SELECT SOURCE CH3 indicating that the SPI Slave Select source for the bus B1 is set to CH3 BUS B x SPI SELect THReshold This command sets or queries the SPI Select SS source threshold for the specified bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR EMBD Gr...

Page 193: ...ies a Controller Area Network bus LIN specifies a Local Interconnect Network bus FLEXRAY specifies a FlexRay bus USB specifies the Universal Serial Bus ETHernet specifies the Ethernet bus AUDio specifies an audio bus Examples BUS B1 TYPE I2C sets the bus B1 type to I2C BUS B1 TYPE might return BUS B1 TYPE SPI indicating that the bus B1 type is set to SPI and that the bus behavior is governed by th...

Page 194: ...ies the USB D source threshold for the specified bus The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR USB2 Group Bus Syntax BUS B x USB DATAMINUSTHRESHold NR3 BUS B x USB DATAMINUSTHRESHold Arguments NR3 is the Minus threshold Examples BUS B1 USB DATAMINUSTHRESHold 50 0e 3 sets the threshold to 50 0 mV BUS B1 USB DATAMINUSTHRESHold might return BUS B1 USB DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD 0 0E 0 indicatin...

Page 195: ...ource threshold for the specified bus when the signal type is differential The bus is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR USB2 Group Bus Syntax BUS B x USB LOWTHRESHold NR3 BUS B x USB LOWTHRESHold Arguments NR3 is the Low threshold Examples BUS B1 USB LOWTHRESHold 50 0e 3 sets the threshold to 50 0 mV BUS B1 USB LOWTHRESHold might return BUS B1 USB LOWTHRESHOLD 0 0E 0 indicating the thre...

Page 196: ...erential for bus x The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires option SR USB2 Group Bus Syntax BUS B x USB SOUrce CH x MATH x REF x BUS B x USB SOUrce Related Commands BUS B x USB SOUrce DMINus BUS B x USB SOUrce DPLUs Arguments CH x specifies an analog channel as the data source for the specified USB bus MATH x specifies a math channel as the data source for the specified USB bus REF x s...

Page 197: ...hannel as the D source for the specified USB bus MATH x specifies a math channel as the D source for the specified USB bus REF x specifies a reference waveform as the source REF x _D x specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source waveform for the specified USB bus Examples BUS B1 USB SOURCE DMINUS CH2 sets the USB Data Source for D input to CH2 BUS B1 USB SOURCE DMINUS might return B...

Page 198: ...for the specified USB bus Examples BUS B1 USB SOURCE DPLUS CH2 sets the USB Data Source for D input to CH2 BUS B1 USB SOURCE DPLUS might return BUS B1 USB SOURCE DPLUS CH3 indicating that CH3 is set to be the D input for USB data BUS B x USB THRESHold This command sets or queries the USB DATA source High threshold for the specified bus when the signal source is differential The bus is specified by...

Page 199: ...ery returns a comma separated list of all currently defined buses Group Bus Syntax BUS LIST Returns Returns all currently defined buses Examples BUS LIST might return BUS LIST B1 B4 indicating the bus 1 and bus 4 are defined BUSTABle ADDNew No Query Form Adds the specified bus table Argument is of the form TABLE NR1 where NR1 is 1 Group Bus Syntax BUSTABle ADDNew QString Arguments QString is a quo...

Page 200: ...ble1 deletes bus table Table1 BUSTABle LIST Query Only This query lists all currently defined bus tables Group Bus Syntax BUSTABle LIST Returns Returns a list of all currently defined bus tables Examples BUSTABLE LIST might return BUSTABLE LIST TABLE1 indicating TABLE1 is currently the only defined bus table BUSY Query Only This query only command returns the status of the instrument This command ...

Page 201: ...alibration status cannot be obtained until after the SPC completes SPC takes approximately 5 minutes per channel which means a total of 40 minutes on an 8 channel model Any remote command that performs an action on the oscilloscope is also disabled until the SPC is complete Group Calibration Syntax CAL Returns 0 indicates SPC passed 1 indicates SPC failed or did not complete Examples CAL starts th...

Page 202: ...pe is also disabled until the SPC is complete Group Calibration Syntax CALibrate INTERNal Related Commands CALibrate INTERNal STATus Examples CALIBRATE INTERNAL starts the signal path calibration of the instrument CALibrate INTERNal STARt No Query Form This command no query form starts the signal path calibration SPC of the analog channels This command is the same as the CALibrate INTERNal command...

Page 203: ...oscope is also disabled until the SPC is complete Group Calibration Syntax CALibrate INTERNal STATus Related Commands CAL Returns This query will return one of the following INIT indicates the instrument has not had signal path calibration run The instrument may need to be readjusted at the Tektronix service center PASS indicates that the signal path calibration completed successfully FAIL indicat...

Page 204: ...n the following vertical parameters for channel 1 CH1 BANDWIDTH 1 0000E 09 COUPLING DC DESKEW0 0000E 00 OFFSET 0 0000E 00 POSITION 0 0000E 00 SCALE 5 0000E 01 PROBCAL INIT PROBE GAIN 1 0000E 00 RESISTANCE 1 0000E 06 UNITS V ID TYPE 1X SERNUMBER N A CH1 PROBEFUNC EXTATTEN 1 0000E 00 EXTUNITS None CH1 LABEL NAME XPOS 5 YPOS 5 CH x BANdwidth This command sets or queries the selectable low pass bandwi...

Page 205: ...ndicating that there is bandwidth limiting on Channel 2 CH x COUPling This command sets or queries the input coupling setting for the specified analog channel The channel is specified by x NOTE The available arguments depend on the attached accessories Group Vertical Syntax CH x COUPling AC DC DCREJ CH x COUPling Arguments AC sets the specified channel to AC coupling DC sets the specified channel ...

Page 206: ...ndicating that the deskew time for Channel 2 is set to 2 ns CH x LABel COLor This command sets or queries the color of the specified channel label The channel is specified by x Group Vertical Syntax CH x LABel COLor QString Arguments QString is the label color To return the color to the default color send an empty string as in this example CH5 LABEL COLOR Examples CH2 LABel COLor FFFF00 sets the l...

Page 207: ...es the italic state of the specified channel label The channel is specified by x Group Vertical Syntax CH x LABel FONT ITALic ON OFF NR1 Arguments OFF argument turns off italic font ON argument turns on italic font NR1 0 turns off italic font any other value turns on italic font Examples CH2 LABel FONT ITALic ON set the font to italic CH2 LABel FONT ITALic might return CH2 LABEL FONT ITALIC 0 indi...

Page 208: ... Syntax CH x LABel FONT TYPE QString Arguments QString is the specified font type Examples CH2 LABel FONT TYPE Monospace sets the font to a mono space font CH2 LABel FONT TYPE might return CH2 LABEL FONT TYPE Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman CH x LABel FONT UNDERline This command sets or queries the underline state of the specified channel label The channel is specified by x Group Vertical Syntax CH x LAB...

Page 209: ...xamples CH2 LABEL NAME Pressure changes the waveform label for the Channel 2 waveform to Pressure CH3 LABEL NAME might return CH3 LABEL NAME Force indicating that the waveform label for the Channel 3 waveform is Force CH x LABel XPOS This command sets or queries the X position of the specified channel label The channel is specified by x Group Vertical Syntax CH x LABel XPOS NR3 CH x LABel XPOS Arg...

Page 210: ...l is displayed relative to the baseline of the waveform Positive values are above the baseline and negative values are below Examples CH3 LABEl YPOS 20 moves the waveform label for the Channel 3 20 pixels below the baseline of the waveform CH2 LABEl YPOS might return CH2 LABEL YPOS 0 indicating that the waveform label for the Channel 2 is currently located at the baseline of the waveform CH x OFFS...

Page 211: ...on to 2 divisions CH2 POSition might return CH2 POSITION 2 2400 indicating the position is 2 24 divisions CH x PRObe Query Only This query only command returns all information concerning the probe that is attached to the specified channel The channel is specified by x Group Vertical Syntax CH x PRObe Related Commands CH x PROBECal Examples CH2 PROBE might return CH2 PROBE GAIN 1 0000E 01 RESISTANC...

Page 212: ...e attached to the Channel 1 to autozero CH x PRObe DEGAUSS No Query Form This command starts a degauss cycle of the TekVPI probe attached to the specified channel The channel is specified by x Group Vertical Syntax CH x PRObe DEGAUSS EXECute Arguments EXECute starts the degauss cycle Examples CH1 PROBE DEGAUSS EXECUTE causes the probe attached to Channel 1 to degauss CH x PRObe DEGAUSS STATE Query...

Page 213: ...robe attached to the specified channel The channel is specified by x Group Vertical Syntax CH x PRObe FORCEDRange dynamicRangeNR3 CH x PRObe FORCEDRange Arguments dynamicRangeNR3 specifies the probe range Examples If a TCP0030 current probe is attached to the Channel 1 input CH1 PROBE FORCEDRANGE 5 0 sets the attached probe to its 5 Ampere range CH1 PROBE FORCEDRANGE might return CH1 PROBE FORCEDR...

Page 214: ...N A indicating that a passive 10X probe of unknown serial number is attached to Channel 2 CH x PRObe ID SERnumber Query Only This query only command returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the specified channel The channel is specified by x NOTE For Level 0 and 1 probes the serial number will be N A Group Vertical Syntax CH x PRObe ID SERnumber Examples CH1 PROBE ID SERNUMBER mi...

Page 215: ... of the probe attached to Channel 2 is 1 MΩ CH x PRObe SET This command sets or queries aspects of probe accessory user interfaces for example probe attenuation factors or probe audible over range The available arguments for this command will vary depending on the accessory you attach to the instrument The channel is specified by x Group Vertical Syntax CH x PRObe SET QString CH x PRObe SET Argume...

Page 216: ... The channel is specified by x Group Vertical Syntax CH x PROBECal Returns This query will return one of the following Failed signifies that the probe calibration has failed for the selected channel Default signifies that the probe calibration has not yet been run for the selected channel Passed signifies the probe calibration has passed for the selected channel Running signifies the probe calibra...

Page 217: ...ation value as a multiplier to the given scale factor on the specified channel The channel is specified by x The query form of this command returns the user specified attenuation Group Vertical Syntax CH x PROBEFunc EXTAtten NR3 CH x PROBEFunc EXTAtten Related Commands CH x PROBEFunc EXTDBatten Arguments NR3 is the attenuation value which is specified as a multiplier in the range from 1 00E 10 to ...

Page 218: ... dB Examples CH3 PROBEFUNC EXTDBATTEN 2 5 specifies an external 2 5 dB attenuator on Channel 3 CH1 PROBEFUNC EXTDBATTEN might return CH1 PROBEFUNC EXTDBATTEEN 2 5000E 00 indicating that the attenuation for Channel 1 is 2 5 dB CH x PROBEFunc EXTUnits This command sets the unit of measurement for the external attenuator of the specified channel The channel is specified by x The alternate units are u...

Page 219: ...x PROBEFunc EXTUnits STATE ON OFF NR1 Arguments OFF argument turns off external units ON argument turns on external units NR1 0 turns off external units any other value turns on external units Examples CH2 PROBEFunc EXTUnits STATE ON turns on external units CH2 PROBEFunc EXTUnits STATE might return CH2 PROBEFUNC EXTUNITS STATE 0 indicating that external units are off for the specified channel CH x...

Page 220: ...le ration for the specified analog channel Examples CH2 SCALERATio 2 0 sets the scale ratio to 2 0 CH2 SCALERATio might return CH2 SCALERATIO 1 0000 indicating the scale ratio is 1 0 CH x TERmination This command sets or queries the vertical termination for the specified analog channel The channel is specified by x NOTE The available arguments depend on the instrument model and the attached access...

Page 221: ...n this example CH5_DALL LABEL COLOR Examples CH1_DALL LABel COLor FF0000 sets the font color to red CH1_DALL LABel COLor might return CH1_DALL LABEL COLOR FFFF00 indicating the font color is yellow CH x _DALL LABel FONT BOLD This command sets or queries the bold state of the specified digital group The channel is specified by x Group Digital Syntax CH x _DALL LABel FONT BOLD ON OFF NR1 Arguments O...

Page 222: ...ght return CH1_DALL LABEL FONT ITALIC 0 indicating the font is not italic CH x _DALL LABel FONT SIZE This command sets or queries the font size of the specified digital group The channel is specified by x Group Digital Syntax CH x _DALL LABel FONT SIZE NR1 Arguments NR1 is the font size Examples CH1_DALL LABel FONT SIZE 16 sets the font size to 16 points CH1_DALL LABel FONT SIZE might return CH1_D...

Page 223: ...specified by x Group Digital Syntax CH x _DALL LABel FONT UNDERline ON OFF NR1 Arguments OFF argument turns off underline font ON argument turns on underline font NR1 0 turns off underline font any other value turns on underline font Examples CH1_DALL LABel FONT UNDERline ON specifies an underlined font CH1_DALL LABel FONT UNDERline might return CH1_DALL LABEL FONT UNDERLINE 0 indicating underline...

Page 224: ...he label color To return the color to the default color send an empty string as in this example CH5_D1 LABEL COLOR Examples CH1_D1 LABel COLor FF0000 sets the color to red CH1_D1 LABel COLor might return CH1_D1 LABEL COLOR FFFF00 indicating the color is yellow CH x _D x LABel FONT BOLD This command sets or queries the bold state of the label of the specified digital bit The channel is specified by...

Page 225: ...talic font NR1 0 turns off italic font any other value turns on italic font Examples CH1_D1 LABel FONT ITALic OFF turns off italic font CH1_D1 LABel FONT ITALic might return CH1_D1 LABEL FONT ITALIC 1 indicating the font is italic CH x _D x LABel FONT SIZE This command sets or queries the font size of the label of the specified digital bit The channel is specified by x Group Digital Syntax CH x _D...

Page 226: ...LABel FONT UNDERline This command sets or queries the underline state of the label of the specified digital bit The channel is specified by x Group Digital Syntax CH x _D x LABel FONT UNDERline ON OFF NR1 Arguments OFF argument turns off underline font ON argument turns on underline font NR1 0 turns off underline font any other value turns on underline font Examples CH1_D1 LABel FONT UNDERline ON ...

Page 227: ...ry form clears the following Event Queue Standard Event Status Register Status Byte Register except the MAV bit If the CLS command immediately follows an EOI the Output Queue and MAV bit Status Byte Register bit 4 are also cleared MAV indicates that information is in the output queue The device clear DCL control message will clear the output queue and thus MAV CLS does not clear the output queue o...

Page 228: ...aveform preamble that contains information such as data format and scale The CURVe query transfers data from the instrument The data source is specified by the DATa SOUrce command The first and last data points are specified by the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands The CURVe command transfers waveform data to the instrument The data is stored in the reference memory location specified by starting ...

Page 229: ...e and CURVe queries for digital channels with DATa WIDth 2 may result in a warning event Execution warning Multi transition data not available In this case the transition data returned will be 0 0 or 0 1 For MATH sources only 8 byte double precision floating point data is returned in CURVe queries Group Waveform Transfer Syntax CURVe CURVe Block asc curve CURVe Related Commands DATa SOUrce DATa ST...

Page 230: ...nother command or query Verify that curve data is completely transferred It is recommended that you follow such queries with an ESR query and verify that the error bit returned and if set check the event queue to ascertain the reason for the error If the error was caused by an interrupted query then the asynchronous data transfer had not completed when the ESR query was sent In this case you might...

Page 231: ...e values of DATa STARt and STOp are swapped and the following event is set 530 Data start stop Values swapped internally Examples DATA INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults DATA might return DATA DESTINATION REF1 ENCDG RIBINARY SOURCE CH1 START 1 STOP 1000 FRAMESTART 1 FRAMESTOP 1000 DATa ENCdg This command sets or queries the format of outgoing waveform data This...

Page 232: ...he lower limit is the bottom of the screen FPBinary specifies the floating point width 4 data The range is from 3 4 1038 to 3 4 1038 The center of the screen is 0 The upper limit is the top of the screen and the lower limit is the bottom of the screen The FPBinary argument is only applicable to math waveforms or ref waveforms saved from math waveforms SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that ...

Page 233: ...l be transferred from the instrument to the controller It can consist of CH x MATH x REF x DIGITALALL Note that digital data is transferred as 16 bit data with the least significant bit representing D0 and the most significant bit representing D15 wfm can consist of the following CH x selects the specified analog channel as the source MATH x selects the specified reference waveform as the source T...

Page 234: ...e queries This means that the waveforms have been acquired If there are none NONE is returned Group Waveform Transfer Syntax DATa SOUrce AVAILable Related Commands CURVe Returns Returns a list of source waveforms that are currently available for CURVe queries Examples DATA SOURCE AVAILABLE might return DATA SOURCE AVAILABLE CH2 CH3 CH6 CH7 MATH1 REF1 indicating that CH2 CH3 CH6 CH7 MATH1 and REF1 ...

Page 235: ...anges to the record length value are not automatically reflected in the data stop value As record length is varied the DATa STOP value must be explicitly changed to ensure the entire record is transmitted In other words curve results will not automatically and correctly reflect increases in record length if the distance from DATa STARt to DATa STOP stays smaller than the increased record length NO...

Page 236: ...with WFMOutpre BYT_Nr Group Waveform Transfer Syntax DATa WIDth NR1 DATa WIDth Related Commands WFMOutpre BYT_Nr Arguments NR1 is an integer that indicates the number of bytes per point for the outgoing waveform data when queried using the CURVe command For analog channels the values can be 1 or 2 For digital channels the values can be 1 or 2 For the digital collection the values can be 4 or 8 Exa...

Page 237: ...d commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands The sequence must be less than or equal to 80 characters The format of this argument is always returned as a query QString is a complete sequence of program messages The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating command...

Page 238: ...e NOTE Setting the DESER and ESER to the same value allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Use the ESE command to set the ESER Examples DESE 209 sets the DESER to binary 11010001 which enables the PON URQ EXE and OPC bits DESE might return DESE 186 showing that the DESER contains the binary value 10111010 DIAg LOOP...

Page 239: ...Arguments NR1 is how many loops to run Examples DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES 2 sets diagnostics to loop 2 times DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES might return DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES 1 indicating diagnostics will run once DIAg LOOP STOP No Query Form Request that diagnostics stop looping Group Self Test Syntax DIAg LOOP STOP Examples DIAG LOOP STOP stops diagnostics looping DIAg MODe This command sets or queries...

Page 240: ...ax DIAg RESUlt Returns The diagnostics results Examples DIAG RESULT might return DIAG RESULT FLAG NOT RUN LOG PASS IO PASS ANALOG PASS SYSTEM PASS ASIC PASS ACQ PASS SIGNAL PASS MEMORY indicating the diagnostics results DIAg RESUlt FLAg Query Only This query returns the status of the diagnostic test area that has been selected Group Self Test Syntax DIAg RESUlt FLAg Related Commands DIAg RESUlt FL...

Page 241: ...PASS SIGNAL PASS MEMORY indicating the diagnostics result stored in the log DIAg SELect No Query Form This command selects or queries an available diagnostic area Group Self Test Syntax DIAg SELect ALL IO ANALOG SYSTEM ASIC ACQ SIGNAL MEMORY DIAg SELect Arguments The argument is the desired diagnostic area Examples DIAG SELECT IO will select the IO group DIAg STATE No Query Form This command start...

Page 242: ...channel doesn t exist a hardware missing error event is set Group Digital Syntax DIGGRP x D x THReshold NR3 DIGGRP x D x THReshold Arguments NR3 is the threshold level in volts for the specified digital channel Examples DIGGRP1 D1 THReshold 30 0E 3 sets the threshold to 30 mV DIGGRP1 D1 THReshold might return DIGGRP1 D1 THRESHOLD 0 0E 0 indicating the threshold is 0 0 V DIGGRP x THReshold This com...

Page 243: ...5 75 MASKHIGHLIGHT 140 50 100 DISPLAY COLOR MATHCOLOR DEFAULT REFCOLOR DEFAULT DISPLAY FILTER SINX FORMAT YT GRATICULE IRE INTENSITY WAVEFORM IMAGEVIEW 81 0000 RECORDVIEW 81 0000 DISPLAY INTENSITY AUTOBRIGHT 0 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE OFF STYLE DOTS TRIGBAR OFF TRIGT 1 CURSORTICK LONG VARPERSIST 2 6000 SCREENTEXT STATE 1 LABEL1 NAME XPOS 100 YPOS 5 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL2 NAME THIS IS SCREEN TEXT XPO...

Page 244: ...ied bus is added already Group Display Control Syntax DISplay GLObal B x STATE NR1 OFF ON Arguments NR1 0 disables the display of the specified bus any other value enables display of the bus ON enables display of the specified bus OFF disables display of the specified bus Examples DISplay GLObal B1 STATE OFF turns off the display of bus 1 DISplay GLObal B1 STATE might return DISPLAY GLOBAL B1 STAT...

Page 245: ...e global state display mode On or Off of the specified math Setting this value true On or NR1 0 turns on the source in the waveform view Setting this value false Off or NR1 0 turns off the source in the waveform view This command only works if the specified math waveform is added already Group Display Control Syntax DISplay GLObal MATH x STATE NR1 OFF ON Arguments NR1 0 disables the display of the...

Page 246: ...lot Examples DISplay GLObal PLOT1 STATE ON displays plot 1 DISplay GLObal PLOT1 STATE might return DISPLAY GLOBAL PLOT1 STATE 1 indicating plot 1 is displayed DISplay GLObal REF x STATE this command sets or queries the global state display mode On or Off of the specified reference waveform Setting this value true On or NR1 0 turns on the source in the waveform view Setting this value false Off or ...

Page 247: ...nds Arguments None Examples DISPLAY INTENSITY might return DISPLAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT 1 indicating the intensity is set to 1 DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight This command sets or queries the display backlight intensity setting Group Display Control Syntax DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight LOW MEDium HIGH DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight Arguments LOW selects a low brightness level MEDium selects a moderate brigh...

Page 248: ... feature OFF disables the display auto dim feature Examples DISPLAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT AUTODIM ENABLE ON enables auto dimming of the backlight DISPLAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT AUTODIM ENABLE might return DISPLAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT AUTODIM ENABLE ON indicating that auto dimming of the backlight is enabled DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight AUTODim TIMe Sets or queries the amount of time in minutes to wait fo...

Page 249: ...UTOScale Arguments OFF disables the autoscale feature ON enables the autoscale feature NR1 0 disables the autoscale feature any other value enables the autoscale feature Examples DISplay MATHFFTView1 AUTOScale OFF disables the autoscale feature DISplay MATHFFTView1 AUTOScale might return DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 AUTOSCALE 1 indicating autoscale is on DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor ASOUrce Query Only Thi...

Page 250: ...view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor DDT Examples DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor DDT might return DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 CURSOR DDT 9 91E 37 indicating the delta Y over delta X cursor readout value is 9 91E 37 DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor FUNCtion This command sets or queries the cursor type of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor...

Page 251: ...rmat for measuring waveform amplitude and time DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor HBArs APOSition This command sets or returns the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor HBArs APOSition NR3 DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor HBArs APOSition Arguments NR3 is the cursor position of the specified cursor in the specified view Examp...

Page 252: ...TView1 CURSor HBArs BPOSition 50 e 3 sets the position to 50 0 mV DISplay MATHFFTView1 CURSor HBArs BPOSition might return DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 CURSOR HBARS BPOSITION 9 91E 37 indicating the position is 9 91E 37 DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor HBArs BUNIts Query Only This command queries the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay MATHFFTView ...

Page 253: ...sors TRACK ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together For cursor 1 adjustments this ties the movement of the two cursors together however cursor 2 continues to move independently of cursor 1 Examples DISplay MATHFFTView1 CURSor MODe INDEPENDENT allows independent adjustment of the two cursors DISplay MATHFFTView1 CURSor MODe might return DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 CURSOR MODE INDEPE...

Page 254: ...mples DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 CURSOR SCREEN AXPOSITION 700 000E 6 sets the cursor position to 700 MHz DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 CURSOR SCREEN AXPOSITION 625 000E 6 might return DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 CURSOR SCREEN AXPOSITION 625 000E 6 indicating the cursor position is 625 MHz DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor SCREEN AYPOSition This command sets or returns the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor i...

Page 255: ...fied view Examples DISplay MATHFFTView1 CURSor SCREEN BXPOSition 3 5e9 sets the cursor position to 3 5 GHz DISplay MATHFFTView1 CURSor SCREEN BXPOSition might return DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 CURSOR SCREEN BXPOSITION 2 50E 9 indicating the cursor position is 2 5 GHz DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor SCREEN BYPOSition This command sets or returns the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the ...

Page 256: ...er value displalys the cursor Examples DISplay MATHFFTView1 CURSor STATE OFF turns off the cursor DISplay MATHFFTView1 CURSor STATE might return DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 CURSOR STATE 1 indicating the cursor is displayed DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor VBArs APOSition This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay MAT...

Page 257: ...of the specified cursor in the specified view Examples DISplay MATHFFTView1 CURSor VBArs BPOSition 2 0e9 sets the cursor position to 2 0 GHz DISplay MATHFFTView1 CURSor VBArs BPOSition might return DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 CURSOR VBARS BPOSITION 2 50E 9 indicating the cursor position is at 2 5 GHz DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor VBArs DELTa Query Only This command queries the delta T cursor readout value...

Page 258: ...case of an XY plot this command has no effect when used to set the value In the case of a bathtub plot this command sets or returns the cursor A vertical position For all other plots this command sets or returns the cursor A horizontal position Group Cursor Syntax DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor WAVEform APOSition NR3 DISplay MATHFFTView x CURSor WAVEform APOSition Arguments NR3 is the waveform curso...

Page 259: ... BPOSition Arguments NR3 is the waveform cursor B position in the specified plot view Examples DISplay MATHFFTView1 CURSor WAVEform BPOSition 2 0e9 sets the cursor position to 2 0 GHz DISplay MATHFFTView1 CURSor WAVEform BPOSition might return DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 CURSOR WAVEFORM BPOSITION 2 50E 9 indicating the cursor position is 2 5 GHz DISplay MATHFFTView x GRIDlines This command sets or querie...

Page 260: ...math ON enables the specified math NR1 0 disables the specified math any other value enables the specified math Examples DISplay MATHFFTView1 MATH MATH1 STATE ON enables the specified math DISplay MATHFFTView1 MATH MATH1 STATE might return DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 MATH MATH1 STATE 1 indicating the specified math waveform in the specified waveview is displayed DISplay MATHFFTView x XAXIS SCALE This com...

Page 261: ... a linear scale DBM specifies a dBm scale Examples DISplay MATHFFTView1 YAXIS SCALE LINEAR specifies a linear scale DISplay MATHFFTView1 YAXIS SCALE might return DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 YAXIS SCALE DBM incicating the scale is dBm DISplay MATHFFTView x ZOOM XAXIS FROM This command sets or queries the value of the left edge of the specified plot view Group Zoom Syntax DISplay MATHFFTView x ZOOM XAXIS F...

Page 262: ... axis to 2 3 GHz DISplay MATHFFTView1 ZOOM XAXIS TO might return DISPLAY MATHFFTVIEW1 ZOOM XAXIS TO 2 343750E 9 indicating the valule of the right edge of the zoom x axis is 2 34 GHz DISplay MATHFFTView x ZOOM YAXIS FROM This command sets or queries the bottom value of the specified plot view Group Zoom Syntax DISplay MATHFFTView x ZOOM YAXIS FROM NR3 DISplay MATHFFTView x ZOOM YAXIS FROM Argument...

Page 263: ...e of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view is 21 17 dBm DISplay PERSistence This command sets or queries the display persistence for analog waveforms Persistence is valid for wave views only Group Display Control Syntax DISplay PERSistence OFF AUTO INFPersist INFInite VARpersist CLEAR DISplay PERSistence Related Commands DISplay VARpersist Arguments OFF disables the persistence aspect of the ...

Page 264: ...g of persistence data that has been built up over time Persistence is valid for wave views only Group Display Control Syntax DISplay PERSistence RESET Related Commands DISplay PERSistence DISplay VARpersist Examples DISPLAY PERSISTENCE RESET clears the display of persistence data DISplay PLOTView x AUTOScale This command sets or queries the enabled state of autoscale for plots Group Display Contro...

Page 265: ... DISPLAY PLOTVIEW1 CURSOR ASOURCE PLOT1 indicating the source of the cursor is plot 1 DISplay PLOTView x CURSor BSOUrce Query Only This command queries the cursor source for plot cursor B Group Cursor Syntax DISplay PLOTView x CURSor BSOUrce Examples DISplay PLOTView1 CURSor BSOUrce might return DISPLAY PLOTVIEW1 CURSOR BSOURCE PLOT1 indicating the B cursor source is plot 1 DISplay PLOTView x CURS...

Page 266: ...its HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors which measure in vertical units SCREEN specifies to display both horizontal and vertical bar cursors which measure the selected waveform in horizontal and vertical units Use these cursors to measure anywhere in the waveform display area Examples DISplay PLOTView1 CURSor FUNCtion VBARS displays vertical bar cursors DISplay PLOTView1 CURSor FUNCtion might r...

Page 267: ...rsor Syntax DISplay PLOTView x CURSor HBArs AUNIts Returns A QString that is the cursor horizontal units Examples DISplay PLOTView1 CURSor HBArs AUNIts might return DISPLAY PLOTVIEW1 CURSOR HBARS AUNITS V indicating the A units are Volts DISplay PLOTView x CURSor HBArs BPOSition This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor S...

Page 268: ...s BUNIts Arguments QString is the cursor vertical units Examples DISplay PLOTView1 CURSor HBArs BUNIts might return DISPLAY PLOTVIEW1 CURSOR HBARS BUNITS V indicating the units are Volts DISplay PLOTView x CURSor HBArs DELTa Query Only This command queries the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay PLOTView x CURSor HBArs DELTa Return...

Page 269: ...CURSor MODe TRACK sets the cursor to track together DISplay PLOTView1 CURSor MODe might return DISPLAY PLOTVIEW1 CURSOR MODE INDEPENDENT indicating independent adjustment of the cursors is allowed DISplay PLOTView x CURSor ONEOVERDELTATVALUE Query Only This command sets or queries the one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay PL...

Page 270: ... DISPLAY PLOTVIEW1 CURSOR SCREEN AXPOSITION 5 5460E 9 indication the cursor A X position is 5 546 ns DISplay PLOTView x CURSor SCREEN AYPOSition This command sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay PLOTView x CURSor SCREEN AYPOSition NR3 DISplay PLOTView x CURSor SCREEN AYPOSition Arguments NR3 is the vertical cursor ...

Page 271: ...icating the B cursor X position is 59 6802 ns DISplay PLOTView x CURSor SCREEN BYPOSition This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay PLOTView x CURSor SCREEN BYPOSition NR3 DISplay PLOTView x CURSor SCREEN BYPOSition Arguments NR3 is the vertical cursor B position Examples DISplay PLOTView1 CURSor SCREEN BYP...

Page 272: ...TATE This command sets or queries the visible state of the cursor of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay PLOTView x CURSor STATE OFF ON NR1 DISplay PLOTView x CURSor STATE Arguments OFF disables the specified cursor ON enables the specified cursor NR1 0 disables the specified cursor any other value enables the specified cursor Examples DISplay PLOTView1 CURSor ST...

Page 273: ...ets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay PLOTView x CURSor VBArs BPOSition NR3 DISplay PLOTView x CURSor VBArs BPOSition Arguments NR3 is the vertical cursor B position Examples DISPLAY PLOTVIEW1 CURSOR VBARS BPOSITION 50 0E 9 sets the VBARS BPOSITION to 50 ns DISPLAY PLOTVIEW1 CURSOR VBARS BPOSITION might return DISPLA...

Page 274: ...ned Examples DISplay PLOTView x CURSor VBArs UNIts might return DISPLAY PLOTVIEW5 CURSOR VBARS UNITS V indicating the units are Volts DISplay PLOTView x CURSor WAVEform APOSition This command sets or queries the waveform cursor A horizontal position of the specified cursor in the specified view NOTE In case of XY plot this command has no effect when used to set the value In case of bathtub plot th...

Page 275: ...nd has no effect Query returns invalid values For all other plots this command sets or returns the cursor B horizontal position Group Cursor Syntax DISplay PLOTView x CURSor WAVEform BPOSition NR3 DISplay PLOTView x CURSor WAVEform BPOSition Arguments NR3 is the horizontal cursor B position Examples DISplay PLOTView1 CURSor WAVEform BPOSition 3 0 sets the position to 3 0 V DISplay PLOTView5 CURSor...

Page 276: ...the horizontal scale setting for applicable plots either Linear or Log Group Display Syntax DISPLAY PLOTVIEW x XAXIS SCALE LINEAR LOG Arguments LINEAR creates a plot with linear scales LOG creates a plot with logarithmic scales Examples DISPLAY PLOTVIEW1 XAXIS SCALE LOG creates a plot with a logarithmic horizontal scale DISPLAY PLOTVIEW1 XAXIS SCALE might return DISPLAY PLOTVIEW1 XAXIS SCALE LINEA...

Page 277: ...t Group Zoom Syntax DISplay PLOTView x ZOOM XAXIS FROM NR3 DISplay PLOTView x ZOOM XAXIS FROM Arguments NR3 is start of the zoom x axis Examples DISplay PLOTView1 ZOOM XAXIS FROM 2 0 sets the start of the zoom x axis to 2 0 V DISplay PLOTView3 ZOOM XAXIS FROM might return DISPLAY PLOTVIEW3 ZOOM XAXIS FROM 1 9844803459459 indicating the start of the zoom x axis is 1 9845 V DISplay PLOTView x ZOOM X...

Page 278: ...uments NR3 is the bottom value of the zoom y axis Examples DISplay PLOTView1 ZOOM YAXIS FROM 1 0E 20 sets the bottom value of the zoom y axis to 1E 20 DISplay PLOTView1 ZOOM YAXIS FROM might return DISPLAY PLOTVIEW1 ZOOM YAXIS FROM 1 0E 21 indicating the bottom value of the zoom y axis is 1E 21 DISplay PLOTView x ZOOM YAXIS TO This command sets or queries the top value of the zoom y axis in the sp...

Page 279: ...lue turns this feature on OFF disables auto scale on the specified reffftview ON enables the specified channel on the specified waveview Examples DISplay REFFFTView1 AUTOScale 1 enables auto scale on the specified view DISplay REFFFTView5 AUTOScale might return DISPLAY REFFFTVIEW5 AUTOSCALE 1 indicating auto scale is on DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor ASOUrce Query Only This command returns the cursor...

Page 280: ...This command returns the delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor DDT Returns Returns the delta V over delta T cursor readout value Examples DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor DDT might return DISPLAY REFFFTVIEW5 CURSOR DDT 9 91E 37 indicating the delta V over delta T cursor readout value is 9 91E 37 DISplay REF...

Page 281: ...to the trigger Examples DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor FUNCtion screen sets the cursor function to screen DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor FUNCtion might return DISPLAY REFFFTVIEW5 CURSOR FUNCTION WAVEFORM indicating the cursor function is set to waveform DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor HBArs APOSition This command sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified view Grou...

Page 282: ...sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor HBArs BPOSition NR3 DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor HBArs BPOSition Arguments NR3 is the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view Examples DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor HBArs BPOSition 90 sets the B cursor position to 90 DISplay REFFF...

Page 283: ...cified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor HBArs DELTa Returns Returns the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified view Examples DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor HBArs DELTa might return DISPLAY REFFFTVIEW5 CURSOR HBARS DELTA 59 9867396737569 indicating the delta V cursor readout value is 59 99 DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor MODe This c...

Page 284: ...nly This command returns the one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified view Group Cursor Syntax DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor ONEOVERDELTATVALUE Examples DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor ONEOVERDELTATVALUE might return DISPLAY REFFFTVIEW5 CURSOR ONEOVERDELTATVALUE 2 540935140340E 9 indicating the one over delta T cursor readout value is 2 54 ns DISplay REFFFTView x CUR...

Page 285: ... AYPOSition Arguments NR3 is the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified view Examples DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor SCREEN AYPOSition 20 9 sets the position to 20 dBm DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor SCREEN AYPOSition might return DISPLAY REFFFTVIEW5 CURSOR SCREEN AYPOSITION 30 0132603262431 indicating the A cursor vertical position is 30 01 dBm DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor SCRE...

Page 286: ... CURSor SCREEN BYPOSition Arguments NR3 is the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view Examples DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor SCREEN BYPOSition 80 sets the cursor position to 90 dBm DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor SCREEN BYPOSition might return DISPLAY REFFFTVIEW5 CURSOR SCREEN BYPOSITION 90 0 indicating the B cursor vertical position is 90 dBm DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor ...

Page 287: ... 0 specifies the cursor is not visible any other value displays the cursor OFF specifies the cursor is not visible ON displays the cursor Examples DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor STATE ON specifies the cursor is visible DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor STATE might return DISPLAY REFFFTVIEW5 CURSOR STATE 1 indicating the cursor is visible DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor VBArs APOSition This command sets or querie...

Page 288: ... VBArs BPOSition Arguments NR3 is the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view Examples DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor VBArs BPOSition 300 0E 6 sets the cursor position to 300 MHz DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor VBArs BPOSition might return DISPLAY REFFFTVIEW5 CURSOR VBARS BPOSITION 394 3483403001212E 6 indicating the B cursor horizontal position is 394 348 MHz DISplay REF...

Page 289: ...UNITS Hz indicating the A cursor vertical units are Hz DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor WAVEform AHPOSition Query Only This query only command returns the value of the cursor A horizontal position Group Cursor Syntax DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor WAVEform AHPOSition Examples DISplay REFFFTView1 CURSor WAVEform AHPOSition might return DISPLAY REFFFTVIEW1 CURSOR WAVEFORM AHPOSITION 9 91E 37 DISplay REFFFTV...

Page 290: ...or WAVEform AVPOSition Query Only This query only command returns the value of the cursor A vertical position Group Cursor Syntax DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor WAVEform AVPOSition Examples DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor WAVEform AVPOSition might return DISplay REFFFTView1 CURSor WAVEform AVPOSition 1 605E 0 indicating the cursor vertical position is 1 6 dBm DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor WAVEform BHPOSiti...

Page 291: ...w Examples DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor WAVEform BPOSition 4E 8 sets the cursor position to 400 MHz DISplay REFFFTView5 CURSor WAVEform BPOSition might return DISPLAY REFFFTVIEW5 CURSOR WAVEFORM BPOSITION 394 3483403001212E 6 indicating the B waveform curosr position is 394 35 MHz DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor WAVEform BVPOSition Query Only This query only command returns the value of the cursor B ver...

Page 292: ...ew x REF REF x STATE This command sets or queries the state of the specified reference waveform in the specified waveview Group Display Control Syntax DISplay REFFFTView x REF REF x STATE boolean DISplay REFFFTView x REF REF x STATE Arguments NR1 0 disables the specified reference any other value turns this feature on OFF disables the display the specified reference ON enables the specified refere...

Page 293: ...mand sets or returns the left edge of the zoom x axis in the specified plot view Group Zoom Syntax DISplay REFFFTView x ZOOM XAXIS FROM NR3 DISplay REFFFTView x ZOOM XAXIS FROM Arguments NR3 is the left edge of the zoom x axis in the specified plot view Examples DISplay REFFFTView5 ZOOM XAXIS FROM 2 0E 6 sets the left edge of the specified view to 2 0 MHz DISplay REFFFTView5 ZOOM XAXIS FROM might ...

Page 294: ...the zoom y axis in the specified plot view Group Zoom Syntax DISplay REFFFTView x ZOOM YAXIS FROM NR3 DISplay REFFFTView x ZOOM YAXIS FROM Arguments NR3 is the bottom value of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view Examples DISplay REFFFTView5 ZOOM YAXIS FROM 120 0 sets the bottom value of the zoom y axis to 120 0 dBm DISplay REFFFTView5 ZOOM YAXIS FROM might return DISPLAY REFFFTVIEW5 ZOOM YA...

Page 295: ...ing the command gives the correct result but the bus cannot set Group Display Control Syntax DISplay SELect BUS BUS x DISplay SELect BUS Arguments BUS x is the selected bus Examples DISplay SELect BUS Bus2 selects Bus 2 as the selected bus DISplay SELect BUS might return DISPLAY SELECT BUS BUS1 indicating Bus 1 is the selected bus DISplay SELect MATH This command sets or queries the overall select...

Page 296: ...mples DISplay SELect REFerence REF2 selects reference 2 DISplay SELect REFERENCE might return DISPLAY SELECT REFERENCE NONE indicating no reference is selected DISplay SELect SOUrce This command sets or queries the overall selected source Sets are applied to all views that contain the source and the selected view is changed Group Display Control Syntax DISplay SELect SOUrce NONE CH x BUS x MATH x ...

Page 297: ...ew x SOUrce This command sets or queries the selected source in the given waveview Group Display Control Syntax DISplay SELect WAVEView x SOUrce CH x MATH x BUS x REF x PLOT x Arguments Arguments are the selected source Examples DISplay SELect WAVEView1 SOUrce MATH1 sets MATH1 as the selected source DISplay SELect WAVEView1 SOUrce might return DISPLAY SELECT WAVEVIEW1 SOURCE CH2 indicating CH2 is ...

Page 298: ...E WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be WAVEView1 Group Display Control Syntax DISplay WAVEView x BUS B x STATE OFF ON 0 1 DISplay WAVEView x BUS B x STATE Arguments 0 turns specified bus off 1 turns the specified bus on ON turns the specified bus on OFF turns specified bus off Examples DISplay WAVEView1 BUS B1 STATE OFF turns specified bus off DISplay WAVEView1 BUS B1 STATE might retur...

Page 299: ...TE Sets or queries the state of the specified channel in the specified waveview NOTE WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be WAVEView1 Group Display Control Syntax DISplay WAVEView x CH x STATE NR1 OFF ON DISplay WAVEView x CH x STATE Arguments NR1 0 disables the specified channel on the specified waveview any other value turns this feature on OFF disables the display the specified channe...

Page 300: ...xamples DISplay WAVEView1 CH1 VERTical POSition 1 0e0 sets the position to 1 division DISplay WAVEView1 CH1 VERTical POSition might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CH1 VERTICAL POSITION 3 4400 indicating the channel 1 vertical position is 3 44 divisions DISplay WAVEView x CH x VERTical SCAle Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified channel in volts per division within the specified waveview NO...

Page 301: ... enables the display of the specified channels on the specified waveview Examples DISplay WAVEView1 CH1_DALL STATE ON enables the display of the specified channels on the specified waveview DISplay WAVEView1 CH1_DALL STATE might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CH1_DALL STATE 0 indicating specified digital channels in the specified waveview are off DISplay WAVEView x CH x _DALL VERTical POSition This comm...

Page 302: ... STATE Arguments NR1 0 disables the display of the specified channel on the specified waveview any other value turns this feature on OFF disables the display of the specified channel on the specified waveview ON enables the display of the specified channel on the specified waveview Examples DISplay WAVEView1 CH1_D1 STATE OFF turns off the specified digital channel DISplay WAVEView1 CH1_D1 STATE mi...

Page 303: ...E 37 ONEOVERDELTATVALUE 100 0E 3 SPLITM ODE SAME LINESTYLE SOLID DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x Query Only This query returns the cursor parameters for the specified cursor in the specified waveview NOTE WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be WAVEView1 Cursor x is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1 Group Cursor Syntax DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x Returns Returns the curso...

Page 304: ... be CURSOR1 Group Cursor Syntax DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x ASOUrce AUTO CH x BUS x MATH x REF x PLOT x DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x ASOUrce Arguments Arguments are the specified source waveform Examples DISplay WAVEView1 CURSor CURSOR1 ASOUrce CH1 sets the cursor 1 source to channel 1 DISplay WAVEView1 CURSor CURSOR1 ASOUrce might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 ASOURCE REF1 ...

Page 305: ...he specified waveview NOTE WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be WAVEView1 Cursor x is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1 Group Cursor Syntax DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x DDT Returns The delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified waveview Examples DISplay WAVEView1 CURSor CURSOR1 DDT might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 DDT 9 ...

Page 306: ... is the X axis and Ch2 is the Y axis relative to the trigger Examples DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 FUNCTION VBArs selects the vertical bar cursor type for the specified waveview and cursor DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 FUNCTION might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 FUNCTION HBArs indicating that the specified cursor is set to HBArs DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x HBArs APOSition ...

Page 307: ...must be CURSOR1 Group Cursor Syntax DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x HBArs AUNIts Arguments QString is the cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified waveview Examples DISplay WAVEView1 CURSor CURSOR1 HBArs AUNIts might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 HBARS AUNITS V indicating the AUNITS are set to Volts DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x HBArs BPOSition Queries the...

Page 308: ...E WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be WAVEView1 Cursor x is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1 Group Cursor Syntax DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x HBArs BUNIts Returns QString is the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified waveview Examples DISplay WAVEView1 CURSor CURSOR1 HBArs BUNIts might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 HBARS BUNITS V indic...

Page 309: ... Cursor Syntax DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x MODe INDEPENDENT TRACK Arguments TRACK ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together For cursor 1 adjustments this ties the movement of the two cursors together however cursor 2 continues to move independently of cursor 1 INDEPENDENT allows independent adjustment of the two cursors Examples DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 MODE TR...

Page 310: ...sor A position of the specified cursor in the specified waveview NOTE WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be WAVEView1 Cursor x is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1 Group Cursor Syntax DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x SCREEN AXPOSition NR3 DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x SCREEN AXPOSition Arguments NR3 is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specifi...

Page 311: ...f the specified screen cursor of the specified waveview to 25 mV DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 SCREEN AYPOSITION might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 SCREEN AYPOSITION 53 0000E 03 indicating that y position of the specified screen cursor of the specified waveview is set to 53 mV DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x SCREEN BXPOSition Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the...

Page 312: ...st be CURSOR1 Group Cursor Syntax DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x SCREEN BYPOSition NR3 DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x SCREEN BYPOSition Arguments NR3 the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified waveview Examples DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 SCREEN BYPOSITION 25 0E 3 sets the y position of the screen cursor of waveview1 to 25 mV DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSO...

Page 313: ...ble state of the specified cursor in the specified waveview NOTE WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be WAVEView1 Cursor x is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1 Group Cursor Syntax DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x STATE NR1 OFF ON DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x STATE Arguments NR1 0 disables the specified cursor in the specified waveview any other value turns this feature on ...

Page 314: ...or CURSOR1 VBArs APOSition 4 0e 6 set the cursor position to 4 0 μs DISplay WAVEView1 CURSor CURSOR1 VBArs APOSition might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 VBARS APOSITION 5 0E 6 indicating the cursor A position is 5 0 μs DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x VBArs BPOSition This command sets or queries the cursor B horizontal position of the specified cursor in the specified waveview NOTE WAV...

Page 315: ...p Cursor Syntax DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x VBArs DELTa Returns The delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified waveview Examples DISplay WAVEView1 CURSor CURSOR1 VBArs DELTa might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 VBARS DELTA 6 7926388747725E 6 indicating the delta T cursor readout value is 6 79 μs DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x VBArs UNIts Query Only Th...

Page 316: ...WAVEform APOSition Arguments NR3 is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified waveview Examples DISplay WAVEView1 CURSor CURSOR1 WAVEform APOSition 1 5e 6 sets the position to 1 5 μs DISplay WAVEView1 CURSor CURSOR1 WAVEform APOSition might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR CURSOR1 WAVEFORM APOSITION 1 2667480236557E 6 indicating the position is 1 27 μs DISplay WAVEVi...

Page 317: ... NOTE WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be WAVEView1 Group Display Control Syntax DISplay WAVEView x FILTer SINX LINear Arguments LINEAr specifies linear interpolation where acquired points are connected with straight lines SINX specifies sin x x interpolation where acquired points are fit to a curve Examples DISplay WAVEView1 FILTer SINX specifies sine curve interpolation when magnify...

Page 318: ... DISplay WAVEView x INTENSITy GRATicule This command sets or queries the graticule saturation level NOTE WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be WAVEView1 Group Display Control Syntax DISplay WAVEView x INTENSITy GRATicule NR2 DISplay WAVEView x INTENSITy GRATicule Arguments NR2 is the graticule saturation level Examples DISplay WAVEView1 INTENSITy GRATicule 75 sets the saturation level t...

Page 319: ...er the specified math gets auto scaled when the math equation changes within the specified waveview Group Display Control Syntax DISplay WAVEView x MATH MATH x AUTOScale NR1 OFF ON DISplay WAVEView x MATH MATH x AUTOScale Arguments NR1 0 disables the autoscaling the math in the specified waveview any other value turns this feature on OFF disables the autoscaling the math in the specified waveview ...

Page 320: ...math in the specified waveview Examples DISplay WAVEView1 MATH MATH1 STATE OFF disables the specified math in the specified waveview DISplay WAVEView1 MATH MATH2 STATE might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 MATH MATH2 STATE 1 indicating the math is displayed DISplay WAVEView x MATH MATH x VERTical POSition This command sets or queries the vertical position in divisions of the specified math waveform in th...

Page 321: ...ew x MATH MATH x VERTical SCAle Arguments NR3 is the vertical scale of the specified math waveform Examples DISplay WAVEView1 MATH MATH1 VERTical SCAle 400e 3 sets the scale to 400 mV per division DISplay WAVEView1 MATH MATH1 VERTical SCAle might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 MATH MATH1 VERTICAL SCALE 395 0000E 3 indicating the scale is 395 mV DISplay WAVEView x PLOT PLOT x AUTOScale This command sets ...

Page 322: ... Syntax DISplay WAVEView x PLOT PLOT x STATE NR1 OFF ON DISplay WAVEView x PLOT PLOT x STATE Arguments NR1 0 disables the specified plot in the specified waveview any other value turns this feature on OFF disables the specified plot in the specified waveview ON enables the specified plot in the specified waveview Examples DISplay WAVEView1 PLOT PLOT1 STATE OFF disables the specified plot in the sp...

Page 323: ...pecified time trend in units per division in the specified waveview Group Display Control Syntax DISplay WAVEView x PLOT PLOT x VERTical SCAle NR3 DISplay WAVEView x PLOT PLOT x VERTical SCAle Arguments NR3 is the vertical scale Examples DISplay WAVEView1 PLOT PLOT1 VERTical SCAle 725 0e 3 sets the scale to 725 mUnits DISplay WAVEView1 PLOT PLOT1 VERTical SCAle might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 PLOT ...

Page 324: ... x VERTical POSition This command sets or queries the vertical position in divisions of the specified reference in the specified waveview NOTE WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be WAVEView1 Group Display Control Syntax DISplay WAVEView x REF REF x VERTical POSition NR3 DISplay WAVEView x REF REF x VERTical POSition Arguments NR3 is the vertical position in divisions Examples DISplay WA...

Page 325: ...w x STYle This command sets or queries how the waveforms are displayed for analysis mode NOTE WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be WAVEView1 Group Display Control Syntax DISplay WAVEView x STYle VECtors DOTsonly DISplay WAVEView x STYle Arguments DOTs displays individual data points New points immediately replace old ones VECtors connects adjacent data points New points immediately rep...

Page 326: ...y DISplay WAVEView1 VIEWStyle might return DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 VIEWSTYLE STACKED indicating the view style is stacked DISplay WAVEView x Zoom Query Only This query returns the zoom parameters of the specified waveview NOTE WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be WAVEView1 Group Zoom Syntax DISplay WAVEView x Zoom Returns Returns the zoom parameters of the specified waveview Examples DISplay...

Page 327: ...he horizontal zoom position of the specified zoom in the specified waveview of the zoomed waveform or zoom waveform in the display around which the zoom waveform displays It is freely movable around the acquisition settings horizontal span An acquired waveform or reference could extend off screen The valid zoom area does not care about the waveform itself only the user setting for acquisition For ...

Page 328: ...er the first major graticule division DISplay WAVEView x ZOOM ZOOM x HORizontal SCALe This command sets or queries the horizontal zoom factor of the specified zoom in the specified waveview NOTE WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be WAVEView1 ZOOM x is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1 Group Zoom Syntax DISplay WAVEView x ZOOM ZOOM x HORizontal SCALe NR3 DISplay WAVEView x ZOOM ZOOM ...

Page 329: ...AY WAVEVIEW1 ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL WINSCALE 80 0000E 9 indicating that the horizontal scale of the overview window is 80 ns per division DISplay WAVEView x ZOOM ZOOM x STATe This command sets or queries the zoom display state of the specified zoom in the specified waveview This command is equivalent to pushing the zoom button on the front panel NOTE WAVEView x is the specified waveview and must be...

Page 330: ...ical POSition Arguments NR3 is the vertical position of the specified zoom in the specified waveview It is freely movable within the confines of the acquired waveform The top of the zoom window is 5 vertical zoom factor The bottom of the zoom window is 5 the vertical zoom factor For a vertical zoom of 5x the position ranges from 25 to 25 Examples DISplay WAVEView1 ZOOM ZOOM1 VERTical POSition 50 s...

Page 331: ...1 ZOOM ZOOM2 VERTical SCALe might return DISplay WAVEView1 ZOOM ZOOM2 VERTical SCALe 2 0000 indicating that the vertical scale of zoom1 of waveview1 is 2 DISplay WAVEView y REF REF x FRAMe This command sets or returns the selected frame of the specified analog ref Each ref has a unique selected frame Group Display Control Syntax DISplay WAVEView y REF REF x FRAMe NR1 DISplay WAVEView y REF REF x F...

Page 332: ...e is 1 DVM No Query Form Resets the Digital Voltmeter measurements and history Conditions Requires DVM option Group DVM Syntax DVM RESET Arguments RESET specifies resetting DVM measurements and history Examples DVM RESET resets the DVM measurement and history DVM AUTORange Sets or queries the autorange state for the Digital Voltmeter NOTE the DVM will not autorange as long as the DVM source is the...

Page 333: ...M TRIGger FREQuency COUNTer Examples DVM MEASU FREQ might return 100 0000E 3 which represents 100 kHz as the current frequency value for the DVM DVM MEASUrement HIStory AVErage Query Only Returns the average DVM readout value over the history period The history period is a constant period of 5 seconds Conditions Requires DVM option Group DVM Syntax DVM MEASUrement HIStory AVErage Examples DVM MEAS...

Page 334: ...ent HIStory MINImum Query Only Returns the minimum readout value for the DVM over the history period The history period is a constant period of 5 seconds Conditions Requires DVM option Group DVM Syntax DVM MEASUrement HIStory MINImum Examples DVM MEASU HIS MINI might return DVM MEASUREMENT HISTORY MINIMUM 430 9000E 3 which represents the minimum readout value for the DVM function over the history ...

Page 335: ...VM has been on since the last change using the DVM MODe or DVM SOUrce commands or DVM RESET Conditions Requires DVM option Group DVM Syntax DVM MEASUrement INFMINimum Examples DVM MEASU INMIN might return DVM MEASUREMENT INFMINIMUM 427 3000E 3 which represents the minimum readout value of the DVM function in volts over the entire time that the DVM has been on since the last change using the DVM MO...

Page 336: ...quired data with the DC component removed ACDCRMS displays the RMS value of the acquired data DC displays the DC value of the acquired data OFF Examples DVM MODE DC sets the mode for the DVM to DC which displays the DC value of the acquired data DVM MOD might return ACRMS which indicates the mode is currently set to ACRMS DVM SOUrce This command sets or queries the source for the DVM Conditions Re...

Page 337: ...the counter DVM TRIGGER FREQUENCY COUNTER might return DVM TRIGGER FREQUENCY COUNTER 1 indicating the counter is on ESE This command sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register ESER The ESER prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte Register STB For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers see Registers Group Status and Error Syntax ESE NR1 ESE Relate...

Page 338: ...atus Register SESR ESR also clears the SESR since reading the SESR clears it For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers see Registers Group Status and Error Syntax ESR Related Commands ALLEv CLS DESE ESE EVENT EVMsg SRE STB Examples ESR might return ESR 213 showing that the SESR contains the binary value 11010101 ETHERnet DHCPbootp This command sets the network configuration meth...

Page 339: ... the network Domain Name Server DNS IP address Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet DNS IPADDress QString ETHERnet DNS IPADDress Arguments QString is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes Examples ETHERNET DNS IPADDRESS 128 196 13 252 sets the DNS IP address that the oscilloscope uses to communicate with the network ETHERnet DOMAINname This command specifies the network domain name Group Ethern...

Page 340: ...ss This command specifies the network gateway IP address Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress QString ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress Related Commands ETHERnet NETWORKCONFig ETHERnet IPADDress ETHERnet SUBNETMask Arguments QString is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes Examples ETHERNET GATEWAY IPADDRESS 128 143 16 1 sets the gateway IP address ETHERnet IPADDress This command set...

Page 341: ...k Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet LXI LAN RESET Examples ETHERnet LXI LAN RESET resets the LXI local area network ETHERnet LXI LAN SERVICENAMe This command sets or queries the service name used for the LXI interface Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet LXI LAN SERVICENAMe QString ETHERnet LXI LAN SERVICENAMe Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 64 characters that specifies the mDNS service name ...

Page 342: ... a message is being displayed on the oscilloscope s front panel indicating which scope the user is currently accessing Examples ETHER LXI LAN STAT might return FAULT indicating the network is not visible or the network settings are incorrect ETHERnet NAME This command sets or queries the instrument Ethernet hostname assigned to the oscilloscope Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet NAME QString ETHERnet ...

Page 343: ...ing ETHERnet IPADDress ETHERnet SUBNETMask and ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress Examples ETHERnet NETWORKCONFig MANual specifies to configure the Ethernet settings manually ETHERnet NETWORKCONFig might return AUTOMATIC indicating the settings are being configured automatically ETHERnet PING No Query Form Sends a ping packet to the instrument gateway and sets the status accordingly Group Ethernet Syntax ...

Page 344: ... powered on ETHERnet SUBNETMask This command sets or queries the instrument subnet mask value Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet SUBNETMask QString ETHERnet SUBNETMask Related Commands ETHERnet NETWORKCONFig ETHERnet IPADDress ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress Arguments QString is the subnet mask value enclosed in quotes Examples ETHERNET SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 sets the subnet mask value using standard IP ...

Page 345: ...rns The event code and message in the following format Event Code Comma QString Event Code Comma QString QString Message Command where Command is the command that caused the error and may be returned when a command error is detected by the instrument As much of the command will be returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit of the Message and Command string combined The command s...

Page 346: ...ecting Default Setup from the File menu This command Performs the following in addition to what is done for the RST command Clears any pending OPC operations Resets the following IEEE488 2 registers ESE 0 Event Status Enable Register SRE 0 Service Request Enable Register DESE 255 Device Event Status Enable Register PSC 1 Power on Status Clear Flag Deletes all defined aliases Enables command header...

Page 347: ...es a named file to a new file The new file might be in a totally separate directory than the old file You can only copy one file at a time using this command Wild card characters are not allowed Group File System Syntax FILESystem COPy source file path destination file path Related Commands FILESystem CWD FILESystem DELEte Arguments source file path is a quoted string that defines the file name an...

Page 348: ...x FILESystem CWD new working directory path FILESystem CWD Arguments new working directory path is a quoted string that defines the current working a directory name can be up to 128 characters Examples FILESYSTEM CWD E waveforms changes the current working directory to a folder named waveforms on the USB flash drive installed in the E USB Host port FILESYSTEM CWD might return FILESYSTEM CWD E Indi...

Page 349: ...the folder referred to by the FILESYSTEM CWDFILESystem CWD command Group File System Syntax FILESystem DIR Related Commands FILESystem CWD FILESystem MKDir Arguments None Examples FILESYSTEM DIR might return FILESYSTEM DIR 161012_132039_000 wfm 161012_132039_001 wfm 161220_191452 png 161220_191554 csv 170320_132925_0 00 wfm 170320_132929_000 set Ch2 Ch3_000 set E F G H I J RGJtest_000 set RgjSetup...

Page 350: ...the file size type and modification date time Each entry is a semicolon separated list file name type size in bytes date time Group File System Syntax FILESystem LDIR Returns A comma separated list of every file file size type modification date and time and directory in the folder referred to by the FILESystem CWDcommand Examples FILESYSTEM LDIR might return tek0000CH1 isf FILE 20342 2009 05 21 13...

Page 351: ... not exist or is not readable an appropriate error event is posted Group File System Syntax FILESystem READFile QString Related Commands FILESystem CWD Arguments QString is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name Examples FILESYSTEM READFILE E test_data tek00016CH1 csv reads the content of the ...

Page 352: ...TEM RENAME e mySettings tek00000 set e setup1 set This example illustrates how to move a file from one folder to another FILESystem RMDir No Query Form This command no query form deletes a named directory The directory must be empty Group File System Syntax FILESystem RMDir directory path Related Commands FILESystem CWD Arguments directory path is a quoted string that defines the folder name and p...

Page 353: ...sted Group File System Syntax FILESystem WRITEFile file path data Related Commands FILESystem CWD Arguments file path is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name data is the specified block data to be written FPAnel PRESS No Query Form This command is used to emulate a button press When used wit...

Page 354: ...R1 Arguments Arguments are knobs that turn obtained during startup NR1 is the number of clicks to turn the knob Examples FPANEL TURN TRIGLEVEL 3 emulates turning the trigger Level knob 3 clicks in the clockwise direction HEADer This command sets or queries the Response Header Enable State that causes the instrument to either include or omit headers on query responses NOTE This command does not aff...

Page 355: ... the instrument is including headers on applicable query responses With VERBose ON and HEADer ON the ACQuire MODe query might return ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE With VERBose OFF and HEADer ON the ACQuire MODe query might return ACQ MOD SAM With VERBose ON and HEADer OFF the ACQuire MODe query might return SAMPLE With VERBose OFF and HEADer OFF the ACQuire MODe query might return SAM HORizontal Query Only ...

Page 356: ...Syntax HORizontal DELay MODe OFF ON NR1 HORizontal DELay MODe Related Commands HORizontal POSition Arguments OFF sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off This causes the HORizontal POSition command to operate like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel ON sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to on This causes the HORizontal DELay TIMe command to operate like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the fro...

Page 357: ... Commands HORizontal POSition Arguments NR3 is the delay in seconds Examples HORizontal DELay TIME 0 3 sets the delay of acquisition data so that the resulting waveform is centered 300 ms after the trigger occurs HORizontal DIVisions Query Only This query only command returns the number of graticule divisions Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal DIVisions Examples HORIZONTAL DIVISIONS might return H...

Page 358: ...ontal FASTframe COUNt Arguments NR1 is the number of frames Examples HORizontal FASTframe COUNt 10 sets the number of frames to be acquired to 10 If this is beyond the maximum number of frames the value will be constrained For example if 8 is the current maximum based on record length 8 will be set instead of 10 HORizontal FASTframe MAXFRames Query Only This query returns the maximum number of fra...

Page 359: ...ame MULtipleframes MODE OVERlay will cause the entire acquired set of frames to be rendered in a single image similar to how FastAcq appears The currently selected frame is drawn on top in blue HORizontal FASTframe REF FRAme This command sets or returns the reference frame number Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal FASTframe REF FRAme NR1 HORizontal FASTframe REF FRAme Arguments NR1 is the referenc...

Page 360: ...D NR1 HORizontal FASTframe SELECTED Arguments NR1 is the selected frame number for acquired frames Examples HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED might return HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED 1 indicating the selected frame number is 1 HORizontal FASTframe STATE This command sets or returns the state of FastFrame Acquisition modes Envelope and Average are not compatible with FastFrame If FastFrame is on an a...

Page 361: ...roup Horizontal Syntax HORizontal FASTframe SUMFrame NONe AVErage ENVelope HORizontal FASTframe SUMFrame Arguments NONe sets the Summary frame to off AVErage sets the Summary frame to average of all acquired frames ENVelope sets the Summary frame to envelope of all acquired frames Examples HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SUMFRAME might return HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SUMFRAME NONE indicating the summary frame is...

Page 362: ...the time stamp of all frames The format is Frame TimeStamp Frame TimeStamp and so on Each time stamp string is of the form DD MM YYYY HH MM SS xxxxxxxxxxxx Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal FASTframe TIMEStamp ALL Returns Returns all of the timestamps Examples HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME TIMESTAMP ALL might return HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME TIMESTAMP ALL 1 31 12 1969 16 00 00 000000000000 indicating the only ...

Page 363: ...TIMEStamp SELECTED Query Only This query returns the time stamp of the FastFrame Selected acquired frame Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal FASTframe TIMEStamp SELECTED Examples HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME TIMESTAMP SELECTED might return HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME TIMESTAMP SELECTED 31 12 1969 17 00 00 000000000000 indicating the timestamp of the selected frame is 31 12 1969 17 00 00 000000000000 HORizontal FA...

Page 364: ...his value is in units of WFMOutpre XUNit Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal FASTframe XZEro REF Examples HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME XZERO REF might return HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME XZERO REF 1 0 indicating the sub sample time is 1 0 HORizontal FASTframe XZEro SELECTED Query Only This query only command returns the sub sample time between the trigger sample designated by PT_OFF and the occurrence of the actua...

Page 365: ...tomatic horizontal model Auto mode automatically adjusts the sample rate and record length to provide a high acquisition rate in Fast Acq or signal fidelity in analysis Record length is read only MANUAL selects the manual horizontal model Manual mode lets you change the sample rate horizontal scale and record length These values interact For example when you change record length then the horizonta...

Page 366: ...ERride OFF ON 0 1 HORizontal MODe AUTOmatic FASTAcq RECOrdlength MAXimum ZOOMOVERride Arguments OFF does not allow override of the horizontal FastAcq maximum record length ON allows override of the horizontal FastAcq maximum record length 0 does not allow override of the horizontal FastAcq maximum record length 1 allows override of the horizontal FastAcq maximum record length Examples HORIZONTAL M...

Page 367: ...nge when sample rate is adjusted Examples HORIZONTAL MODE MANUAL CONFIGURE RECORDLength allows the record length be adjusted when sample rate is changed in Manual mode HORizontal MODE RECOrdlength This command sets or queries the record length Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal MODE RECOrdlength NR1 HORizontal MODE RECOrdlength Arguments NR1 is the record length in samples Manual mode lets you cha...

Page 368: ...queries the horizontal scale Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal MODE SCAle NR1 HORizontal MODE SCAle Arguments NR1 is the horizontal scale in seconds per division Examples HORIZONTAL MODE SCALE 2e 9 sets the horizontal scale to 2 ns per division HORIZONTAL MODE SCALE might return HORIZONTAL MODE SCALE 20 0000E 6 indicating that the horizontal scale is set to 10 μs per division HORizontal POSition ...

Page 369: ... displayed on the screen HORizontal PREViewstate Query Only This query returns the display system preview state Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal PREViewstate Returns NR1 1 if the system is in the preview state NR1 0 if the system is not in the preview state Examples HORIZONTAL PREVIEWSTATE might return HORIZONTAL PREVIEWSTATE 0 indicating the system is not in the preview state HORizontal RECOrdl...

Page 370: ...summary frame is off NR1 a 0 indicates roll mode is off any other value activates roll mode Examples HORIZONTAL ROLL might return HORIZONTAL ROLL 0 indicating roll mode is off HORizontal SAMPLERate This command sets or queries the horizontal sample rate Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal SAMPLERate NR3 HORizontal SAMPLERate Arguments NR3 is the horizontal sample rate in samples per second Examples...

Page 371: ...yze minimum sample rate Examples HORIZONTAL SAMPLERATE ANALYZEMODE MINIMUM OVERRIDE OFF does not allow override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate HORIZONTAL SAMPLERATE ANALYZEMODE MINIMUM OVERRIDE might return HORIZONTAL SAMPLERATE ANALYZEMODE MINIMUM OVERRIDE 1 indicating that override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate is allowed HORizontal SAMPLERate ANALYZemode MINimum V...

Page 372: ...al SCAle NR3 HORizontal SCAle Arguments NR3 is the horizontal scale in time per division Returns The current horizontal scale is returned Examples HORIZONTAL SCALE 20e 9 sets the horizontal scale to 20 ns division HORIZONTAL SCALE might return HORIAONTAL SCALE 20e 9 indicating the horizontal scale is set to 20 ns division ID Query Only This query only command returns identifying information about ...

Page 373: ...e exit license indicated for the user to return to their TekAMS account Active licenses can be specified by their nomenclature TransactionIDs can be used to specify an active license or a previously uninstalled license In either case the exit license is returned as block data Group Miscellaneous Syntax LIC UNINSTALL QString Arguments QString is the nomenclature of an active license or a Transactio...

Page 374: ...er the string matches an active application ID Group Miscellaneous Syntax LICENSE APPID QString Returns This query returns a comma separated list of the active application IDs If a string argument is provided a 0 or 1 is returned according to whether the string matches an active application ID Examples LIC APPID might return BW5 2000 AFG DVM DJA which is a complete list of the active applications ...

Page 375: ...date 24 hour time and time zone offset Examples LICENSE GMT might return LICENSE GMT 2016 05 23T17 05 10 07 00 indicating the local GMT time LICense HID Query Only This query returns the instrument HostID unique identifier Group Miscellaneous Syntax LICense HID Returns The instrument HostID unique identifier Examples LICENSE HID might return LICENSE HID TMS 9CS4US5SGJN6X LICense INSTall No Query F...

Page 376: ...zero indexed argument specifying a specific license Returns The details pertaining to a specific license Examples LICENSE ITEM 0 might return 5 BW 1000 Fixed 2116 06 15T14 55 54 07 00 11870047 BW5 1000 1 GHz bandwidth on 5 series oscilloscopes LICense LIST Query Only This query returns the active license nomenclatures as a comma separated list of strings Duplicate nomenclatures that is the same li...

Page 377: ...CENSE VALIDATE AFG might return LICENSE VALIDATE AFG 0 indicating the license is not active LOCk This command enables or disables all front panel buttons and knobs There is no front panel equivalent To completely disable front panel operation combine two commands as follows LOCK ALL TOUCHSCREEN STATE OFF To re enable the front panel send these two commands LOCK NONE TOUCHSCREEN STATE ON The comman...

Page 378: ... list the instrument settings allowing you to record or learn the current instrument settings You can use these commands to return the instrument to the state it was in when you made the LRN query This command is identical to the SET command Group Miscellaneous Syntax LRN Related Commands SET Examples LRN might return the following response RST PARAMBATCHING 0 HEADER 1 VERBOSE 1 ALIAS STATE 0 ACQU...

Page 379: ...RIDE 1 HORIZONTAL MODE AUTOMATIC FASTACQ RECORDLENGTH MAXIMUM VALUE 1250 HORIZONTAL MODE MANUAL CONFIGURE HORIZONTALSCALE HORIZONTAL SAMPLERATE 6 2500E 9 DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 ZOOM ZOOM1 VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 TRIGGER B TYPE EDGE TRIGGER A TYPE EDGE ACQUIRE SEQUENCE NUMSEQUENCE 1 ACQUIRE SEQUENCE MODE NUMACQS ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP ACQUIRE FASTACQ PALETTE TEMPERATURE ACQUIRE FAST...

Page 380: ...of all currently defined math waveforms Group Math Syntax MATH LIST Related Commands MATH ADDNew MATH DELete Returns All currently defined math waveforms Examples MATH LIST Might return MATH LIST MATH1 MATH4 indicating MATH1 and MATH4 are the currently defined math waveforms MATH MATH x AVG MODE This command sets or queries the math average mode flag If the flag is set to 1 math averaging is turne...

Page 381: ...mber of acquisitions needed to begin averaging to 20 MATH MATH3 AVG WEIGHT might return MATH MATH3 AVG WEIGHT 20 indicating the number of acquisitions needed to begin averaging is 8 MATH MATH x DEFine This command allows you to define new waveforms using mathematical expressions The query form of this command returns the math definition for the specified math waveform The math waveform is specifie...

Page 382: ...waveform to be Channel1 and Channel2 added together MATH MATH1 DEFine might return MATH MATH1 DEFine CH2 REF2 as the expression that defines Math 1 waveform MATH MATH x FUNCtion This command sets or queries the basic math arithmetic function The math waveform is specified by x NOTE This command does not affect the same Math equation in Advanced math also accessed via the command MATH MATH x DEFINE...

Page 383: ...ating using the left and right edges of the screen CURSor limits math to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors even if they are off screen Examples MATH MATH3 GATING CURSOR sets the spectral math plot to be gated by the cursors MATH MATH2 GATING might return MATH MATH 2 GATING SCREEN which indicates the spectral math plot is gated by the screen MATH MATH x LABel COLor This c...

Page 384: ...Arguments NR1 0 turns off bold and any other integer turns on bold OFF turns off bold ON turns on bold Examples MATH MATH3 FONT BOLD ON set the math 3 label to bold MATH MATH2 FONT BOLD might return MATH MATH2 FONT BOLD 0 indicating the math 2 label is not currently bold MATH MATH x LABel FONT ITALic This command sets or queries italic state of the specified math label The math waveform is specifi...

Page 385: ...ZE 32 sets the math 4 label size to 32 MATH MATH2 LABEL FONT SIZE might return MATH MATH2 LABEL FONT SIZE 14 indicating the math 2 label size is currently 14 MATH MATH x LABel FONT TYPE This command sets or queries font type of the specified math label such as Arial or Times New Roman The math waveform is specified by x Group Math Syntax MATH MATH x LABel FONT TYPE QString Arguments QString is the...

Page 386: ...rn MATH MATH2 FONT UNDERLINE 0 indicating the math 2 label is currently not underlined MATH MATH x LABel NAMe This command sets or queries the label string which is used for annotating the math waveform on the screen The math waveform to which the label is attached is specified by x Group Math Syntax MATH MATH x LABel NAMe QString MATH MATH x LABel NAMe Arguments QString specifies the label to ann...

Page 387: ...e screen MATH MATH2 LABEL XPOS might return MATH MATH2 LABEL XPOS 2 5 indicating that the waveform label for the Math 2 waveform is currently 2 5 pixels to the right of the left edge of the display MATH MATH x LABel YPOS This command sets or queries the y position of the specified math label The Math waveform is specified by x Group Math Syntax MATH MATH x LABel YPOS NR1 MATH MATH x LABel YPOS Rel...

Page 388: ...aveform and source are specified by x Group Math Syntax MATH MATH x SOUrce x CH x MATH x REF x Related Commands MATH MATH x TYPe MATH MATH x FUNCtion Arguments Arguments are possible math sources SOURCE1 and SOURCE2 are for use when the MATH MATH x TYPE is BASIC Examples MATH MATH2 SOURCE1 CH1 sets the first source of math 2 to Channel 1 MATH MATH3 SOURCE2 might return MATH MATH3 SOURCE2 REF3 indi...

Page 389: ...ag units to linear DBM sets the SpectralMag units to decibels It also sets the Ref Level Offset to a value that is the equivalent of 1 mW into 50 Ω Examples MATH MATH2 SPECTral MAG DBM sets the SpectralMag units for Math 2 waveform to decibels MATH MATH2 SPECTral MAG might return MATH MATH2 SPECTral MAG DBM indicating that the SpectralMag units for Math 2 waveform are set to decibels MATH MATH x S...

Page 390: ...FT The math waveform is specified by x Group Math Syntax MATH MATH x SPECTral SOUrce CH x MATH x REF x MATH MATH x SPECTral SOUrce Related Commands MATH MATH x TYPe Arguments Arguments are math sources MATH MATH x SPECTRAL SOURCE is for use when the MATH MATH x TYPE is FFT Examples MATH MATH3 SPECTRAL SOURCE REF3 sets the source of the Spectral Math waveform to Ref 3 MATH MATH2 SPECTRAL SOURCE mig...

Page 391: ...tral waveform MATH MATH x SPECTral SUPPress VALue This command sets or queries in volts the value of suppression threshold of the specified math waveform This requires the Spectral type to be Phase and the Suppression to be enabled for this PI command to have any affect The math waveform is specified by x Group Math Syntax MATH MATH x SPECTral SUPPress VALue NR3 MATH MATH x SPECTral SUPPress VALue...

Page 392: ...ion MATH MATH1 SPECTral TYPE might return MATH MATH1 SPECTRAL TYPE MAGNITUDE indicating the math is the magnitude spectral function MATH MATH x SPECTral UNWRap This command sets or queries whether phase unwrap of the spectral analyzer output data is enabled The Math waveform is specified by x Group Math Syntax MATH MATH x SPECTral UNWRap OFF ON 0 1 MATH MATH x SPECTral UNWRap Arguments 0 disables ...

Page 393: ...GREES 90 sets the unwrap phase of the spectral Math 2 to 90 degrees MATH MATH2 SPECTRAL UNWRAP DEGREES might return MATH MATH2 SPECTRAL UNWRAP DEGREES 180 indicating unwrap phase of the spectral math 3 waveform is 180 degrees MATH MATH x SPECTral WINdow This command sets or queries the window function used to multiply the spectral analyzer input data for the specified math waveform The Math wavefo...

Page 394: ...NHarris indicating that the window function used to multiply the spectral analyzer input data is the BLACKMANHarris function MATH MATH x TYPe This command sets or queries the math type The math waveform is specified by x Group Math Syntax MATH MATH x TYPe BASic FFT ADVanced Arguments BASic set the type to basic math FFT sets the type to FFT math which can use any live analog or reference waveform ...

Page 395: ...ill read that file and load the filter for ARBFLT x Access these filters using a Math with an expression of the form ARBFlt x Group Math Syntax MATHArbflt x FILepath QString MATHArbflt x FILepath Arguments QString specifies the path to the file of filter coefficients Examples MATHARBFLT8 FILEPATH c myfilters 20mhz flt reads filter coefficients from the file and loads the filter for ARBFLT8 MATHARB...

Page 396: ...ULSE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 0000 LOW 0 0000 MID1 0 0000 MID2 0 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 0000 LOW 10 0000 MID1 50 0000 MID2 50 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 METHOD HISTOGRAM NOISE HIGH MEASUREMENT MEAS2 STATE 0 TYPE UNDEFINED UNITS V SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH1 SOURCE1 SIGTYPE PULSE MEASU...

Page 397: ...x MEASUrement ADDNew QString Arguments QString is the measurement to add The argument is of the form MEAS NR1 where NR1 1 Examples MEASUrement ADDNew MEAS11 adds measurement 11 MEASUrement ANNOTate This command sets or queries the annotation state for measurements Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement ANNOTate OFF AUTO MEASUrement ANNOTate Arguments OFF turns off measurement annotations AUTO turns ...

Page 398: ...ASUrement CH x REFLevels ABSolute FALLHigh Arguments NR3 is the high reference level and is the zero percent level when MEASUrement IMMed REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute Examples MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE FALLHIGH 1 5 sets the high reference level of the falling edge to 1 5 V MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE FALLHIGH might return MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE FALLHIGH 1 0000 ind...

Page 399: ...source ref level method is set to absolute The channel number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement CH x REFLevels ABSolute FALLMid NR3 MEASUrement CH x REFLevels ABSolute FALLMid Arguments NR3 is the mid reference level used to calculate the mid reference level when the measurement s Ref level method is set to Absolute Examples MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE FALLMID 0 sets th...

Page 400: ...et to absolute The channel number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement CH x REFLevels ABSolute RISEHigh NR3 MEASUrement CH x REFLevels ABSolute RISEHigh Arguments NR3 is the high reference level of the rising edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute Examples MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE RISEHIGH 1 5 sets the high reference level of the rising edge to 1 5 V M...

Page 401: ...rence level of the rising edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute The channel number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement CH x REFLevels ABSolute RISEMid NR3 MEASUrement CH x REFLevels ABSolute RISEMid Arguments NR3 is the mid reference level of the rising edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute Examples MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE RISEMID...

Page 402: ...eries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE used to calculate reference levels for the measurement The channel number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement CH x REFLevels BASETop AUTO MINMax MEANhistogram MODEhistogram EYEhistogram MEASUrement CH x REFLevels BASETop Arguments AUTO automatically chooses a reference level method MINMax specifies that reference levels are rel...

Page 403: ...PERCENT sets reference levels to be calculated in percent MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLEVELS METHOD might return MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLEVELS METHOD PERCENT indicating the reference levels are calculated in percent MEASUrement CH x REFLevels PERCent FALLHigh This command sets or queries the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP and 0 is equal to BASE used to calculate the high reference level of the falling ed...

Page 404: ...REFLevels PERCent FALLLow Arguments NR3 is the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP used to calculate the low reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent Examples MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLEVELS PERCENT FALLLOW 10 0000 sets the reference levels for the falling edge to 10 MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLEVELS PERCENT FALLLOW might return MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLEVELS PERCENT FALLLOW 10 0000 i...

Page 405: ...asurement ref level method is set to percent The channel number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement CH x REFLevels PERCent HYSTeresis NR3 MEASUrement CH x REFLevels PERCent HYSTeresis Arguments NR3 is the hysteresis value used for the autoset Examples MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLEVELS PERCENT HYSTERESIS 5 0000 sets the reference level hysteresis to 5 0 mV MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLEVELS PERCE...

Page 406: ...dge when the measurement ref level method is set to percent The channel number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement CH x REFLevels PERCent RISELow NR3 MEASUrement CH x REFLevels PERCent RISELow Arguments NR3 is the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP used to calculate the mid reference level when the measurement s Ref level method is set to Percent Examples MEASUREMENT CH2 REFLE...

Page 407: ...50 MEASUrement CH x REFLevels PERCent TYPE This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the measurement The channel number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement CH x REFLevels PERCent TYPE TENNinety TWENtyeighty CUSTom MEASUrement CH x REFLevels PERCent TYPE Arguments TENNinety specifies reference levels at the 10 and 90 levels TWENtyeighty specifies refe...

Page 408: ...L sets the CDR method to use a Known Data Pattern MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY ADVANCED METHOD might return MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY ADVANCED METHOD NONE indicating that no advanced CRD method will be used MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery CLOCKFrequency This command sets or queries the global clock frequency used when fixed constant clock recovery is used for the measurement This will affect measurements w...

Page 409: ...amples MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY CLOCKMULTIPLIER 1 000 sets the clock multiplier to 1 000 MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY CLOCKMULTIPLIER might return MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY CLOCKMULTIPLIER 1 0000 indicating the clock multiplier is set to 1 0000 MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery CONSTCLOCKMODe This command sets or queries the global constant clock mode used when constant clock recovery is used for the measur...

Page 410: ...R3 MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery DAMPing Arguments NR3 is the global clock recovery damping value Examples MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY DAMPING MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY DAMPING might return MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY DAMPING 700 0000E 3 indicating the damping value is set to MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery DATAPath This command sets or queries the global file containing the data pattern used when known data pa...

Page 411: ...obal value for the Nominal data rate Examples MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY DATARATE 2 0e 9 sets the data rate for clock recovery to 2 0 GHz MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY DATARATE might return MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY DATARATE 2 5000E 9 indicating the data rate is 2 5 GHz MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery EXPLICITCLOCKMODe This command sets or queries the global explicit clock mode used when explicit clock recov...

Page 412: ...width NR3 MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery JTFBandwidth Arguments NR3 is the global clock recovery JTF bandwidth Examples MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY JTFBANDWIDTH 2 0e6 sets the bandwidth to 2 0 MHz MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY JTFBANDWIDTH might return MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY JTFBANDWIDTH 1 0000E 6 indicating the bandwidth is 1 0 MHz MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery LOOPBandwidth This command sets or queries the ...

Page 413: ...T EVERY MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery MEANAUTOCalculate Arguments FIRST calculates the clock on the first acquisition EVERY calculates the clock on every acquisition Examples MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY MEANAUTOCALCULATE EVERY calculates the clock on every acquisition MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY MEANAUTOCALCULATE might return MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY MEANAUTOCALCULATE FIRST indicating the clock is calcul...

Page 414: ...measurements whose MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery GLOBal flag is set to 1 Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery MODel TYPE1 TYPE2 MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery MODel Arguments TYPE1 PLL clock recovery uses PLL model type I TYPE2 PLL clock recovery uses PLL model type II Examples MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY MODEL TYPE2 sets the model to type 2 MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY MODEL might return M...

Page 415: ...flag is set to 1 Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery NOMINALOFFset SELECTIONtype AUTO MANUAL MEASUrement CLOCKRecovery NOMINALOFFset SELECTIONtype Arguments AUTO sets the selection type to AUTO MANUAL sets the selection type to MANUAL Examples MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY NOMINALOFFSET SELECTIONTYPE AUTO sets the selection type to auto MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY NOMINALOFFSET SELECTIONT...

Page 416: ...VERY STANDARD PCIE_GEN3 sets the standard to PCIE_GEN3 MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY STANDARD might return MEASUREMENT CLOCKRECOVERY STANDARD PCIE_GEN1 indicating the standard is set to PCIE_GEN1 MEASUrement DELete No Query Form The command deletes the specified measurement Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement DELete QString Arguments QString is the measurement to delete Argument is of the form MEAS N...

Page 417: ...ISPLAYUnits SEConds UNITINtervals Arguments SEConds set the display units to seconds UNITINtervals set the display units to unit intervals Examples MEASUREMENT DISPLAYUNITS UNITINTERVALS sets the display units to unit intervals MEASUREMENT DISPLAYUNITS might return MEASUREMENT DISPLAYUNITS SECONDS indicating the display units are seconds MEASUrement EDGE x This command sets or queries the type of ...

Page 418: ...e diagram any other value turns this feature on OFF disables high performance eye rendering for an eye diagram ON enables high performance eye rendering for an eye diagram Examples MEASUREMENT EYERENDER MEASUREMENT EYERENDER might return MEASUREMENT EYERENDER 1 indicating high performance eye rendering is on MEASUrement FILTers BLANKingtime This command sets or queries the global filter blanking t...

Page 419: ...er frequency Examples MEASUREMENT FILTERS HIGHPASS FREQ 20 0e6 sets the frequency to 20 MHz MEASUREMENT FILTERS HIGHPASS FREQ might return MEASUREMENT FILTERS HIGHPASS FREQ 10 0000E 6 indicating the filter frequency is set to 10 0 MHz MEASUrement FILTers HIGHPass SPEC This command sets or queries the global high pass filter order for the measurement Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement FILTers HIG...

Page 420: ... pass filter frequency Examples MEASUREMENT FILTERS LOWPASS FREQ 20 0e6 sets the low pass frequency to 20 MHz MEASUREMENT FILTERS LOWPASS FREQ might return MEASUREMENT FILTERS LOWPASS FREQ 10 0000E 6 indicating the low pass frequency is 10 0 MHz MEASUrement FILTers LOWPass SPEC This command sets or queries the global low pass filter order for the measurement Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement FI...

Page 421: ...MENT FILTERS RAMPTIME might return MEASUREMENT FILTERS RAMPTIME 2 0000 indicating the ramp time is 2 0 MEASUrement GATing This command sets or queries the global gating type for the measurement Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement GATing NONE SCREEN CURSor LOGic SEARch MEASUrement GATing Arguments NONE turns off measurement gating SCREen turns on gating using the left and right edges of the screen...

Page 422: ... gating Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement GATing ACTive HIGH LOW MEASUrement GATing ACTive Arguments HIGH specifies the gate is HIGH LOW specifies the gate is LOW Examples MEASUREMENT GATING ACTIVE LOW specifies a low gate MEASUREMENT GATING ACTIVE might return MEASUREMENT GATING ACTIVE HIGH indicating the gate is high MEASUrement GATing HYSTeresis This command sets or queries the global gating...

Page 423: ...ic gating source Examples MEASUREMENT GATING LOGICSOURCE MATH1 sets the logic source to MATH 1 MEASUREMENT GATING LOGICSOURCE might return MEASUREMENT GATING LOGICSOURCE CH6 indicating the logic source is channel 6 MEASUrement GATing MIDRef This command sets or queries the global gating mid ref value used for logic gating Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement GATing MIDRef NR3 MEASUrement GATing MI...

Page 424: ... indicating the search source is not defined MEASUrement INTERp This command sets or queries the interpolation mode used to locate edge crossings Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement INTERp AUTO SINX LINear MEASUrement INTERp Arguments AUTO automatically selects the interpolation mode SINX specifies sin x x interpolation where acquired points are fit to a curve LINear specifies linear interpolatio...

Page 425: ...EL SPECTRAL set the jitter model to spectral MEASUREMENT JITTERMODEL might return MEASUREMENT JITTERMODEL SPECTRAL indicating the jitter model is set to spectral MEASUrement LIST Query Only This query returns a comma separated list of all currently defined measurements Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement LIST Returns Returns a list of all currently defined measurements Examples MEASUREMENT LIST m...

Page 426: ...SUREMENT LOCKRJVALUE 1 sets the lock value to the maximum value of 1 MEASUREMENT LOCKRJVALUE might return MEASUREMENT LOCKRJVALUE 1 0000E 12 indicating the lock value is set to the default value of 1e 12 MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels ABSolute FALLHigh This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the falling edge when the measurement ref level method is set to absolute ...

Page 427: ...the zero percent level when MEASUrement IMMed REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute Examples MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels ABSolute FALLLow 1 5 sets the reference level to 1 5 V MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels ABSolute FALLLow might return MEASUREMENT MATH2 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE FALLLOW 1 0000 indicating the reference level is 1 0 V MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels ABSolute FALLMid This command sets or queries th...

Page 428: ...ts NR3 is the hysteresis value used for the autoset Examples MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels ABSolute HYSTeresis 20 0E 3 sets the hysteresis to 20 0 mV MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels ABSolute HYSTeresis might return MEASUREMENT MATH2 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE HYSTERESIS 30 0000E 3 indicating the hysteresis value is 30 0 mV MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels ABSolute RISEHigh This command sets or queries the value use...

Page 429: ...s the zero percent level when MEASUrement IMMed REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute Examples MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels ABSolute RISELow 1 5 sets the reference level to 1 5 V MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels ABSolute RISELow might return MEASUREMENT MATH2 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE RISELOW 1 0000 indicating the reference level is 1 0 V MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels ABSolute RISEMid This command sets or queries ...

Page 430: ...ies that the absolute levels are set the same UNIQue specifies that the absolute levels can be set independently Examples MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels ABSolute TYPE UNIQUE specifies that the absolute levels can be set independently MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels ABSolute TYPE might return MEASUREMENT MATH2 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE TYPE SAME indicating that the absolute levels are set the same MEASUrement MA...

Page 431: ... MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels METHod This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for the measurement The math number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels METHod PERCent ABSolute MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels METHod Arguments PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW The percentag...

Page 432: ...e level to 95 of TOP MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels PERCent FALLHigh might return MEASUREMENT MATH2 REFLEVELS PERCENT FALLHIGH 90 0000 indicating the reference level is set to 90 of TOP MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels PERCent FALLLow This command sets or queries the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP and 0 is equal to BASE used to calculate the low reference level of the falling edge when the measurem...

Page 433: ... used to calculate the mid reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent Examples MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels PERCent FALLMid 50 sets the reference level to 50 of TOP MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels PERCent FALLMid might return MEASUREMENT MATH2 REFLEVELS PERCENT FALLMID 50 0000 indicating the reference level is set to 50 of TOP MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels PERCent HYSTeresis...

Page 434: ...ement MATH x REFLevels PERCent RISEHigh Arguments NR3 is the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP used to calculate the high reference level when the measurement s Ref level method is set to Percent Examples MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels PERCent RISEHigh 95 sets the reference level to 95 of TOP MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels PERCent RISEHigh might return MEASUREMENT MATH2 REFLEVELS PERCENT RISEHIGH 90 ...

Page 435: ...is set to percent The math number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels PERCent RISEMid NR3 MEASUrement MATH x REFLevels PERCent RISEMid Arguments NR3 is the percentage where 50 is equal to MID used to calculate the mid reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent Examples MEASUrement MATH2 REFLevels PERCent RISEMid 50 sets the reference...

Page 436: ...MATH2 REFLEVELS PERCENT TYPE TENNINETY indicating the reference levels are set to 10 50 and 90 MEASUrement MEASRange MAX This command sets or queries the global range maximum value Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEASRange MAX NR3 MEASUrement MEASRange MAX Arguments NR3 is the maximum measurement range limit value Examples MEASUREMENT MEASRANGE MAX 1 5 sets the maximum range limit to 1 5 V ME...

Page 437: ...ted ON specifies that the measurement results are limited to results with values between the range minimum and maximum 0 specifies that the measurement results are not limited 1 specifies that the measurement results are limited to results with values between the range minimum and maximum Examples MEASUREMENT MEASRANGE STATE 1 specifies that the measurement results are limited to results with valu...

Page 438: ...t Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x BER TARGETBER NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x BER TARGETBER Arguments NR3 is the target BER value Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 BER TARGETBER 14 0 sets the target BER to 14 0 MEASUrement MEAS1 BER TARGETBER might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 BER TARGETBER 12 0000 indicating the target BER is 12 0 MEASUrement MEAS x BIN This command sets...

Page 439: ... x BITCfgmode Arguments MEAN specifies that the measurement returns results for each bit MODE specifies that the measurement returns the mode of its results Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 BITCfgmode MODE specifies that the measurement returns the mode of its results MEASUrement MEAS1 BITCfgmode might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 BITCFGMODE MEAN indicating the configuration mode is set to MEAN MEASUrement ...

Page 440: ...elected Examples MEASUrement MEAS2 BITPcnt 55 sets the bit center to 55 of the unit interval MEASUrement MEAS2 BITPcnt might return MEASUREMENT MEAS2 BITPCNT 50 0000 indicating bit center is 50 of the unit interval MEASUrement MEAS x BITSTart This command sets or queries the bit start as a percentage of the unit interval Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x B...

Page 441: ...n bits only Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 BITType TRANSITION specifies that the measurement returns results for transition bits only MEASUrement MEAS1 BITType might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 BITTYPE ALLBITS indicating that measurements return results for all bits MEASUrement MEAS x BURSTEDGTYPe This command sets or queries the burst edge type for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group M...

Page 442: ... might return MEASUREMENT MEAS2 CCRESULTS ALLACQS MAXIMUM 9 91E 37 MEASUrement MEAS x CCRESUlts ALLAcqs MEAN Query Only This query only command returns the mean cycle cycle value for the specified measurement for all acquisitions Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x CCRESUlts ALLAcqs MEAN Returns The mean cycle cycle statistic value for the specified measurem...

Page 443: ...EAS x CCRESUlts ALLAcqs PK2PK Returns The peak to peak cycle cycle statistic value for the specified measurement all acquisitions Examples MEASUrement MEAS2 CCRESUlts ALLAcqs PK2PK might return MEASUREMENT MEAS2 CCRESULTS ALLACQS PK2PK 9 91E 37 MEASUrement MEAS x CCRESUlts ALLAcqs POPUlation Query Only This query only command returns the population of all cycle cycle statistics for the specified m...

Page 444: ... value for the specified measurement all acquisitions Examples MEASUrement MEAS2 CCRESUlts ALLAcqs STDDev might return MEASUREMENT MEAS2 CCRESULTS ALLACQS STDDEV 9 91E 37 MEASUrement MEAS x CCRESUlts CURRentacq MAXimum Query Only This query only command returns the maximum cycle cycle value for the specified measurement for the current acquisition Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement ...

Page 445: ... CURRentacq MINimum Query Only This query only command returns the minimum cycle cycle value for the specified measurement for the current acquisition Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x CCRESUlts CURRentacq MINimum Returns The minimum cycle cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for the current acquisition Examples MEASUrement MEAS2 CCRESUlts C...

Page 446: ... Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x CCRESUlts CURRentacq POPUlation Returns The population of the cycle cycle statistics for the specified measurement for the current acquisition Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 CCRESUlts CURRentacq POPUlation might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 CCRESULTS CURRENTACQ POPULATION 0 indicating the population is 0 MEASUrement MEAS x CCRESUlts CURRentacq STDDev Query Only This query only c...

Page 447: ... a Known Data Pattern NONE sets no advanced CRD method Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 CLOCKRecovery ADVanced METHod PATTERN sets the advanced CDR method to use a Known Data Pattern MEASUrement MEAS1 CLOCKRecovery ADVanced METHod might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 CLOCKRECOVERY ADVANCED METHOD NONE indicating no advanced CRD method MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery CLOCKFrequency This command sets or querie...

Page 448: ...sets the clock multiplier to 1 5 MEASUrement MEAS1 CLOCKRecovery CLOCKMultiplier might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 CLOCKRECOVERY CLOCKMULTIPLIER 1 0000 indicating the clock multiplier is 1 0 MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery CONSTCLOCKMODe This command sets or queries the constant clock mode used when constant clock recovery is used for the measurement The measurement number is specified by x Group Me...

Page 449: ...ery DAMPing NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery DAMPing Arguments NR3 is the clock recovery damping value Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 CLOCKRecovery DAMPing 700 0E 3 sets the damping value to 0 70 MEASUrement MEAS1 CLOCKRecovery DAMPing might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 CLOCKRECOVERY DAMPING 700 0000E 3 indicating the damping value is 0 70 MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery DATAPath This command sets or...

Page 450: ... NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery DATARate Arguments NR3 is the value for the Nominal data rate Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 CLOCKRecovery DATARate 2 0000E 9 sets the data rate to 2 0 Gb s MEASUrement MEAS1 CLOCKRecovery DATARate might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 CLOCKRECOVERY DATARATE 2 5000E 9 indicating the data rate is 2 5 Gb s MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery EXPLICITCLOCKMODe This command set...

Page 451: ...vidual measurement ON applies global clock recovery settings to all the measurements clock recovery settings 0 clock recovery settings are changed independently for each individual measurement 1 applies global clock recovery settings to all the measurements clock recovery settings Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 CLOCKRecovery GLOBal 1 applies global clock recovery settings to all the measurements clock...

Page 452: ...ery is used for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery LOOPBandwidth NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery LOOPBandwidth Arguments NR3 is the clock recovery loop bandwidth Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 CLOCKRecovery LOOPBandwidth 1 10E 6 sets the bandwidth to 1 1 Mhz MEASUrement MEAS1 CLOCKRecovery LOOPBandwidth might return MEASUREMEN...

Page 453: ...ock recovery method for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery METHod PLL CONSTANTCLOCK EXPLICITCLOCK MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery METHod Arguments PLL specifies a phase locked loop clock recovery method CONSTANTCLOCK specifies using a constant clock EXPLICITCLOCK specifies using an explicit clock Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 CLO...

Page 454: ...explicit clock recovery is used for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery NOMINALOFFset NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery NOMINALOFFset Arguments NR3 is the clock offset Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 CLOCKRecovery NOMINALOFFset 1 0e 9 sets the clock offset to 1 ns MEASUrement MEAS1 CLOCKRecovery NOMINALOFFset might return MEASUREM...

Page 455: ...tions standard when PLL clock recovery is used for the measurement The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery STAndard CUSTom ENET100 FW1394BS400B FW1394BS800B FW1394BS1600B FBD1 FBD2 FBD3 FC133 FC266 FC531 FC1063 FC2125 FC4250 FC8500 ENET1000 IBA2500 IBA_GEN2 OC1 OC3 OC12 OC48 PCIE_GEN1 PCIE_GEN2 PCIE_GEN3 RIO125 RIO250 RIO3125 SAS15_NOSSC S...

Page 456: ...MEAS1 COMMONMode FILTers STATE ON sets the filter to on MEASUrement MEAS1 COMMONMode FILTers STATE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 COMMONMODE FILTERS STATE 0 indicating the filter is off MEASUrement MEAS x COMMONMode SOURCEs This command sets or queries the number of sources for the measurement when the measurement type is AC common mode Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEAS...

Page 457: ...aken on each cycle of the source Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 CYCLemode CYCLE sets the measurement to be taken over each cycle of the source MEASUrement MEAS1 CYCLemode might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 CYCLEMODE RECORD indicating the measurement is taken over the whole record MEASUrement MEAS x DELay EDGE x This command sets or queries the to edge type when EDGE x is EDGE1 and the from edge type when ...

Page 458: ...of statistics in measurement badges in the user interface This command affects only the display of statistics basic statistics are computed regardless of the state of this command Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x DISPlaystat ENABle OFF ON NR1 MEASUrement MEAS x DISPlaystat ENABle Arguments OFF turns off the display of statistics in measurement badges ON t...

Page 459: ...rement value is set to 1 0000 MEASUrement MEAS x EDGES FROMLevel This command sets or queries the from level edge for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x EDGES FROMLevel MID LOW HIGH MEASUrement MEAS x EDGES FROMLevel Arguments MID specifies the MID level HIGH specifies the HIGH level LOW specifies the LOW level Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 EDG...

Page 460: ... MEAS1 EDGES LEVEL HIGH indicating the level is set to the high level MEASUrement MEAS x EDGES LOWERFREQuency This command sets or queries the lower frequency for the measurement when the measurement type is phase noise Lower frequencies are ignored Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x EDGES LOWERFREQuency NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x EDGES LOWERFREQuency Arguments...

Page 461: ... MEASUREMENT MEAS1 EDGES N 6 0000 MEASUrement MEAS x EDGES SLEWRATEMethod This command sets or queries the slew rate method for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x EDGES SLEWRATEMethod NOMinal DDR MEASUrement MEAS x EDGES SLEWRATEMethod Arguments NOMinal specifies the nominal slew rate method DDR specifies the DDR slew rate method Examples me...

Page 462: ...ES TOLEVEL LOW indicating the to level edge is set to the Low level MEASUrement MEAS x EDGES UPPERFREQuency This command sets or queries the upper frequency for the measurement when the measurement type is phase noise Higher frequencies are ignored Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x EDGES UPPERFREQuency NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x EDGES UPPERFREQuency Arguments ...

Page 463: ...MEASUrement MEAS x FILTers BLANKingtime This command sets or queries the filter blanking time for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x FILTers BLANKingtime NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x FILTers BLANKingtime Arguments NR3 is the current filter blanking time Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 FILTers BLANKingtime 3 5 sets the blanking time to 3 5 MEASUrement M...

Page 464: ...h individual measurement MEASUrement MEAS x FILTers GLOBal might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 FILTERS GLOBAL 1 indicating filter settings are for all measurements MEASUrement MEAS x FILTers HIGHPass FREQ This command sets or queries the high pass filter frequency for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x FILTers HIGHPass FREQ NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x...

Page 465: ...s MEASUrement MEAS1 FILTers HIGHPass SPEC FIRST specifies a first order filter MEASUrement MEAS1 FILTers HIGHPass SPEC might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 FILTERS HIGHPASS SPEC NONE indicating no high pass filter is used MEASUrement MEAS x FILTers LOWPass FREQ This command sets or queries the low pass filter cutoff frequency for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax M...

Page 466: ...specifies no filter FIRST specifies a first order filter SECOND specifies a second order filter THIRD specifies a third order filter Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 FILTers LOWPass SPEC FIRST specifies a first order filter MEASUrement MEAS1 FILTers LOWPass SPEC might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 FILTERS LOWPASS SPEC NONE indicating no low pass filter is used MEASUrement MEAS x FILTers RAMPtime This command...

Page 467: ... rising edge of the waveform BOTH specifies both the rising and falling edges of the waveform Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 FROMedge RISE specifies the rising edge of the waveform MEASUrement MEAS1 FROMedge might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 FROMEDGE BOTH indicating both the rising and falling edges of the waveform MEASUrement MEAS x FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect This command sets or queries the from edge search ...

Page 468: ...left and right edges of the screen CURSor limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors even if they are off screen LOGic specifies that measurements are taken only when the logical state of other waveforms is true SEARch specifies that measurements are taken only where the results of a user specified search are found Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 GATing CURSOR l...

Page 469: ...asurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x GATing GLOBal OFF ON 0 1 MEASUrement MEAS x GATing GLOBal Arguments OFF specifies gate settings can be changed independently for each individual measurement ON applies global gate settings to all the measurements gate settings 0 specifies gate settings can be changed independently for each individual measurement 1 applies gl...

Page 470: ...turn MEASUREMENT MEAS1 GATING HYSTERESIS 30 0000E 3 indicating the hysteresis is set to 30 0 mV MEASUrement MEAS x GATing LOGICSource This command sets or queries the gating data source when the gating type is logic The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x GATing LOGICSource CH x MATH x REF x Arguments Arguments are the sources for logic gating Examples ...

Page 471: ...to 0 0 MEASUrement MEAS x GATing SEARCHSource This command sets or queries the gating search source when the gating type is search The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x GATing SEARCHSource SEARCH1 Arguments SEARCH1 is the gating source for search gating Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 GATing SEARCHSource SEARCH1 sets the gating search source to SEARCH1 MEA...

Page 472: ...turn MEASUREMENT MEAS1 GLOBALREF 1 indicating the same ref levels apply to all measurements MEASUrement MEAS x HIGHREFVoltage This command sets or queries the high reference voltage value for the time outside level measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x HIGHREFVoltage NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x HIGHREFVoltage Arguments NR3 is the high reference voltage ...

Page 473: ...0 0 μs MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary DCD This command sets or queries whether DCD is included in the jitter summary for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary DCD 0 1 MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary DCD Arguments 1 add the DCD measurement as part of jitter summary 0 do not add the DCD measurement as part of jitter summary Examp...

Page 474: ...UREMENT MEAS4 JITTERSUMMARY DDJ 1 indicating the DDJ measurement is part of the jitter summary MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary DJDD This command sets or queries whether DJ dd is included in the jitter summary for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary DJDD 0 1 MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary DJDD Arguments 1 add the DJDD measurem...

Page 475: ...JITTERSummary EYEWIDTHBER might return MEASUREMENT MEAS4 JITTERSUMMARY EYEWIDTHBER 1 indicating EyeWidth BER is part of the jitter summary MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary NPJ This command sets or queries whether NPJ is included in the jitter summary for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary NPJ 0 1 MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummar...

Page 476: ...MEAS4 JITTERSUMMARY PJ 1 indicating the PJ measurement is part of jitter summary MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary RJDD This command sets or queries whether RJ dd is included in the jitter summary for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary RJDD 0 1 MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary RJDD Arguments 1 add the RJ dd measurement as part o...

Page 477: ...MEAS4 JITTERSUMMARY TIE 1 indicating the TIE measurement is part of jitter summary MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary TJBER This command sets or queries whether TJ BER is included in the jitter summary for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary TJBER 0 1 MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary TJBER Arguments 1 add the TJ BER measurement as...

Page 478: ...k MEASUrement MEAS x LOWREFVoltage This command sets or queries the low reference voltage value for the time outside level measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x LOWREFVoltage NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x LOWREFVoltage Arguments NR3 is the low reference voltage value for the selected configuration Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 LOWREFVoltage 1 30 sets the low...

Page 479: ...urement range settings to all the measurements range settings MEASUrement MEAS1 MEASRange GLOBal might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MEASRANGE GLOBAL 0 indicating that range settings can be set independently for each individual measurement MEASUrement MEAS x MEASRange MAX This command sets or queries the range maximum value for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax ME...

Page 480: ...ndicating the minimum range is 0 0 V MEASUrement MEAS x MEASRange STATE This command sets or queries the range state for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x MEASRange STATE OFF ON 0 1 MEASUrement MEAS x MEASRange STATE Arguments OFF turns off the measurement range limits ON turns on the measurement range limits 0 turns off the measurement ran...

Page 481: ...detecting the pattern MEASUrement MEAS1 PATTERNDETECTION might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 PATTERNDETECTION AUTO indicating patterns are automatically detected MEASUrement MEAS x PATTERNLENgth This command sets or queries the pattern length for the measurement Measurements are specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x PATTERNLENgth NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x PATTERNLENgth Arguments NR3 i...

Page 482: ...S x PERFREQ EDGE This command sets or queries the edge type of a Period Frequency measurement The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x PERFREQ EDGE FIRST RISE FALL Arguments FIRST computes the measurement between Rising edges if the first edge is Rising Computes the measurement between Falling edges if the first edge is Falling RISE computes the measurem...

Page 483: ...tion GLOBal This command sets or queries the population settings global flag The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x POPUlation GLOBal OFF ON 0 1 MEASUrement MEAS x POPUlation GLOBal Arguments OFF specifies that population settings can be changed independently for each individual measurement ON applies the global population settings to all the measureme...

Page 484: ...ents OFF turns off the population limit ON turns on the population limit 0 turns off the population limit 1 turns on the population limit Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 POPUlation LIMIT STATE 0 turns off the population limit MEASUrement MEAS1 POPUlation LIMIT STATE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 POPULATION LIMIT STATE 1 indicating the population limit is on MEASUrement MEAS x POPUlation LIMIT VALue Th...

Page 485: ...MEAS x REFLevels ABSolute FALLHigh NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels ABSolute FALLHigh Arguments NR3 is the high reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE FALLHIGH 1 71 sets the high reference level to 1 71 V MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE FALLHIGH might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE FALLHIGH 1 7100E 00 indicating that the absolu...

Page 486: ... Measurements are specified by x NOTE This command affects the results of period frequency delay and all cyclic measurements Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x ABSolute FALLMid NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x ABSolute FALLMid Arguments NR3 is the mid reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFLEVELS1 ABSOLUTE FALLMID 0 5 sets the mid referen...

Page 487: ...is set to absolute The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x ABSolute RISEHigh NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x ABSolute RISEHigh Arguments NR3 is the high reference level and is the zero percent level when the measurement s Ref level method is set to Absolute Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 REFLevels1 ABSolute RISEHigh 1 50 sets the high referen...

Page 488: ...f the rising edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to absolute The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x ABSolute RISEMid NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x ABSolute RISEMid Arguments NR3 is the mid reference level where 50 is equal to MID used to calculate the mid reference level when the measurement s Ref level method is set to...

Page 489: ...e the TOP and BASE used to calculate reference levels for the measurement The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x BASETop AUTO MINMax MEANhistogram MODEhistogram EYEhistogram MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x BASETop Arguments AUTO automatically chooses a reference level method MINMax specifies that reference levels are relative to the measurem...

Page 490: ...ls are set explicitly using the MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevel ABSolute commands This method is useful when precise values are required Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFLEVELS1 METHOD ABSOLUTE specifies that explicit user defined values are used for the reference levels MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFLEVELS1 METHOD might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFLEVELS1 METHOD PERCENT indicating that the reference level units ...

Page 491: ... number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x PERCent FALLLow NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x PERCent FALLLow Arguments NR3 is the percentage where 100 is equal to HIGH used to calculate the mid reference level Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 REFLevels1 PERCent FALLLow 5 0 sets the low reference level of the falling edge is 5 MEASUrement MEAS1 REFLevels1 PERCent F...

Page 492: ...teresis of the reference level when the measurement s ref level method is set to percent The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x PERCent HYSTeresis NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x PERCent HYSTeresis Arguments NR3 is the hysteresis value used for the autoset Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 REFLevels1 PERCent HYSTeresis 5 0 sets the hysteresis l...

Page 493: ...l to BASE used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to percent The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x PERCent RISELow NR3 MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x PERCent RISELow Arguments NR3 is the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP used to calculate the mid reference level when th...

Page 494: ...S1 REFLEVELS1 PERCENT RISEMID 50 0000 indicating the mid reference level of the rising edge is set to 50 0 MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x PERCent TYPE This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the measurement The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x REFLevels x PERCent TYPE TENNinety TWENtyeighty CUSTom MEASUrement MEAS x REF...

Page 495: ...et the reference level for the measurement Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 REFMode Manual allows the user to set the reference level for the measurement MEASUrement MEAS1 REFMode might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFMODE AUTO indicating the reference levels for the measurement are set automatically MEASUrement MEAS x REFVoltage This command sets or queries the reference voltage value for the measurement T...

Page 496: ...ement acquisitions of the specified measurement Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 RESUlts ALLAcqs MAXimum might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 RESULTS ALLACQS MAXIMUM 2 420 indicating the maximum measurement value is 2 420 V MEASUrement MEAS x RESUlts ALLAcqs MEAN Query Only This query only command returns the mean value for all accumulated measurement acquisitions for measurement x Group Measurement Syntax ME...

Page 497: ...lue is 2 220 V MEASUrement MEAS x RESUlts ALLAcqs PK2PK Query Only This query only command returns the peak to peak value for all accumulated measurement acquisitions for measurement x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x RESUlts ALLAcqs PK2PK Returns The peak to peak value for all accumulated measurement acquisitions for measurement x Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 RESUlts ALLAcqs PK2PK might ...

Page 498: ...nt MEAS x RESUlts ALLAcqs STDDev Returns The standard deviation for all accumulated measurement acquisitions for measurement x Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 RESUlts ALLAcqs STDDev might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 RESULTS ALLACQS STDDEV 23 5741246494459E 3 indicating the measurement standard deviation is 23 57 mV MEASUrement MEAS x RESUlts CURRentacq MAXimum Query Only This query only command returns th...

Page 499: ...MEAS1 RESUlts CURRentacq MEAN might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 RESULTS CURRENTACQ MEAN 2 30 indicating the mean of the measurement in the current acquisition is 2 3 V MEASUrement MEAS x RESUlts CURRentacq MINimum Query Only This query only command returns the minimum value found for the specified measurement since the last statistical reset The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement ...

Page 500: ...URRentacq POPUlation Query Only This query only command returns the population for the specified measurement for the current acquisition The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x RESUlts CURRentacq POPUlation Returns The population measurement value for the specified measurement Examples MEASUrement MEAS x RESUlts CURRentacq POPUlation might return MEASUR...

Page 501: ...asurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x SIGNALType CLOCK DATA AUTO MEASUrement MEAS x SIGNALType Arguments CLOCK specifies a clock signal type DATA specifies a data signal type AUTO automatically selects the signal type Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 SIGNALType CLOCK specifies a clock signal type MEASUrement MEAS1 SIGNALType might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SIGNALT...

Page 502: ...Hz MEASUrement MEAS1 SSC NOMinalfreq might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SSC NOMINALFREQ 2 5000E 9 indicating the frequency is 2 5 GH MEASUrement MEAS x SSC NOMinalfreq SELECTIONtype This command sets or queries the frequency detection type for the measurement when the measurement type is SSC The measurement number is specified by x Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x SSC NOMinalfreq SELECTIONt...

Page 503: ...aveform BOTH specifies both a rising and falling edge of the waveform SAMEas specifies that both edges of the waveform are the same OPPositeas specifies that the edges of the waveform are not the same Examples MEASUrement MEAS1 TOEdge FALL specifies the to edge is the falling edge of the waveform MEASUrement MEAS1 TOEdge might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TOEDGE SAMEAS indicating that both edges of th...

Page 504: ...If it is set to 0 the measurement is computed on all rising if measurement type is rise time or falling if measurement type is fall time edges OFF computes the measurement on all rising if measurement type is rise time or falling if measurement type is fall time edges ON computes the measurement on rising if measurement type is rise time or falling edges if measurement type is fall time following ...

Page 505: ...h cycle in the record Amplitude High Low AREA is the area under the curve calculated by integrating the data points The area measured above ground is positive The area measured below ground is negative This measurement can be made across the entire record or on each cycle in the record BASE is the most common data value below the midpoint of the waveform This measurement can be made across the ent...

Page 506: ...tire record DJDIRAC dual dirac deterministic jitter is deterministic jitter based on a simplifying assumption that the histogram of all deterministic jitter can be modeled as a pair of equal magnitude Dirac functions This measurement is made across the entire record EYEHIGH Eye High is the amplitude of a high 1 bit measured at a user specified location within the recovered unit interval This measu...

Page 507: ...d JITTERSUMMARY Jitter Summary is a group consisting of the following measurements TIE TJ BER Eye Width BER Eye Height BER RJ δδ DJ δδ PJ DDJ DcD F 2 F 4 F 8 J2 is the total jitter at a bit error rate of 2 5e 3 TJ 2 5e 3 This measurement is made across the entire record J9 is the total jitter at a bit error rate of 2 5e 10 TJ 2 5e 10 This measurement is made across the entire record LOW Eye Low is...

Page 508: ...This measurement is made on each cycle in the record PHASE is the ratio of the Skew between two sources to the Period of the first source This measurement is made on each cycle in the record PHASENOISE Phase Noise is the RMS magnitude of all integrated jitter falling within a user specified offset range of the fundamental clock frequency This measurement is made across the entire record PJ periodi...

Page 509: ...n the record SSCMODRATE SSC Modulation Rate is the modulating frequency of a spread spectrum clock This measurement is made on each cycle in the record SETUP Setup Time is the time between the specified Mid reference level RM crossing on the Data source to the closest specified Mid reference level RM crossing on the Clock source This measurement is made on each specified Clock edge in the record S...

Page 510: ...d WIDTHBER Eye Width BER is the predicted horizontal eye opening that will be violated with a probability equal to the bit error rate This measurement is made across the entire record Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE FREQUENCY defines measurement 2 as a measurement of the frequency of a waveform MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE RMS indicating that measurement 1 is defined ...

Page 511: ...he minimum number of unit intervals required for BUJ analysis is 1 000 000 MEASUrement POPUlation LIMIT STATE This command sets or queries the global population limit state for the measurement Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement POPUlation LIMIT STATE OFF ON 0 1 MEASUrement POPUlation LIMIT STATE Arguments OFF turns off the population limit ON turns on the population limit 0 turns off the populat...

Page 512: ...ASUrement REFLevels ABSolute FALLHigh This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the falling edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to absolute Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute FALLHigh NR3 MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute FALLHigh Arguments NR3 is the value used as the high reference level of the falling edge when the measurement s...

Page 513: ...eturn MEASUREMENT REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE FALLLOW 1 0000 indicating the low reference level is 1 0 V MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute FALLMid This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the falling edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to absolute Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute FALLMid NR3 MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute FALLMid Argument...

Page 514: ...n MEASUREMENT REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE HYSTERESIS 30 0000E 3 indicating the hysteresis is set to 30 0 mV MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute RISEHigh This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the rising edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to absolute Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute RISEHigh NR3 MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute RISEHigh Ar...

Page 515: ...ISELOW 1 0000 indicating the low reference level is 1 0 V MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute RISEMid This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the rising edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to absolute Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute RISEMid NR3 MEASUrement REFLevels ABSolute RISEMid Arguments NR3 is the mid reference level of the...

Page 516: ...te the TOP and BASE used to calculate reference levels for the measurement Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevels BASETop AUTO MINMax MEANhistogram MODEhistogram EYEhistogram MEASUrement REFLevels BASETop Arguments Arguments are the base top methods Examples MEASUREMENT REFLEVELS BASETOP MINMAX selects the MINMAX base top method MEASUREMENT REFLEVELS BASETOP might return MEASUREMENT REFLEV...

Page 517: ... sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for the measurement Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevels METHod PERCent ABSolute MEASUrement REFLevels METHod Arguments PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW The percentages are defined using the MEASUrement REFLevels REFLevel PERCent commands ABSolute specifies that ...

Page 518: ... calculated only on the first acquisition after a statistics reset MEASUrement REFLevels PERCent FALLHigh This command sets or queries the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP and 0 is equal to BASE used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to percent Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevels PERCent FALLHigh NR3 MEASUrement ...

Page 519: ...ight return MEASUREMENT REFLEVELS PERCENT FALLLOW 20 0000 indicating the low reference level is 20 MEASUrement REFLevels PERCent FALLMid This command sets or queries the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP and 0 is equal to BASE used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to percent Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevels PER...

Page 520: ...return MEASUREMENT REFLEVELS PERCENT HYSTERESIS 5 0000 indicating the hysteresis is set to 5 MEASUrement REFLevels PERCent RISEHigh This command sets or queries the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP and 0 is equal to BASE used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to percent Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevels PERCent ...

Page 521: ...ight return MEASUREMENT REFLEVELS PERCENT RISELOW 20 0000 indicating the low reference level is 20 MEASUrement REFLevels PERCent RISEMid This command sets or queries the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP and 0 is equal to BASE used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to percent Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevels PERC...

Page 522: ...ERCent TYPE TENNINETY sets the values for Low Mid and High Ref to 10 50 and 90 respectively MEASUrement REFLevels PERCent TYPE might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVELS PERCENT TYPE CUSTOM indicating that custom reference levels can be set MEASUrement REFLevels TYPE This command sets or queries the shared reference level method used for sources of measurement calculations Group Measurement Syntax MEASUre...

Page 523: ...xamples MEASUrement REF1 REFLevels ABSolute FALLHigh 1 5 sets the reference level to 1 5 V MEASUrement REF1 REFLevels ABSolute FALLHigh might return MEASUREMENT REF1 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE FALLHIGH 1 0000 indicating the reference level is 1 0 V MEASUrement REF x REFLevels ABSolute FALLLow This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the falling edge when the measurement s ...

Page 524: ...absolute Examples MEASUrement REF1 REFLevels ABSolute FALLMid 50 0E 3 sets the mid reference level to 50 0 mV MEASUrement REF1 REFLevels ABSolute FALLMid might return MEASUREMENT REF1 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE FALLMID 0 0E 0 indicating the reference level is 0 0 V MEASUrement REF x REFLevels ABSolute HYSTeresis This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level when the measu...

Page 525: ...to absolute Examples MEASUrement REF1 REFLevels ABSolute RISEHigh 1 5 sets the reference level to 1 5 V MEASUrement REF1 REFLevels ABSolute RISEHigh might return MEASUREMENT REF1 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE RISEHIGH 1 0000 indicating the reference level is 1 0 V MEASUrement REF x REFLevels ABSolute RISELow This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the rising edge when the me...

Page 526: ...el method is set to absolute Examples MEASUrement REF1 REFLevels ABSolute RISEMid 10 0E 3 sets the reference level to 10 0 mV MEASUrement REF1 REFLevels ABSolute RISEMid might return MEASUREMENT REF1 REFLEVELS ABSOLUTE RISEMID 0 0E 0 indicating the mid reference level is 0 0 V MEASUrement REF x REFLevels ABSolute TYPE This command sets or queries the reference level type for the measurement Group ...

Page 527: ...s are relative to the histogram mean BASE and TOP MODEhistogram specifies that reference levels are relative to the histogram mode BASE and TOP EYEhistogram specifies that reverence levels are relative to the eye histogram BASE and TOP Examples MEASUrement REF1 REFLevels BASETop MINMAX specifies that reference levels are relative to the measurement MIN and MAX MEASUrement REF1 REFLevels BASETop mi...

Page 528: ...s or queries the percentage where 100 is equal to TOP and 0 is equal to BASE used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to percent Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REF x REFLevels PERCent FALLHigh NR3 MEASUrement REF x REFLevels PERCent FALLHigh Arguments NR3 is the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the f...

Page 529: ...ference level of the falling edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to percent Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REF x REFLevels PERCent FALLMid NR3 MEASUrement REF x REFLevels PERCent FALLMid Arguments NR3 is the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge Examples MEASUrement REF1 REFLevels PERCent FALLMid 55 sets the reference level to 50 MEASUrement...

Page 530: ...h reference level of the rising edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to percent Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REF x REFLevels PERCent RISEHigh NR3 MEASUrement REF x REFLevels PERCent RISEHigh Arguments NR3 is the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge Examples MEASUrement REF1 REFLevels PERCent RISEHigh 95 sets the reference level to 95 MEASU...

Page 531: ...ual to TOP and 0 is equal to BASE used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge when the measurement s ref level method is set to percent Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REF x REFLevels PERCent RISEMid NR3 MEASUrement REF x REFLevels PERCent RISEMid Arguments NR3 is the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge Examples MEASUrement REF1 REFLevels P...

Page 532: ...stics CYCLEMode This command turns on and off cycle to cycle measurement statistics tracking and affects computation and display of cycle cycle statistics in the Measurement Result table It affects measurement statistics after being enabled and after new data is acquired and measured Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement STATIstics CYCLEMode OFF ON 0 1 MEASUrement STATIstics CYCLEMode Arguments OFF...

Page 533: ...te an OPC message are complete The OPC query places the ASCII character 1 into the output queue when all such OPC commands are complete The OPC response is not available to read until all pending operations finish For a complete discussion of the use of these registers and the output queue see Registers and Queues The OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your ...

Page 534: ...on of each entry the text following the last hyphen indicates the license type If no options are found NONE is returned Group Status and Error Syntax OPT Examples OPT response with each option listed on a separate line for clarity 5 BW 1000 1 GHz 5 DJA Advanced Jitter and Eye Analysis NODE PASSWord No Query Form This command no query form enables the PUD and NEWpass set commands Sending PASSWord w...

Page 535: ...ands PASSWORD disables the PUD and NEWPass set commands You can still use the query version of PUD PAUSe No Query Form This command causes the interface to pause the specified number of seconds before processing any other commands Group Miscellaneous Syntax PAUSe NR3 Arguments NR3 is the specified number of seconds the interface is to pause before processing any other commands The pause time is sp...

Page 536: ...up Plot Syntax PLOT DELete QString Arguments QString is the specified plot Argument is of the form PLOT NR1 where NR1 is 1 Examples PLOT DELETE PLOT1 deletes PLOT1 PLOT LIST Query Only This command lists all currently defined plots Group Plot Syntax PLOT LIST Returns A list of all currently defined plots is returned Examples PLOT LIST might return PLOT LIST PLOT1 PLOT3 PLOT4 PLOT5 PLOT6 PLOT7 list...

Page 537: ...SUnits This command sets or queries the X Axis unit either unit intervals or seconds Group Plot Syntax PLOT PLOT x BATHtub XAXISUnits UNITIntervals SECOnds PLOT PLOT x BATHtub XAXISUnits Arguments UNITIntervals specifies units as unit intervals SECOnds specifies units as seconds Examples PLOT PLOT1 BATHtub XAXISUnits SECONDS sets the units to seconds PLOT PLOT1 BATHtub XAXISUnits might return SECO...

Page 538: ...fied trend label This command query only applies to Time Trend plots Group Plot Syntax PLOT PLOT x LABel FONT BOLD NR1 OFF ON Arguments NR1 0 disables bold font any other value turns this feature on OFF disables bold font ON enables bold font Examples PLOT PLOT1 LABEL FONT BOLD 1 sets the label to a bold font PLOT PLOT1 LABEL FONT BOLD might return PLOT PLOT1 LABEL FONT BOLD 1 indicating the label...

Page 539: ...OT x LABel FONT SIZE NR1 Arguments NR1 is the font size Examples PLOT PLOT1 LABel FONT SIZE 12 sets the font size to 12 points PLOT PLOT1 LABel FONT SIZE might return PLOT PLOT1 LABEL FONT SIZE 72 indicating the font size is 72 points PLOT PLOT x LABel FONT TYPE This command sets or queries the font type of the specified trend label such as Arial or Times New Roman This command query only applies ...

Page 540: ...ine NR1 OFF ON Arguments NR1 0 disables underline font any other value turns this feature on OFF disables underline font ON enables underline font Examples PLOT PLOT1 LABel FONT UNDERline 1 set the font to underlined PLOT PLOT1 LABel FONT UNDERline PLOT PLOT1 LABEL FONT UNDERLINE 0 indicating the font is underlined PLOT PLOT x LABel NAMe This command sets or queries the specified trend s label Thi...

Page 541: ... the X position to 200 PLOT PLOT1 LABel XPOS might return PLOT PLOT1 LABEL XPOS 45 0000 indicating the X position is 45 0 pixels to the right of the left edge of the display PLOT PLOT x LABel YPOS This command sets or queries the y position of the specified trend label This command query only applies to Time Trend plots Group Plot Syntax PLOT PLOT x LABel YPOS NR3 Arguments NR3 is the x position i...

Page 542: ...the histogram resolution is 250 bins PLOT PLOT x SOUrce x This command sets or queries the plot source Group Plot Syntax PLOT PLOT x SOUrce x MEAS x PLOT PLOT x SOUrce x Arguments MEAS x is the specified measurement source for the specified plot Examples PLOT PLOT1 SOUrce1 MEAS2 sets source 1 of plot 1 to measurement 2 PLOT PLOT1 SOUrce1 might return PLOT PLOT1 SOURCE1 MEAS1 indicating the specifi...

Page 543: ...ge NR3 PLOT PLOT x SPECtrum DYNRange Arguments NR3 is the dynamic range value Examples PLOT PLOT3 SPECtrum DYNRange 150 sets the dynamic range to 150 dB PLOT PLOT3 SPECtrum DYNRange might return PLOT PLOT3 SPECTRUM DYNRANGE 100 indicating the dynamic range is 100 dB PLOT PLOT x TYPe This command returns the current plot type for the selected plot Group Plot Syntax PLOT PLOT x TYPe NONE BATHTUB EYE...

Page 544: ...LOT2 TYPe BATHTUB creates a bathtub plot PLOT PLOT2 TYPe might return PLOT PLOT2 TYPE EYEDIAGRAM indicating the plot is an eye diagram POWer ADDNew No Query Form This command adds the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer ADDNew POWER x Examples POWER ADDNEW POWER1 adds POWER1 meas...

Page 545: ...x AUTOSet EXECute Examples POWer POWer1 AUTOSet EXECute executes the power autoset for the power measurement badge Power 1 POWer POWer x CYCLEAmp INPUTSOurce This command sets or queries the input source for cycle amplitude measurement in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer P...

Page 546: ...OWer POWer x CYCLEBase INPUTSOurce CH x MATH x REF x POWer POWer x CYCLEBase INPUTSOurce Arguments CH x A channel specifier x is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number of FlexChannels in your instrument MATH x A math waveform specifier x is 1 REF x A reference waveform specifier x is 1 Examples POWer POWer1 CYCLEBase INPUTSOurce CH2 sets the input source for cycle base measurement as CH2 for the...

Page 547: ...measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x CYCLEMin INPUTSOurce CH x MATH x REF x POWer POWer x CYCLEMin INPUTSOurce Arguments CH x A channel specifier x is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number of FlexChannels in your instrument MATH x A math waveform specifier x is 1 REF x A reference wave...

Page 548: ...Power 1 POWer POWer x CYCLETop INPUTSOurce This command sets or queries the input source for cycle top measurement in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x CYCLETop INPUTSOurce CH x MATH x REF x POWer POWer x CYCLETop INPUTSOurce Arguments CH x A channel specifier x is ...

Page 549: ...your instrument MATH x A math waveform specifier x is 1 REF x A reference waveform specifier x is 1 Examples POWer POWer1 DIDT INPUTSOurce CH6 sets the input source for di dt measurement as channel 2 POWer POWer x DIDT SOURCEEDGEType This command sets or queries the edge type for di dt measurement in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Req...

Page 550: ...your instrument MATH x A math waveform specifier x is 1 REF x A reference waveform specifier x is 1 Examples POWer POWer1 DVDT INPUTSOurce CH1 sets the input source for dv dt measurement as channel 1 POWer POWer x DVDT SOURCEEDGEType This command sets or queries the edge type for dv dt measurement in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Req...

Page 551: ...NCY INPUTSOurce This command sets or queries the input source for frequency measurement in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x FREQUENCY INPUTSOurce CH x MATH x REF x POWer POWer x FREQUENCY INPUTSOurce Arguments CH x A channel specifier x is 1 through 8 and is limite...

Page 552: ...in between the cursors SCREEN takes measurements on that portion of the waveform shown in the display When Zoom is on the display is the zoom window LOGIC takes measurements only when the logical state of a specified waveform is true Examples POWer POWer1 GATing CURSOR sets the gating type for the power measurement badge 1 as Cursor POWer POWer2 GATing might return SCREEN indicating the configured...

Page 553: ...5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x HARMONICS CLASs CLASSA CLASSB CLASSC CLASSD POWer POWer x HARMONICS CLASs Related Commands POWer POWer x HARMONICS STANDard Examples POWer POWer1 HARMONICS CLASs CLASSB sets the class type for harmonics measurement as CLASSB POWer POWer x HARMONICS CMEThod This command sets or queries the fundamental current method for the harmonics measurement in th...

Page 554: ... measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x HARMONICS FUNDCURRent NR1 POWer POWer x HARMONICS FUNDCURRent Related Commands POWer POWer x HARMONICS CLASs Arguments NR1 ranges from 0 to 16 Examples POWer POWer x HARMONICS FUNDCURRent 1 5 sets the fundamental current for the harmonics measurement ...

Page 555: ...option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x HARMONICS HSOURce CURRent VOLTage POWer POWer x HARMONICS HSOURce Related Commands POWer POWer x HARMONICS STANDard Examples POWer POWer1 HARMONICS HSOURce CURRent sets the source as current for the harmonics measurement POWer POWer x HARMONICS IPOWer This command sets or queries the input power value for the harmonics measurement in ...

Page 556: ... POWer POWer x HARMONICS ISOURce CH x MATH x REF x POWer POWer x HARMONICS ISOURce Arguments CH x A channel specifier x is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number of FlexChannels in your instrument MATH x A math waveform specifier x is 1 REF x A reference waveform specifier x is 1 Examples POWer POWer1 HARMONICS ISOURce CH2 sets the current source for harmonics measurement as channel 2 POWer POWe...

Page 557: ... in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x HARMONICS PFACtor NR1 POWer POWer x HARMONICS PFACtor Related Commands POWer POWer x HARMONICS CLASs Arguments NR1 ranges from 0 to 1 Examples POWer POWer x HARMONICS PFACtor 0 7 sets the power factor for the harmonics measureme...

Page 558: ...power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x HARMONICS RCURRent NR1 POWer POWer x HARMONICS RCURRent Related Commands POWer POWer x HARMONICS CMEThod Arguments NR1 ranges from 0 to 100 Examples POWer POWer1 HARMONICS RCURRent 1 5 sets the rated current for the harmonics measurement as 1 5 POWer POWer x HARMONICS STAND...

Page 559: ...ts units in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x HARMONICS UNITs LOG LINear POWer POWer x HARMONICS UNITs Examples POWer POWer1 HARMONICS UNITs LOG sets the harmonics results units as logarithmic POWer POWer x HARMONICS VSOURce This command sets or queries the voltage ...

Page 560: ...fied power measurement As the label can contain non 7 bit ASCII text it is stored in Percent Encoding format The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x LABel QString POWer POWer x LABel Examples POWer POWer1 LABel NewMeasurement sets the custom measurement name for the measurement in Power 1 badge as New Measure...

Page 561: ...or queries the frequency present for line ripple measurement in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x LINERIPPLE LFREQuency FIFty SIXty FOURHundred POWer POWer x LINERIPPLE LFREQuency Examples POWer POWer1 LINERIPPLE LFREQuency FIFTY sets the frequency present for line ...

Page 562: ...TYCYCLE INPUTSOurce CH x MATH x REF x POWer POWer x NDUTYCYCLE INPUTSOurce Arguments CH x A channel specifier x is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number of FlexChannels in your instrument MATH x A math waveform specifier x is 1 REF x A reference waveform specifier x is 1 Examples POWer POWer1 NDUTYCYCLE INPUTSOurce CH3 sets the input source for negative duty cycle measurement as CH3 for the pow...

Page 563: ...k edge type for positive duty cycle measurement in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x PDUTYCYCLE EDGEType RISE FALL BOTH POWer POWer x PDUTYCYCLE EDGEType Examples POWer POWer1 PDUTYCYCLE EDGEType BOTH sets the clock edge type as both rise and fall for the positive d...

Page 564: ... EDGe This command sets or queries the edge type for period measurement in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x PERIOD EDGe RISE FALL POWer POWer x PERIOD EDGe Examples POWer POWer1 PERIOD EDGe RISE sets the edge type as rise for the period measurement POWer POWer x PE...

Page 565: ...quality measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x POWERQUALITY CCYCles ON OFF 1 0 POWer POWer x POWERQUALITY CCYCles Arguments 1 ON selects the calculate cycles over full cycles 0 OFF unselects the calculate cycles over full cycles Examples POWer POWer1 POWERQUALITY CCYCles 1 selects the calcu...

Page 566: ...2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x POWERQUALITY ISOURce CH x MATH x REF x POWer POWer x POWERQUALITY ISOURce Arguments CH x A channel specifier x is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number of FlexChannels in your instrument MATH x A math waveform specifier x is 1 REF x A reference waveform specifier x is 1 Examples POWer POWer1 POWERQUALITY VSOURce CH2 sets the current source for power quality me...

Page 567: ... badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x PPULSEWIDTH INPUTSOurce CH x MATH x REF x POWer POWer x PPULSEWIDTH INPUTSOurce Arguments CH x A channel specifier x is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number of FlexChannels in your instrument MATH x A math waveform specifier x is 1 REF x A reference waveform ...

Page 568: ...Wer x REFLevels ABSolute FALLLow This command sets or queries the falling edge for low reference level in absolute units for the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute FALLLow NR1 POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute FALLLow Related Commands POWer POWer x REFL...

Page 569: ... POWer x REFLevels ABSolute TYPE Arguments NR1 ranges from 40000 to 40000 Examples POWer POWer1 REFLevels ABSolute FALLMid 0 sets the mid reference level for falling edge as 0 volt POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute HYSTeresis This command sets or queries the absolute hysteresis value for the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5...

Page 570: ...OWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute RISEHigh Related Commands POWer POWer x REFLevels METHod POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute TYPE Arguments NR1 ranges from 40000 to 40000 Examples POWer POWer1 REFLevels ABSolute RISEHigh 1 sets the high reference level for rising edge as 1 volt POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute RISELow This command sets or queries the rising edge for low reference level in absolute un...

Page 571: ...res option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute RISEMid NR1 POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute RISEMid Related Commands POWer POWer x REFLevels METHod POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute TYPE Arguments NR1 ranges from 40000 to 40000 Examples POWer POWer1 REFLevels ABSolute RISEMid 0 sets the mid reference level for rising edge as 0 volt POWer POWer x REFLevels ABS...

Page 572: ...el base top method for the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x REFLevels BASETop AUTO MINMax MEANhistogram MODEhistogram EYEhistogram POWer POWer x REFLevels BASETop Related Commands POWer POWer x REFLevels METHod Examples POWer POWer1 REFLevels BASETop AUTO sets the refe...

Page 573: ... Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent FALLHigh NR1 POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent FALLHigh Related Commands POWer POWer x REFLevels METHod POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent TYPE Arguments NR1 ranges from 1 to 99 Examples POWer POWer1 REFLevels PERCent FALLHigh 1 sets the high reference level for falling edge as 1 percentage POWer POWer x REFLeve...

Page 574: ...badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent FALLMid NR1 POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent FALLMid Related Commands POWer POWer x REFLevels METHod POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent TYPE Arguments NR1 ranges from 1 to 99 Examples POWer POWer1 REFLevels PERCent FALLMid 50 sets the mid reference l...

Page 575: ...The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent RISEHigh NR1 POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent RISEHigh Related Commands POWer POWer x REFLevels METHod POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent TYPE Arguments NR1 ranges from 1 to 99 Examples POWer POWer1 REFLevels PERCent RISEHigh 85 sets the high reference lev...

Page 576: ...OWer x REFLevels PERCent RISEMid This command sets or queries the rising edge for mid reference level in percentage for the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent RISEMid NR1 POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent RISEMid Related Commands POWer POWer x REFLevels M...

Page 577: ...EFLevels PERCent RISELow POWer POWer x REFLevels PERCent RISEMid Arguments TENNinety to set the low reference levels as 10 and high reference levels as 90 TWENtyeighty to set the low reference levels as 20 and high reference levels as 80 CUSTom to set the custom low high and mid reference levels for rising and falling edges Examples POWer POWer1 REFLevels PERCent TYPE TENNinety sets the low refere...

Page 578: ...asurement the parameters are SWRIPRMS SWRIPPKPK For Cycle Period measurement the parameters is PRIOD For Cycle Frequency measurement the parameters is FREQ For Positive Duty Cycle measurement the parameters is PDUTY For Negative Duty Cycle measurement the parameters is NDUTY For Positive Pulse Width measurement the parameters is PPULSE For Negative Pulse Width measurement the parameters is NPULSE ...

Page 579: ...FFENRG TOFFLOSS CONDENRG CONDLOSS TTLLOSS TTLENRG For dV by dt measurement the parameter is DVBYDT For dI by dt measurement the parameter is DIBYDT For SOA measurement the parameter is SOAHITSCNT For Line Ripple measurement the parameters are LRIPRMS LRIPPKPK For Switching Ripple measurement the parameters are SWRIPRMS SWRIPPKPK For Cycle Period measurement the parameters is PRIOD For Cycle Freque...

Page 580: ...Wer x RESUlts ALLAcqs MINimum QString Arguments QString parameters of the measurements The details of the parameters for the Power measurements are listed below For Power Quality measurement the parameters are TRUEPWR APPPWR REPWR PWRFACTOR PHASE PWRFREQ ICFACTOR VCFACTOR IRMS VRMS For Switching Loss measurement the parameters are TONENRG TONLOSS TOFFENRG TOFFLOSS CONDENRG CONDLOSS TTLLOSS TTLENRG...

Page 581: ...9093E 9 indicating the minimum value of true power for all acquisitions POWer POWer x RESUlts ALLAcqs PK2PK Query Only This command queries the peak to peak value of all acquisitions for the measurement parameter in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x RESUlts ALLAcqs ...

Page 582: ... measurement the parameters is AMPL For Cycle Peak Peak measurement the parameters is PKPK For Cycle Top measurement the parameters is HIGH For Cycle Base measurement the parameters is LOW For Cycle Max measurement the parameters is MAX For Cycle Min measurement the parameters is MIN Examples POWer POWer1 RESUlts CURRentacq PK2PK TONLoss might return 9 91E 37 indicating the peak to peak value of T...

Page 583: ...KPK For Cycle Period measurement the parameters is PRIOD For Cycle Frequency measurement the parameters is FREQ For Positive Duty Cycle measurement the parameters is PDUTY For Negative Duty Cycle measurement the parameters is NDUTY For Positive Pulse Width measurement the parameters is PPULSE For Negative Pulse Width measurement the parameters is NPULSE For Cycle Amplitude measurement the paramete...

Page 584: ...ONLOSS TOFFENRG TOFFLOSS CONDENRG CONDLOSS TTLLOSS TTLENRG For dV by dt measurement the parameter is DVBYDT For dI by dt measurement the parameter is DIBYDT For SOA measurement the parameter is SOAHITSCNT For Line Ripple measurement the parameters are LRIPRMS LRIPPKPK For Switching Ripple measurement the parameters are SWRIPRMS SWRIPPKPK For Cycle Period measurement the parameters is PRIOD For Cyc...

Page 585: ... PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq F1MAG harmonics Examples POWer POWer1 RESUlts CURRentacq F1MAG harmonics might return 1 4151834770090 indicating the value of the first harmonics magnitude for the power measurement badge 1 POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq F3MAG Query Only This command queries the third harmonics magnitude value for the specified power measurement badge The ...

Page 586: ...cq IRMS Query Only This command queries the RMS current value for the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq IRMS harmonics Examples POWer POWer1 RESUlts CURRentacq IRMS harmonics might return 1 4149980733491 indicating the RMS current value for the power ...

Page 587: ...e measurement the parameters are SWRIPRMS SWRIPPKPK For Cycle Period measurement the parameters is PRIOD For Cycle Frequency measurement the parameters is FREQ For Positive Duty Cycle measurement the parameters is PDUTY For Negative Duty Cycle measurement the parameters is NDUTY For Positive Pulse Width measurement the parameters is PPULSE For Negative Pulse Width measurement the parameters is NPU...

Page 588: ...LOSS TOFFENRG TOFFLOSS CONDENRG CONDLOSS TTLLOSS TTLENRG For dV by dt measurement the parameter is DVBYDT For dI by dt measurement the parameter is DIBYDT For SOA measurement the parameter is SOAHITSCNT For Line Ripple measurement the parameters are LRIPRMS LRIPPKPK For Switching Ripple measurement the parameters are SWRIPRMS SWRIPPKPK For Cycle Period measurement the parameters is PRIOD For Cycle...

Page 589: ... POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq MINimum QString Arguments QString parameters of the measurements The details of the parameters for the Power measurements are listed below For Power Quality measurement the parameters are TRUEPWR APPPWR REPWR PWRFACTOR PHASE PWRFREQ ICFACTOR VCFACTOR IRMS VRMS For Switching Loss measurement the parameters are TONENRG TONLOSS TOFFENRG TOFFLOSS CONDENRG CONDLOSS TTL...

Page 590: ...dicating the minimum value of true power for the current acquisition POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq PK2PK Query Only This command queries the peak to peak value of the current acquisition for the measurement parameter in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x RESUlts C...

Page 591: ...E For Cycle Amplitude measurement the parameters is AMPL For Cycle Peak Peak measurement the parameters is PKPK For Cycle Top measurement the parameters is HIGH For Cycle Base measurement the parameters is LOW For Cycle Max measurement the parameters is MAX For Cycle Min measurement the parameters is MIN Examples POWer POWer1 RESUlts CURRentacq PK2PK TONLoss might return 9 91E 37 indicating the pe...

Page 592: ... POHCM harmonics Examples POWer POWer1 RESUlts CURRentacq POHCM harmonics might return 515 422617782020E 6 indicating the measured value of partial odd harmonic current for the power measurement badge 1 POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq POHCS Query Only This command queries the status of partial odd harmonic current for the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified ...

Page 593: ...ers are TONENRG TONLOSS TOFFENRG TOFFLOSS CONDENRG CONDLOSS TTLLOSS TTLENRG For dV by dt measurement the parameter is DVBYDT For dI by dt measurement the parameter is DIBYDT For SOA measurement the parameter is SOAHITSCNT For Line Ripple measurement the parameters are LRIPRMS LRIPPKPK For Switching Ripple measurement the parameters are SWRIPRMS SWRIPPKPK For Cycle Period measurement the parameters...

Page 594: ... 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq RMS harmonics Examples POWer POWer1 RESUlts CURRentacq RMS harmonics might return 1 4143420437461 indicating the RMS value of the source selected for the power measurement badge 1 POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq STATUS Query Only This command queries the status of the measurement for the specified power measurement badge...

Page 595: ...NENRG TONLOSS TOFFENRG TOFFLOSS CONDENRG CONDLOSS TTLLOSS TTLENRG For dV by dt measurement the parameter is DVBYDT For dI by dt measurement the parameter is DIBYDT For SOA measurement the parameter is SOAHITSCNT For Line Ripple measurement the parameters are LRIPRMS LRIPPKPK For Switching Ripple measurement the parameters are SWRIPRMS SWRIPPKPK For Cycle Period measurement the parameters is PRIOD ...

Page 596: ...he power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq THDF harmonics Examples POWer POWer1 RESUlts CURRentacq THDF harmonics might return 96 9846996670887E 3 indicating the value of total harmonic distortion fundamental for the power measurement badge 1 POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq THDR Query Only Thi...

Page 597: ...er x RESUlts CURRentacq TRPWR harmonics Examples POWer POWer1 RESUlts CURRentacq TRPWR harmonics might return 2 0002612633993 indicating the true power value for the power measurement badge 1 POWer POWer x RESUlts CURRentacq VRMS Query Only This command queries the RMS voltage value for the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5...

Page 598: ...lexChannels in your instrument MATH x A math waveform specifier x is 1 REF x A reference waveform specifier x is 1 Examples POWer POWer1 SOA ISOURce CH2 sets the current source for SOA measurement as channel 2 POWer POWer x SOA POINT This command sets or queries the Y co ordinate value for SOA mask Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x SOA POINT QStrin...

Page 599: ...9X 20X 21X 22X 23X 24X 25X 26X 27X 28X 29X 30X 31X 32X NR1 ranges from 40000 to 40000 Examples POWer POWer1 SOA POINT13X 4 sets the 13X co ordinate value for SOA mask as 4 POWer POWer x SOA RECAllmask This command recalls or queries the recall mask file name in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Gro...

Page 600: ...igured path or queries the mask file name path and file type for the SOA measurement in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x SOA SAVemask POWer POWer x SOA SAVemask Related Commands POWer POWer x SOA SAVemask FILEName Examples POWer POWer1 SOA SAVemask saves the mask f...

Page 601: ...OWer x SOA SAVemask FILEName POWer POWer x SOA SAVemask FILEName Examples POWer POWer1 SOA SAVemask FILEName Tek001 msk sets the mask file name for SOA measurement as Tek001 msk POWer POWer x SOA SAVemask FOLDer This command sets or queries the mask file folder path for SOA measurement in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option...

Page 602: ...reference waveform specifier x is 1 Examples POWer POWer1 SOA VSOURce CH1 sets the voltage source for SOA measurement as channel 1 POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS DEVICEType This command sets or queries the conduction calculation method for switching loss measurement in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS...

Page 603: ...A reference waveform specifier x is 1 Examples POWer POWer1 SWITCHINGLOSS GATESOurce MATH1 sets the gate voltage Vg for switching loss measurement of the specified power measurement source as MATH1 POWer POWer2 SWITCHINGLOSS VSOURce might return MATH3 indicating the gate voltage Vg for switching loss measurement of Power 2 power measurement badge POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS ILEVELAbs This command ...

Page 604: ... Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS ILEVELPct NR1 POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS ILEVELPct Related Commands POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS LEVELUNIts Arguments NR1 ranges from 0 0001 to 90 Examples POWer POWer1 SWITCHINGLOSS ILEVELPct 6 sets the current level Ton Start Stop value as 6 percentage for the switching loss measurement in the powe...

Page 605: ...hing loss measurement of Power 2 power measurement badge POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS LEVELUNIts This command sets or queries the level units for switching loss measurement in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS LEVELUNIts PERCent ABSolute POWer POWer x S...

Page 606: ... loss measurement of the power measurement badge Power 1 POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS SWLCONFIGType This command sets or queries the configuration type for the switching loss measurement in the specified power measurement badge The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS SWLCONFIGType SMPS PFC FLYBAC...

Page 607: ...x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS VCESat NR1 POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS VCESat Related Commands POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS DEVICEType Arguments NR1 ranges from 0 001 to 100 Examples POWer POWer1 SWITCHINGLOSS VCESat 6 sets VCE sat value as 6 for switching loss measurement of the power measurement badge Power 1 POWer POWer x SWITCH...

Page 608: ...r measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS VLEVELAbs NR1 POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS VLEVELAbs Arguments NR1 ranges from 100 to 100 Examples POWer POWer1 SWITCHINGLOSS VLEVELAbs 2 sets the voltage level Ton Start Stop value as 2 for the switching loss measurement in the power measurement badge 1 POWer POWe...

Page 609: ...e The power measurement badge is specified by x Conditions Requires option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS VSOURce CH x MATH x REF x POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS VSOURce Arguments CH x A channel specifier x is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number of FlexChannels in your instrument MATH x A math waveform specifier x is 1 REF x A reference waveform specifier...

Page 610: ...ls in your instrument MATH x A math waveform specifier x is 1 REF x A reference waveform specifier x is 1 Examples POWer POWer1 SWITCHINGRIPPLE INPUTSOurce CH5 sets the input source for switching ripple measurement as CH5 for the power measurement badge Power 1 POWer POWer x SWITCHINGRIPPLE LFREQuency This command sets or queries the switching frequency for switching ripple measurement in the spec...

Page 611: ... SWITCHINGLOss CYCLEAmp CYCLEMAx CYCLEMIn CYCLEPKpk SWITCHINGRIpple LINERIpple NDUTYCycle NPULSEWidth PDUTYCycle PPULSEWidth DIDT DVDT FREQuency HARMonics CYCLETop CYCLEBase PERIod POWERQUALity Examples POWer POWer1 TYPe POWERQUALITY adds Power1 measurement badge and selects the Power Quality measurement POWERTABle ADDNew No Query Form This command adds the power harmonics table The power measurem...

Page 612: ...option 5 PWR SUP5 PWR or 5 PS2 Group Power Syntax POWERTABle LIST Examples POWERTABle LIST might return TABLE1 indicating the defined power harmonics table PSC This command sets and queries the power on status flag that controls the automatic power on handling of the DESER SRER and ESER registers When PSC is true the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at powe...

Page 613: ... clear and prevents any SRQ assertion after power on Examples PSC 0 sets the power on status clear flag to false PSC might return 1 to indicate that the power on status clear flag is set to true PUD This command sets or queries a string of Protected User Data This data is protected by the PASSWord command You can modify it only by first entering the correct password This password is not necessary ...

Page 614: ...s a full path Relative path specification If the file argument begins with or or has a file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working directory Returns Recalls the instrument session from the specified session file Examples RECALL SESSION TEK00000 TSS recalls the setup from the file TEK0...

Page 615: ...recalls and makes current the instrument setup to its factory defaults RECALL SETUP TEK00000 SET recalls the setup from the file TEK00000 SET in the default directory for setups RECAll WAVEform No Query Form This command recalls a stored waveform to a reference memory location Group Save and Recall Syntax RECAll WAVEform source file destination Arguments source file is the source file The file is ...

Page 616: ...d reference Argument is of the form REF NR1 where NR1 1 Examples REF ADDNEW REF2 adds reference 2 to the display REF DELete No Query Form Deletes the specified reference Argument is of the form REF NR1 where NR1 1 Conditions Vertical Group Vertical Syntax REF DELete QString Arguments QString is the specified reference Argument is of the form REF NR1 where NR1 1 Examples REF DELETE REF2 deletes ref...

Page 617: ... Arguments NR3 is the deskew value used for the specified reference Examples REF REF1 DESKew 1 5e 9 sets the deskew value to 1 5 ns REF REF1 DESKew might return REF REF1 DESKEW 1 5200E 9 indicating the deskew value is 1 52 ns REF REF x LABel COLor This command sets or queries the color of the specified ref label Group Vertical Syntax REF REF x LABel COLor QString Arguments QString is the label To ...

Page 618: ...s bold font Examples REF REF1 LABel FONT BOLD ON turns on the bold font REF REF1 LABel FONT BOLD might return REF REF1 LABEL FONT BOLD 0 indicating the bold font is off REF REF x LABel FONT ITALic This command sets or queries the italic state of the specified reference label Group Vertical Syntax REF REF x LABel FONT ITALic NR1 OFF ON Arguments NR1 0 disables italic font any other value turns this...

Page 619: ...ints REF REF x LABel FONT TYPE This command sets or queries the font type of the specified reference label such as Arial or Times New Roman Group Vertical Syntax REF REF x LABel FONT TYPE QString Arguments QString is the font type Examples REF REF1 LABel FONT TYPE Monospace specifies a mono spaced font REF REF1 LABel FONT TYPE might return REF REF1 LABEL FONT TYPE Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman REF REF ...

Page 620: ...ring REF REF x LABel NAMe Arguments QString is the character string that will be used for the reference waveform label name Examples REF REF4 LABEL NAME My Reference sets the label name of Reference 4 waveform to My Reference REF REF3 LABEL NAME might return REF REF3 LABEL NAME Signal2 indicating that the label name for Reference 3 waveform is currently set to Signal2 REF REF x LABel XPOS This com...

Page 621: ...orm of the specified reference relative to the baseline of the waveform The reference waveform is specified by x Group Vertical Syntax REF REF x LABel YPOS NR1 REF REF x LABel YPOS Arguments NR1 is the location where the waveform label for the selected reference is displayed relative to the baseline of the waveform Examples REF REF3 LABEL YPOS 10 moves the waveform label for the Reference 3 wavefo...

Page 622: ...ments QString is the color of the digital group label To return the color to the default color send an empty string as in this example REF5_DALL LABEL COLOR Examples REF1_DALL LABel COLor FF0000 sets the font color to red REF1_DALL LABel COLor might return REF1_DALL LABEL COLOR FFFF00 indicating the font color is yellow REF x _DALL LABel FONT BOLD This command sets or queries the bold state of the...

Page 623: ... font NR1 0 turns off italic font any other value turns on italic font Examples REF1_DALL LABel FONT ITALic 1 turns on italic font REF1_DALL LABel FONT ITALic might return REF1_DALL LABEL FONT ITALIC 0 indicating the font is not italic REF x _DALL LABel FONT SIZE This command sets or queries the font size of the specified digital group The reference is specified by x Group Digital Syntax REF x _DA...

Page 624: ... LABEL FONT TYPE Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman REF x _DALL LABel FONT UNDERline This command sets or queries the underline state of the specified digital group The reference is specified by x Group Digital Syntax REF x _DALL LABel FONT UNDERline ON OFF NR1 Arguments OFF argument turns off underline font ON argument turns on underline font NR1 0 turns off underline font any other value turns on underlin...

Page 625: ...es the x position of the label of the specified digital group The reference is specified by x Group Digital Syntax REF x _DALL LABel XPOS NR3 Arguments NR3 is the x position in pixels relative to the left edge of the display of the group Examples REF1_DALL LABel XPOS 90 0e0 sets the x position of the label to 90 REF1_DALL LABel XPOS might return REF1_DALL LABEL XPOS 45 0000 indicating the x positi...

Page 626: ...bel of the specified digital bit The reference is specified by x Group Digital Syntax REF x _D x LABel COLor QString Arguments QString is the label color To return the color to the default color send an empty string as in this example REF5_D1 LABEL COLOR Examples REF1_D1 LABel COLor FF0000 sets the color to red REF1_D1 LABel COLor might return REF1_D1 LABEL COLOR FFFF00 indicating the color is yel...

Page 627: ...ence is specified by x Group Digital Syntax REF x _D x LABel FONT ITALic ON OFF NR1 Arguments OFF argument turns off italic font ON argument turns on italic font NR1 0 turns off italic font any other value turns on italic font Examples REF1_D1 LABel FONT ITALic OFF turns off italic font REF1_D1 LABel FONT ITALic might return REF1_D1 LABEL FONT ITALIC 1 indicating the font is italic REF x _D x LABe...

Page 628: ...YPE Monospace sets the font to Monospace CHREF1_D1 LABel FONT TYPE might return REF1_D1 LABEL FONT TYPE Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman REF x _D x LABel FONT UNDERline This command sets or queries the underline state of the label of the specified digital bit The reference is specified by x Group Digital Syntax REF x _D x LABel FONT UNDERline ON OFF NR1 Arguments OFF argument turns off underline font ON a...

Page 629: ...ion of the label of the specified digital bit The reference is specified by x Group Digital Syntax REF x _D x LABel XPOS NR3 Arguments NR3 is the x position in pixels relative to the left edge of the display of the label Examples REF1_D1 LABel XPOS 90 sets the x position to 90 REF1_D1 LABel XPOS might return REF1_D1 LABEL XPOS 45 0000 indicating the position is 45 pixels to the right of the left e...

Page 630: ...comments in a set file The instrument ignores these embedded comment lines Group Miscellaneous Syntax REM QString Arguments QString is a string that can contain a maximum of 80 characters Examples REM This is a comment is a comment string that the instrument will ignore ROSc SOUrce This command sets or queries the selected source for the time base reference oscillator The reference oscillator lock...

Page 631: ...mmand returns whether the time base reference oscillator is locked This command will return either LOCKED or UNLOCKED Group Miscellaneous Syntax ROSc STATE Returns LOCKED indicates the reference oscillator is locked UNLOCKED indicates the reference oscillator is not locked Examples ROSC STATE might return ROSC STATE LOCKED indicating that the time base reference is locked RST No Query Form This co...

Page 632: ...OCKETServer PORT command The socket server protocol SOCKETServer PROTOCol command The USBTMC port configuration USBDevice CONFigure command The destination reference waveform or file path for the CURVe command DATa DESTination command The source waveform for the CURVe or WAVFrm queries DATa SOUrce command The waveform data encoding for the CURVe command or query or the WAVFrm query DATa ENCdg comm...

Page 633: ...rpreted as a full path Relative path specification If the file argument begins with or or has a file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working directory Examples SAVe EVENTtable BUS TEK000 CSV saves the bus decode event table in the file named TEK000 CSV SAVe EVENTtable MEASUrement No Qu...

Page 634: ... When specifying the file name with this command use the correct file extension png for PNG format bmp for BMP format or jpg for JPEG format If a file name or path is specified the file is expected to be located in a directory relative to the current working directory specified by FILESystem CWDFILESystem CWD unless a complete path is specified Complete path specification If the file argument begi...

Page 635: ...ator such as C then the file name is interpreted as a full path Relative path specification If the file argument begins with or or has a file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working directory Examples SAVE REPORT report pdf creates a report in PDF format in the location specified SAVe ...

Page 636: ...C then the file name is interpreted as a full path Relative path specification If the file argument begins with or or has a file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working directory Examples SAVE SESSION c rose_was_here tss saves the instrument state in the specified file SAVe SETUp No Qu...

Page 637: ...ed in saved setups Group Save and Recall Syntax SAVe SETUp INCLUDEREFs OFF ON 0 1 SAVe SETUp INCLUDEREFs Arguments OFF specifies not including displayed reference waveforms in saved setups ON specifies including displayed reference waveforms in saved setups 0 specifies not including displayed reference waveforms in saved setups 1 specifies including displayed reference waveforms in saved setups Ex...

Page 638: ...h specification If the file argument begins with or or has a file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working directory Complete path specification If the file argument begins with a file path separator forward slash character or a drive designator such as C then the file name is interpret...

Page 639: ...ER is ON and SAVEON WAVEFORM is ON You can save the files to a local drive or network path by entering the desired location in QString You can also select to save the files to a USB drive Group Save On Syntax SAVEON FILE DEST QString SAVEON FILE DEST Related Commands SAVEON FILE NAME Arguments QString specifies the location to store files Examples SAVEON FILE DEST C users username Tektronix TekSco...

Page 640: ... you set for the oscilloscope to use with the autoincrement number 5 appended SAVEON IMAGe This command sets or queries whether to save a screen capture when a trigger occurs and SAVEON TRIGer is ON and SAVEON IMAGE is ON Group Save On Syntax SAVEON IMAGe NR1 OFF ON SAVEON IMAGe Related Commands SAVEON FILE DEST SAVEON FILE NAME SAVEON TRIGger SAVEON IMAGe Arguments NR1 0 disables Save On Image an...

Page 641: ...LESystem CWD unless a complete path is specified Complete path specification If the file argument begins with drive designator such as C then the file name is interpreted as a full path Relative path specification If the file argument begins with or or has a file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to th...

Page 642: ...er any other value turns this feature on OFF disables Save On Trigger ON enables Save On Trigger Examples SAVEON TRIGGER ON sets the oscilloscope to save an image measurement and or waveform when a trigger occurs SAVEON TRIGGER might return SAVEON TRIGGER ON indicating that a file will be saved on triggering SAVEON WAVEform Sets or queries whether to save a waveform when a trigger occurs when SAVE...

Page 643: ... command sets or queries the file format for saving waveforms when SAVEON WAVEform is set to 1 Group Save On Syntax SAVEON WAVEform FILEFormat INTERNal SPREADSheet SAVEON WAVEform FILEFormat Arguments INTERNal specifies saving the waveform in the oscilloscope internal format SPREADSheet specifies saving the waveform in comma separated values format Examples SAVEON WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT SPREADSheet s...

Page 644: ...Form This command adds the specified search Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH ADDNew QString Arguments QString is the specified search The argument is of the form SEARCH NR1 where NR1 is 1 Examples SEARCH ADDNEW SEARCH2 adds a new search named SEARCH 2 SEARCH DELete No Query Form This command deletes the specified search Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH DELete QString Arguments QString is the...

Page 645: ... specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x COPy SEARCHtotrigger TRIGgertosearch Arguments SEARCHtotrigger copies the search criteria to the trigger TRIGgertosearch copies the trigger criteria to the search Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 COPY TRIGGERTOSEARCH copies the trigger criteria to the search 1 criteria SEARCH SEARCH1 COPY SEARCHTOTRIGGER copies the search criteria to the trigger ...

Page 646: ...arch marks for this search The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TOTAL Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TOTAL might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TOTAL 7 indicating that there are 7 matches for search 1 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ARINC429A CONDition This command specifies a field or condition for an ARINC429 bus to search on The search number is specified by x Conditio...

Page 647: ...H1 TRIGGER A BUS ARINC429A CONDITION might return SOW indicating that the bus is being searched for the first bit of each word in the packet SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ARINC429A DATa HIVALue This command sets or queries the high value when searching on an ARINC429 data field The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to DATa or LABELANDDATA and the data qualifier must ...

Page 648: ...ange SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ARINC429A DATa QUALifier Arguments Arguments are the available data qualifiers NOTE The search qualifier only applies to the bits defined as the data field via the bus data field format specifier using BUS B x ARINC429A DATAFORmat Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ARINC429A DATA QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the data qualifier to less than SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A ...

Page 649: ...ons Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ARINC429A ERRTYPe ANY PARity WORD GAP SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ARINC429A ERRTYPe Arguments ANY sets the error type to match any of the other available error types PARity sets the error type to match on parity errors parity value results in even parity count for a word WORD s...

Page 650: ...SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ARINC429A LABEL HIVALUE XXXX1010 sets the value to XXXX1010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ARINC429A LABEL HIVALUE might return XXXXXXXX indicating that the value is XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ARINC429A LABel QUALifier This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on label data for an ARINC429 bus signal The search number is specified by x The...

Page 651: ... by x The search condition must be set to LABel or LABELANDDATA Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ARINC429A LABel VALue QString Arguments QString is the label value Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ARINC429A LABEL VALUE XXXX1010 sets the value to XXXX1010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ARINC429A LABEL V...

Page 652: ... indicating that the value is XX SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ARINC429A SSM VALue This command sets or queries the label when searching on an ARINC429 SSM field The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to DATa or LABELANDDATA and the data format must be set to DATA or SDIDATA Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Synt...

Page 653: ...CH1 TRIGger A BUS AUDio CONDition SOF sets conditions to search on start of frame SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS AUDio CONDition might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS AUDIO CONDITION DATA indicating settings for a search on DATA SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS AUDio DATa HITDMVALue This command sets or queries the binary data string for the high data word to be used when searching on an TDM audio ...

Page 654: ...IVALue QString SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS AUDio DATa HIVALue Arguments QString specifies the upper word value Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS AUDio DATa HIVALue XXXX sets the HIVALUE to XXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS AUDio DATa HIVALue might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS AUDIO DATA HIVALUE TEST_001101 indicating the HIVALUE is set to TEST_001101 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS AUDi...

Page 655: ...mber is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR AUDIO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS AUDio DATa QUALifier EQual UNEQual LESSthan MOREthan LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS AUDio DATa QUALifier Arguments LESSthan sets the qualifier to less than MOREthan sets the qualifier to greater than EQual sets th...

Page 656: ...data word to be used when searching on an TDM audio bus signal Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS AUDio DATa TDMVALue 1100 sets the TDMVALUE to 1100 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS AUDio DATa TDMVALue might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS AUDIO DATA TDMVALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1010 indicating the TDM value is 1010 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS AUDio DATa VALue This command sets or queries the...

Page 657: ... NONTdm CONDition The search number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR AUDIO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS AUDio DATa WORD EITher LEFt RIGht SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS AUDio DATa WORD Arguments EITher aligns the data to either left or right LEFt aligns the data to the left RIGht aligns the data to the right Examples SEAR...

Page 658: ...ition is set to start of frame SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS CAN DATa DIRection This command specifies the CAN search type to be valid on a Read Write or Either condition The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS CAN DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS CAN DATa DIRection Arguments READ specifies the read direction WRIT...

Page 659: ... is calculated as Absolute Maximum Data Match Size For CAN 2 0 the absolute maximum is 8 bytes For ISO CAN FD and Non ISO CAN FD the absolute maximum is 64 bytes The minimum data match size is 1 byte which produces the ranges listed above Increasing the data match size above 1 byte will adjust the range of valid data offset values accordingly Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS CAN DATA OFFSET 5...

Page 660: ...he data qualifier is set to equal SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS CAN DATa SIZe This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used when searching on a CAN bus signal The search condition must be set to IDANDDATA or DATA The search number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGg...

Page 661: ...H SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS CAN ERRType This command sets or queries the type of error condition for a CAN bus to search on The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to ERRor Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS CAN ERRType ACKMISS BITSTUFFing FORMERRor ANYERRor SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger...

Page 662: ...t Arguments ONE filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the BRS bit has a value of 1 fast data enabled ZERo filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the BRS bit has a value of 0 fast data disabled NOCARE disables filtering of CAN FD packets on the BRS bit Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS CAN FD BRSBit ONE specifies filtering CAN FD packets for those where the BRS bit has a va...

Page 663: ... that CAN FD packets are not being filtered based on the ESI bit value SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS CAN FRAMEtype This command sets or queries CAN bus trigger frame type to be used when searching on a CAN bus signal The search condition must be set to FRAMEtype The search number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEAR...

Page 664: ...Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS CAN IDentifier MODe EXTEND sets the identifier mode to extended SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS CAN IDentifier MODe might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD indicating the identifier mode is set to standard SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS CAN IDentifier VALue This command sets or queries CAN bus trigger identifier address value to be u...

Page 665: ...r A BUS ETHERnet CONDition SFD MACADDRess MACLENgth IPHeader TCPHeader DATa EOP IDLe FCSError QTAG SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet CONDition Related Commands Most of the other TRIGger A BUS B x ETHERnet commands are impacted by the setting of this command Arguments SFD Start of frame delimiter MACADDRess MAC addresses field MACLENgth MAC length type field IPHeader IP header field TCPHeader ...

Page 666: ...H SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet DATa HIVALue Arguments QString is the binary data value to be used when searching on an Ethernet bus signal Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet DATa HIVALue 101011 sets the data HIVALue to 101011 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet DATa HIVALue might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ETHERNET DATA HIVALUE 10101 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet...

Page 667: ... specifies the qualifier to be used when searching on an Ethernet bus signal The search condition must be set to DATa The search number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR ENET Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet DATa QUALifier LESSthan MOREthan EQual UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A ...

Page 668: ...up Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet DATa SIZe NR1 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet DATa SIZe Related Commands SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet CONDition Arguments The minimum and default values are 1 and the maximum value is 16 Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ETHERNET DATA SIZE 4 specifies 4 as the number of contiguous TCP IPv4 MAC client bytes to use...

Page 669: ...es SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ETHERNET DATA VALUE 00001000 specifies 00001000 as the value to use when triggering on the Ethernet binary data field assuming that TRIGGER A BUS ETHERNET DATA SIZe is set to 1 byte SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ETHERNET DATA VALUE might return 00001000 indicating 0000100 is the currently specified value used when searching on the Ethernet binary data field SEARCH SE...

Page 670: ...arching on the Ethernet IPv4 header address destination field SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet IPHeader PROTOcol VALue This command specifies the binary protocol value to use when searching on the Ethernet bus signal The search condition needs to be set to IPHeader The search number is specified by x NOTE Commonly used protocol values are 1 ICMP 2 IGMP 6 TCP and 17 UDP Conditions Requires th...

Page 671: ...HERnet IPHeader SOUrceaddr VALue Related Commands SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet CONDition Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable characters are 0 1 and X The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant bits leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ETHERNET IPHEADER SOURCEADDR VALUE 110...

Page 672: ...R A BUS ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS DESTINATION VALUE XXXXXXXX0011010111111100000001111010101011001000 specifies to use the value of XX 35 FC 07 AA C8 hex when searching on the Ethernet MAC address destination field SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS DESTINATION VALUE might return XXXXXXXX0011010111111100000001111010101011001000 indicating a MAC address destination field value of XX 35 FC ...

Page 673: ...SS SOURCE VALUE might return XXXXXXXX0011010111111100000001111010101011001000 indicating a MAC address source field value of XX 35 FC 07 AA C8 hex SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet MAC LENgth HIVALue This command specifies the binary MAC length high value to use when searching on an Ethernet bus signal The search condition needs to be set to MACADDRess The search number is specified by x Cond...

Page 674: ...QString SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet MAC LENgth VALue Related Commands SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet CONDition Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 16 characters where the allowable characters are 0 1 and X The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant bits leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ETHERNE...

Page 675: ...cimal XXXXX48A when searching on the Ethernet Q Tag field SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ETHERNET QTAG VALUE might return XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX010010001010 indicating that hexadecimal XXXXX48A has been set as the Ethernet Q Tag field search value SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet TCPHeader ACKnum VALue This command specifies the binary ack number value to use when searching on an Ethernet bus si...

Page 676: ... when searching on the Ethernet TCP header destination port number The search condition needs to be set to TCPHeader The search number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR ENET Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet TCPHeader DESTinationport VALue QString SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet TCPHeader DESTinationport VALue ...

Page 677: ...o 32 characters where the allowable characters are 0 1 and X The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant bits leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ETHERNET TCPHEADER SEQNUM VALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX000100010001 specifies to use the value of hexadecimal XXXXX111 when searching on the Ethernet TCP header sequence number SEARCH ...

Page 678: ...TCP header source port number SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS ETHERNET TCPHEADER SOURCEPORT VALUE might return XXXXX01001010110 indicating that hexadecimal X0A6 has been specified as the value to use when searching on the Ethernet TCP header source port number SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY CONDition This command sets or queries the FlexRay bus search condition The search number is specified b...

Page 679: ...H SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY CYCLEcount HIVALue Arguments QString specifies the cycle count value Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY CYCLEcount HIVALue 1010 sets the cycle count value to XX1010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY CYCLEcount HIVALue might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX indicating the cycle count value is don t care and it will ...

Page 680: ...US FLEXRAY CYCLEcount VALue This command sets or queries the low value when searching on a FlexRay bus cycle count field The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to CYCLEcount Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY CYCLEcount VALue QString SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRA...

Page 681: ...alue to XXXXXX1010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY DATa HIVALue might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXX indicating the data value is a don t care SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY DATa OFFSet This command sets or queries the offset of the data string in bytes when searching on a FlexRay bus data field The search number is specified by x The search conditi...

Page 682: ...EQual MOREEQual UNEQual LESSthan MOREthan INrange OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY DATa QUALifier Arguments Arguments are the available data qualifiers Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY DATa QUALifier LESSTHAN sets the data qualifier to less than SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY DATa QUALifier might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL indi...

Page 683: ...fied by x The search condition must be set to IDANDDATA or DATA Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY DATa VALue QString SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY DATa VALue Arguments QString specifies the data value Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY DATa VALue 1010 sets the data value to XXXXX...

Page 684: ...RCH1 TRIGGER A BUS FLEXRAY EOFTYPE ANY indicating either end of file type will cause a trigger SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY ERRTYPE This command sets or queries the error type when searching on a FlexRay bus signal The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to ERROR Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax S...

Page 685: ...lue Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue XXXXXXX1010 sets the HIVALUE to XXXXXXX1010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the HIVALUE is XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXray FRAMEID QUALifier This command sets the qualifier to be used when searching on a Fl...

Page 686: ...SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXray FRAMEID VALue Arguments QString is the frame id value Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS FLEXray FRAMEID VALue XXXXXXX1010 sets the value to XXXXXXX1010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS FLEXray FRAMEID VALue might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the value is XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXray FRAMEType Th...

Page 687: ...H x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY HEADER CRC Arguments QString specifies the CRC Examples SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY HEADER CRC 1010 sets the header CRC to XXXXXX101 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY HEADER CRC might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS FLEXRAY HEADER CRC XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the header CRC is a don t care SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECount This comman...

Page 688: ...TO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID QString SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID Arguments QString specifies the frame ID Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID 1010 sets the header frame ID to XXXXXXX1010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID might return SEARCH...

Page 689: ... or queries the payload length portion of the binary header string when searching on a FlexRay bus search trigger header The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to HEADer Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENgth QString SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS FLEXRAY HE...

Page 690: ...ODE ADDR10 sets the address mode for I2C bus trigger search 1 to ADDR10 SEARCH SEARCH2 TRIGGER A BUS I2C ADDRESS MODE might return SEARCH SEARCH2 TRIGGER A BUS I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 indicating that the address mode for I2C bus trigger search 2 is set to ADDR7 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS I2C ADDRess VALue This command sets or queries the binary address string used for the I2C search the specifie...

Page 691: ...h number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR EMBD Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS I2C CONDition ADDRess ADDRANDDATA DATa ACKMISS REPEATstart STARt STOP SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS I2C CONDition Arguments ADDress specifies the trigger condition as Address ADDRANDDATA specifies the trigger condition as Address and Data DATa sp...

Page 692: ... direction of data as Don t Care READ specifies the direction of data as Read WRITE specifies the direction of data as Write Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS I2C DATA DIRECTION READ sets the data direction for I2C bus trigger search 1 to READ SEARCH SEARCH2 TRIGGER A BUS I2C DATA DIRECTION might return SEARCH SEARCH2 TRIGGER A BUS I2C DATA DIRECTION DONTCARE indicating that the data direction...

Page 693: ...st be DATA or ADDRANDDATA Conditions Requires the SR EMBD Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS I2C DATa VALue QString SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS I2C DATa VALue Arguments QString specifies the data value The valid characters are 0 1 or X for binary format and A F 0 9 and X for hexadecimal format Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS I2C D...

Page 694: ...s specified by x The search condition must be DATA or IDANDDATA and the data qualifier must be INRANGE or OUTRANGE Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS LIN DATa HIVALue QString SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS LIN DATa HIVALue Arguments QString is a quoted string of 1s 0s or Xs representing the binary data string to be used in a LIN search if the search condition is IDentifier o...

Page 695: ...TRIGGER A BUS LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data qualifier is equal SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS LIN DATa SIZe This command sets or queries the length of the stat string in bytes used for a LIN bus search The search number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS LIN DATa SIZe NR1 SEA...

Page 696: ...a value to XXXXXX1010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS LIN DATa VALue might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXXXX indicating that the data value is a don t care SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS LIN ERRTYPE This command sets or queries the error type for a LIN bus search The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to ERROR Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Tr...

Page 697: ...ier VALue QString SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS LIN IDentifier VALue Arguments QString specifies the identifier value Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS LIN IDentifier VALue 1010 sets the identifier value to XX1010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS LIN IDentifier VALue might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX indicates the identifier value is don t care SEARCH SEARCH x T...

Page 698: ...onditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND ADDRess QUALifier EQual UNEQual LESSthan MOREthan LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND ADDRess QUALifier Arguments Arguments are the available address qualifiers Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS MIL1553B C...

Page 699: ...ARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND COUNt This command sets or queries the value of the command word word count field for a MIL STD 1553 bus to search on The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to COMMAND Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND COUNt QString SEARCH...

Page 700: ... NOCARE disables filtering of command words on the parity bit Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND PARITY ONE specifies filtering command words for those where the parity bit has a value of 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND PARITY might return NOCARE indicating that command words are not being filtered based on the parity bit value SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1...

Page 701: ...Gger A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND TRBit RX TX X SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND TRBit Arguments RX filters command words to only match those that are receive packets TX filters command words to only match those that are transmit packets X disables filtering of command words on the R T bit Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND TRBIT TX specifies filtering command words for...

Page 702: ...nc pulses found in any word SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B DATa PARity This command sets or queries the value of the command word parity bit for a MIL STD 1553 bus to search on The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to DATA Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B DA...

Page 703: ... x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B DATa VALue Arguments QString is the data value Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS MIL1553B DATA VALUE XXXXXXXXXXXX1000 sets the value to XXXXXXXXXXXX1000 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS MIL1553B DATA VALUE might return XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX indicating that the value is XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B ERRTYPe This command sets or queries the type of erro...

Page 704: ... The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to STATus and the address qualifier must be INrange or OUTrange Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B STATus ADDRess HIVALue QString SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B STATus ADDRess HIVALue Arguments QString is the address valu...

Page 705: ...that the address qualifier is set to equal SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B STATus ADDRess VALue This command sets or queries the low value when searching on status word addresses for a MIL STD 1553 bus The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to STATus Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x...

Page 706: ...has a value of 0 NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the BCR bit Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS MIL1553B STATUS BIT BCR ONE specifies filtering status words for those where the BCR bit has a value of 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS MIL1553B STATUS BIT BCR might return NOCARE indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the BCR bit value SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ...

Page 707: ...a status word for a MIL STD 1553 bus to search on The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to STATus Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B STATus BIT DBCA ONE ZERo NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B STATus BIT DBCA Arguments ONE filters status words to only match...

Page 708: ... value of 0 NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the INSTR bit Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS MIL1553B STATUS BIT INSTR ONE specifies filtering status words for those where the INSTR bit has a value of 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS MIL1553B STATUS BIT INSTR might return NOCARE indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the INSTR bit value SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A...

Page 709: ...atus word for a MIL STD 1553 bus to search on The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to STATus Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B STATus BIT SRQ ONE ZERo NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B STATus BIT SRQ Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those...

Page 710: ...value of 0 NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the SUBSF bit Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS MIL1553B STATUS BIT SUBSF ONE specifies filtering status words for those where the SUBSF bit has a value of 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS MIL1553B STATUS BIT SUBSF might return NOCARE indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the SUBSF bit value SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A ...

Page 711: ...itions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B STATus PARity ONE ZERo NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B STATus PARity Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the parity bit has a value of 1 ZERo filters status words to only match those where the parity bit has a value of 0 NOCARE d...

Page 712: ...an RS232C bus search to determine where to place a mark The search number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR COMP Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS RS232C CONDition DATa EOp PARItyerror STARt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS RS232C CONDition Arguments DATa specifies the search condition as Data EOp specifies the search cond...

Page 713: ...er search 1 data string to 1 SEARCH SEARCH2 TRIGGER A BUS RS232C DATA SIZE might return SEARCH SEARCH2 TRIGGER A BUS RS232C DATA SIZE 8 indicating that the bits per word for RS232C bus trigger search 2 is set to 8 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS RS232C DATa VALue This command sets or queries the data string used for the specified RS232C bus trigger search to determine where to place a mark The searc...

Page 714: ...rce B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Arguments B0 B16 specifies the bus source as a bus number from B01 to B16 Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS SOURCE B1 sets the bus source for bus trigger search 1 to B1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS SOURCE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS SOURCE B15 indicating that the bus source for bus ...

Page 715: ...earch number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR COMP Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS SPI DATa SIZe NR1 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS SPI DATa SIZe Arguments NR1 specifies the number of contiguous data bytes Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS SPI DATA SIZE 1 sets the length of the data string for SPI bus trigger sear...

Page 716: ...This command sets or queries the high binary address value used when searching on a USB bus signal to determine where to place a mark The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to TOKEN The VALue and HIVALue set a range that the INrange and OUTrange qualifiers use to decide when to trigger For example if the QUALIFER is set to INrange and the address is within the range s...

Page 717: ...ger A BUS USB ADDress VALue Related Commands SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB ADDress HIVALue Arguments QString specifies the data value in the specified valid format Valid characters are 0 1 and X for binary A F 0 9 and X for hexadecimal and for symbolic Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB ADDRESS VALUE 1110000 sets the address value for the normal token for USB bus trigger search 1 to 111...

Page 718: ... as Sync TOKENPacket specifies the search condition as Token Address Packet Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB CONDITION EOP sets the search condition for USB bus trigger search 1 to End of Packet SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB CONDITION might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB CONDITION SYNC indicating that the search condition for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to Sync SEARCH SEAR...

Page 719: ...search condition must be set to DATA Conditions Requires the SR USB2 Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB DATa OFFSet NR1 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB DATa OFFSet Arguments NR1 specifies the data offset in bytes Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB DATA OFFSET 5 sets the data offset for USB bus trigger search 1 to 5 byt...

Page 720: ...Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS USB DATa QUALifier INRANGE sets the qualifier to INRANGE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A BUS USB DATa QUALifier might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the qualifier is set to equal SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB DATa SIZe This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes used for a USB bus search to determin...

Page 721: ...B DATa TYPe Arguments ANY specifies the data packet type as Any DATA0 specifies the data packet type as DATA0 DATA1 specifies the data packet type as DATA1 DATA2 specifies the data packet type as DATA2 MDATA specifies the data packet type as MDATA Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB DATA TYPE ANY sets the data packet type for USB bus trigger search 1 to ANY SEARCH SEARCH2 TRIGGER A BUS USB D...

Page 722: ...dpoint binary value used for a USB bus search to determine where to place a mark The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to TOKEN Conditions Requires the SR USB2 Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB ENDPoint VALue QString SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB ENDPoint VALue Arguments QString specifies the...

Page 723: ...heck 16 PID specifies the error type as PID Check Bits Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB ERRTYPE CRC5 sets the error type for USB bus trigger search 1 to Token CRC5 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB ERRTYPE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB ERRTYPE PID indicating that the error type for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to PID Check Bits SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB HANDSHAKE...

Page 724: ... frame number string to use for the Start of Frame for the specified USB bus trigger search to determine where to place a mark The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to TOKEN Conditions Requires the SR USB2 Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB SOFFRAMENUMber QString SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB ...

Page 725: ... PREamble specifies the PID value as PRE 1100 RESERVed specifies the PID value as Reserved 0000 SPLit specifies the PID value as Split 1000 Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB SPECIALTYPE ERROR sets the PID value for USB bus trigger search 1 to ERROR SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB SPECIALTYPE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB SPECIALTYPE SPLIT indicating that the PID value for ...

Page 726: ...Type value for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to DONTCare SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB SPLIT HUB VALue This command sets or queries the binary hub address value to be used when searching on a USB bus signal The search number is specified by x The search condition must be set to Special with packet type SPLIT Conditions Requires the SR USB2 Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Sea...

Page 727: ...us trigger search 1 to XXX1111 for binary format SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB SPLIT PORT VALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB SPLIT PORT VALUE XX indicating that the port address for USB hub trigger search 1 is set to XX in hexadecimal format SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB SPLIT SC VALue This command sets or queries the Start Complete value for the specified USB bus trigger o...

Page 728: ...yntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB SPLIT SE VALue NOCARE FULLSPEED ISOALL ISOEND ISOMID ISOSTART LOWSPEED SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB SPLIT SE VALue Arguments NOCARE specifies Don t Care X Start End bit value FULLSPEED specifies Control Bulk Interrupt Full Speed device 0X Start End bit value ISOALL specifies Isochronous Data is All 11 Start End bit value ISOEND specifies Isochronous Dat...

Page 729: ...type as IN 1001 OUT specifies the token type as OUT 0001 SETUP specifies the token type as SETUP 1101 SOF specifies the token type as Start Of Frame 0101 Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB TOKENTYPE IN sets the token type for USB bus trigger search 1 to IN SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB TOKENTYPE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS USB TOKENTYPE SOF indicating that the token type fo...

Page 730: ...x REF x REF x _D x SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Arguments CH x specifies one input channel as the edge source where the channel number is specified by x CH x _D x specifies a digital reference waveform as the source waveform for the specified search MATH x specifies the math waveform as the search source where the math number is specified by x REF x specifies the reference waveform as the...

Page 731: ... return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A EDGE THRESHOLD 0 0E 0 indicating the threshold is 0 0 V SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc CLOCk THReshold This command sets or queries the logic clock threshold for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc CLOCk THReshold NR3 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOG...

Page 732: ...DELTatime might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC DELTATIME 1 0000E 9 indicating the delta time is 1 0 ns SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion This command sets or queries the logic operator for a pattern or state trigger search to determine where to place a mark The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion AND NANd NOR OR SEARCH...

Page 733: ...he possible input channels Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A LOGIc INPUT CLOCK SOUrce CH2 sets the clock source to channel 2 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A LOGIc INPUT CLOCK SOUrce might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CLOCK SOURCE UNDEFINED indicating the clock source is not defined SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc LEVel CH x This command sets or queries the voltage level to use for logic tr...

Page 734: ...igger search Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A LOGIc LEVel MATH1 50 0e 3 sets the level to 50 0 mV SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A LOGIc LEVel MATH1 might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC LEVEL MATH1 0 0E 0 indicating the level is set to 0 0 V SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc LEVel REF x This command sets the voltage level to use for logic trigger search The search number is specified by x Group Sear...

Page 735: ...e pattern is high L specifies triggering when the pattern is low X specifies triggering when the pattern is high or low Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A LOGIc LOGICPattern CH2 H sets the channel 2 pattern to a high SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A LOGIc LOGICPattern CH2 might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC LOGICPATTERN CH2 X indicating channel 2 is a don t care SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc LOGI...

Page 736: ...r The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc LOGICPattern MATH x H L X SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc LOGICPattern MATH x Arguments H specifies triggering when the pattern is high L specifies triggering when the pattern is low X specifies triggering when the pattern is high or low Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A LOGIc LOGICPattern MATH1 H se...

Page 737: ...EARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc POLarity This command sets or queries the polarity for the clock channel when Use Clock Edge is set to Yes for Logic search type The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc POLarity POSitive NEGative EITher SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc POLarity Arguments POSitive specifies using the positive clock edge NEGative ...

Page 738: ... SEARCH1 TRIGger A LOGIc USEClockedge might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC USECLOCKEDGE 0 indicating not to use the clock source SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc WHEn This command sets or queries the condition for generating an A or B logic search with respect to the defined input pattern Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc WHEn TRUe FALSe MOREThan LESSThan EQual UNE...

Page 739: ...SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth HIGHLimit NR3 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth HIGHLimit Arguments NR3 is the upper limit to use in seconds when searching for a pulse Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A PULSEWidth HIGHLimit 2 5e 9 sets the high limit to 2 5 ns SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A PULSEWidth HIGHLimit might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH HIGHLIMIT 2 0000E 9 indicating the pu...

Page 740: ...h number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth LOWLimit NR3 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth LOWLimit Arguments NR3 is the lower limit to use in seconds when searching for a pulse Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A PULSEWidth LOWLimit 0 5e 9 sets the low limit to 0 5 ns SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A PULSEWidth LOWLimit might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER...

Page 741: ...p Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce CH x CH x _D x REF x REF x _D x SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Arguments Arguments are possible sources Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce CH1 sets the source to channel 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH2 indicating channel 2 is th...

Page 742: ...ARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn Arguments LESSthan causes a search when a pulse is detected with a width less than the time set by the SEARch A PULSEWidth WIDth command MOREthan causes a search when a pulse is detected with a width greater than the time set by the SEARch A PULSEWidth WIDth command EQual causes a search when a pulse is detected with a width equal to the time period specifie...

Page 743: ...not to use logic qualification for a runt search Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A RUNT LOGICQUALification ON turns on logic qualification SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A RUNT LOGICQUALification might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A RUNT LOGICQUALIFICATION OFF indicating logic qualification is off SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT POLarity This command specifies the polarity for the runt search The search n...

Page 744: ...he available sources Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 sets the source to channel 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH2 indicating the source is set to channel 2 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT THReshold HIGH This command sets or queries the source threshold HIGH level for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark...

Page 745: ...0 mV SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A RUNT THReshold LOW might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A RUNT THRESHOLD LOW 0 0E 0 indicating the threshold is 0 0 V SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT WHEn This command sets or queries the condition setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT WHEn OCCU...

Page 746: ...ER A RUNT WHEN OCCURS indicating that a mark is placed if a runt trigger event occurs SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT WIDth This command sets or queries the width setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT WIDth NR3 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Arguments NR3 specifies th...

Page 747: ...CH x TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce CH x CH x _D x MATH x REF x REF x _D x SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Arguments CH x specifies an input channel as the edge source where x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 depending on the number of channels in your instrument CH x _D x specifies a digital waveform as the setup and hold clock source waveform for t...

Page 748: ...gger clock threshold setting for search 1 is set to 1 3 volts CANNOT USE LocalCmd HERE BECAUSE OF VARIABLES SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime This command sets or queries the hold time setting for a setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime NR3 SEARCH SEARCH x TRI...

Page 749: ...ght return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD LEVEL CH1 0 0E 0 indicating the level is 0 0 V SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold LEVel MATH x This command sets or queries the voltage level to use for setup hold trigger search The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold LEVel MATH x NR3 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold LEVel MATH x Arguments NR3 i...

Page 750: ...ARCH x TRIGger A SETHold LOGICPattern CH x This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern with respect to the defined input pattern and identifies the time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold LOGICPattern CH x INCLude DONTInclude SE...

Page 751: ...ifies including the specified digital channel SETHOLD inputs in the specified search DONTInclude specifies not including the specified digital channel SETHOLD inputs in the specified search Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A SETHold LOGICPattern CH1_D0 INCLUDE specifies including the specified digital channel SETHOLD inputs in the specified search SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A SETHold LOGICPattern CH1_D...

Page 752: ...ger A SETHold LOGICPattern REF x This command sets and returns the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern with respect to the defined input pattern and identifies the time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold LOGICPattern REF x INCLude DONTInclude SEARCH SEA...

Page 753: ...ets the setup hold trigger setup time setting for search 1 to 2 ns SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME 1 0000E 9 indicating that the setup hold trigger setup time setting for search 1 is set to 1 0 ns SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A STATE This command sets or queries the enabled state of the search The search number is specified by x Group Searc...

Page 754: ...n a search hit is found SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A STOPAcq might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A STOPACQ 0 indicating acquisitions are stopped when a search hit is found SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TIMEOut LOGICQUALification This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a timeout search The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TI...

Page 755: ...GH STAYSLow specifies the polarity stays LOW EITher specifies the polarity stays HIGH or stays LOW Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A TIMEOut POLarity STAYSLOW specifies the polarity stays LOW SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A TIMEOut POLarity might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TIMEOUT POLARITY STAYSHIGH indicating the polarity stays HIGH SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TIMEOut SOUrce This command sets and que...

Page 756: ...shold level for a timeout trigger search Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A TIMEOut THReshold 50 0e 3 sets the threshold to 50 0 mV SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A TIMEOut THReshold might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TIMEOUT THRESHOLD 0 0E 0 indicating the threshold is 0 0 V SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TIMEOut TIMe This command sets or queries the time setting for a timeout trigger search to determine wh...

Page 757: ...rigger time setting for search 1 to 400 ns SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 500 0000E 12 indicating that the transition trigger time setting for search 1 is set to 500 ps SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANsition LOGICQUALification This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a transition search The search n...

Page 758: ...y NEGative places a mark on a transition of negative polarity POSitive places a mark on a transition of positive polarity Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A TRANsition POLarity NEGATIVE places a mark on a transition of negative polarity SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A TRANsition POLarity might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY POSITIVE indicating the polaity is positive SEARCH SEARCH x T...

Page 759: ...a transition trigger search Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A TRANsition THReshold HIGH 50 0e 3 sets the high threshold to 50 0 mV SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A TRANsition THReshold HIGH might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TRANSITION THRESHOLD HIGH 0 0E 0 indicating the high threshold is 0 0 V SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANsition THReshold LOW Sets or queries the source threshold LOW level for a tran...

Page 760: ...n sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is slower than the set volts second rate EQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is equal to the set volts second rate UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is not equal to the set volts second rate Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN SLOWERTHAN sets the transition trigger condit...

Page 761: ...outside of the given time range specified by SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit and SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit The polarity is selected using the SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT POLarity command TIMEOut triggers on an input signal source that stays above stays below or stays either above or beow the trigger level for a given time LOGIc specifies that ...

Page 762: ...TRIGger A WINdow WHEn is OUTSIDEGreater the instrument triggers when the signal remains below the lower threshold for longer than the time limit TRIGger A WINdow WIDTH and then crosses upwards through the lower threshold EITher if TRIGger A WINdow WHEn is INSIDEGreater the instrument triggers when the signal remains between the upper and lower thresholds for longer than the time limit TRIGger A WI...

Page 763: ...indow search Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A WINdow LOGICQUALification ON turns ON logic qualification for a window search SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A WINdow LOGICQUALification might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A WINDOW LOGICQUALIFICATION OFF indicating logic qualification is off SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A WINdow POLarity This command sets or queries the window trigger threshold crossing of the se...

Page 764: ...RIGger A WINdow POLarity might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A WINDOW POLARITY UPPER indicating the polarity is set to upper SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A WINdow SOUrce This command sets and queries the source for the window search input The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A WINdow SOUrce CH x MATH x REF x SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A WINdow SOUrce Arg...

Page 765: ... the source threshold LOW level for a transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A WINdow THReshold LOW NR3 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A WINdow THReshold LOW Arguments NR3 the source threshold LOW level for a transition trigger search Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A WINdow THReshold LOW 50 0e ...

Page 766: ... TRIGger A WINdow WHEn might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A WINDOW WHEN ENTERSWINDOW indicating a window search when the signal enters the window SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A WINdow WIDth This command sets or queries the width setting for a window trigger search to determine where to place a mark The search number is specified by x Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A WINdow WIDth ...

Page 767: ...e it was in when you made the SET query The SET query always returns command headers regardless of the setting of the HEADer command This is because the returned commands are intended to be sent back to the instrument as a command string The VERBose command can still be used to specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated or full length This command is identical to the LRN command Gr...

Page 768: ...nds and queries to the instrument The default state is enabled Group Miscellaneous Syntax SOCKETServer ENAble 0 1 OFF ON SOCKETServer ENAble Arguments 1 enables the socket server If the state is 0 disabled and this command is sent to enable the socket server when the port is in use by another service then the error event code 221 Settings conflict is posted to the event queue and the socket server...

Page 769: ...ETSERVER PORT 4000 sets the socket server port number to 4000 SOCKETSERVER PORT might return SOCKETSERVER PORT 4000 indicating that the port number is 4000 SOCKETServer PROTOCol This command sets or queries the protocol for the socket server Group Miscellaneous Syntax SOCKETServer PROTOCol TERMinal NONe SOCKETServer PROTOCol Arguments TERMinal specifies terminal protocol for the socket server When...

Page 770: ...for SRER is 0 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the SRER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle Examples SRE 48 sets the bits in the SRER to binary 00110000 SRE might return 32 showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary value of 00100000 STB Query Only The STB Read Status Byte query returns the contents of the Status Byte Register SBR using the Master Summary Status ...

Page 771: ...KSECURE initializes both waveform and setup memories TIMe Query Only This command queries the time that the instrument displays Group Miscellaneous Syntax TIMe Related Commands DATE Returns QString is a time in the form hh mm ss where hh refers to a two digit hour number mm refers to a two digit minute number from 01 to 60 and ss refers to a two digit second number from 01 to 60 Examples TIME migh...

Page 772: ...fied number of hours difference between the desired time zone and UTC which is equivalent to GMT The deltas supported are 12 00 11 00 10 00 9 30 9 00 8 30 8 00 7 00 6 00 5 00 4 00 3 30 3 00 2 00 1 00 0 0 1 00 2 00 3 00 3 30 4 00 4 30 5 00 5 30 6 00 6 30 7 00 8 00 9 00 9 30 10 00 10 30 11 00 11 30 12 00 Examples TIME ZONE UTCDELTA 7 0e0 sets the time zone to America Yellowknife TIME ZONE UTCDELTA m...

Page 773: ... STARt Arguments STARt launches the touchscreen calibration procedure Examples TOUCHSCREEN CALIBRATE START launches the touchscreen calibration procedure TOUCHSCReen STATe This sets or queries the enabled state of the touch screen This command is equivalent to pushing the Touch Off button on the front panel To completely disable front panel operation use the following two commands LOCK ALL TOUCHSC...

Page 774: ...Examples TRG immediately executes all commands that have been defined by DDT TRIGger This command forces a trigger event to occur The query returns the current trigger parameters for the instrument Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger FORCe TRIGger Arguments FORCe creates a trigger event If TRIGger STATE is set to READy the acquisition will complete Otherwise this command will be ignored This is equivalen...

Page 775: ...al Examples TRIGger A SETLEVEL sets the trigger level to 50 of the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal TRIGger A returns current trigger parameters TRIGger A B BUS B x ARINC429A CONDition This command specifies a field or condition for an ARINC429 bus to trigger on The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application G...

Page 776: ...mber is specified by x The trigger condition must be set to DATa or LABELANDDATA and the data qualifier must be INrange or OUTrange Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x ARINC429A DATa HIVALue QString TRIGger A B BUS B x ARINC429A DATa HIVALue Arguments QString is the label value NOTE The size of the QString is dependent on the...

Page 777: ...NOTE The trigger qualifier only applies to the bits defined as the data field via the bus data field format specifier using BUS B x ARINC429A DATAFORmat Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 ARINC429A DATA QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the data qualifier to less than TRIGGER A BUS B1 ARINC429A DATA QUALIFIER might return EQUAL indicating that the data qualifier is set to equal TRIGger A B BUS B x ARINC429A DATa VAL...

Page 778: ...y x The trigger condition must be set to ERRor Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x ARINC429A ERRTYPe ANY PARity WORD GAP TRIGger A B BUS B x ARINC429A ERRTYPe Arguments ANY sets the error type to match any of the other available error types PARity sets the error type to match on parity errors parity value results in even pari...

Page 779: ... ARINC429A LABEL HIVALUE might return XXXXXXXX indicating that the value is XXXXXXXX TRIGger A B BUS B x ARINC429A LABel QUALifier This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on label data for an ARINC429 bus signal The bus number is specified by x The trigger condition must be set to LABel or LABELANDDATA Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis applicatio...

Page 780: ...B BUS B x ARINC429A LABel VALue QString TRIGger A B BUS B x ARINC429A LABel VALue Arguments QString is the label value Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 ARINC429A LABEL VALUE XXXX1010 sets the value to XXXX1010 TRIGGER A BUS B1 ARINC429A LABEL VALUE might return XXXXXXXX indicating that the value is XXXXXXXX TRIGger A B BUS B x ARINC429A SDI VALue This command sets or queries the label when triggering on ...

Page 781: ... B BUS B x ARINC429A SSM VALue QString TRIGger A B BUS B x ARINC429A SSM VALue Arguments QString is the label value NOTE The SSM field is only present when the selected data field format is DATA or SDIDATA using BUS B x ARINC429A DATAFORmat Also the stored QString is reset to its default value whenever the data field format is changed Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 ARINC429A SSM VALUE X0 sets the value...

Page 782: ...is command sets or queries the binary data string for the high data word to be used when triggering on an TDM audio bus signal The trigger condition must be set to DATa using TRIGger A B BUS B x AUDio CONDition Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x AUDio DATa HITDMVALue QString TRIGger A B BUS B x AUDio DATa HITDMVALue Arguments QString is the binary data string for the high data word to be use...

Page 783: ...o bus signal Examples TRIGger A BUS B1 AUDio DATa HIVALue 11001101 sets the hi value to XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX11001101 TRIGger A BUS B1 AUDio DATa HIVALue might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 AUDIO DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX indicating the hi value is set to XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TRIGger A B BUS B x AUDio DATa OFFSet This command sets the data offset value to be used when triggering on an audio b...

Page 784: ...ication Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x AUDio DATa QUALifier LESSthan MOREthan EQual UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange TRIGger A B BUS B x AUDio DATa QUALifier Arguments LESSthan sets the qualifier to less than MOREthan sets the qualifier to greater than EQual sets the qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the qualifier to less than or equal ...

Page 785: ...0 sets the TDMVALUE to 1100 TRIGger A BUS B1 AUDio DATa TDMVALue might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 AUDIO DATA TDMVALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1010 indicating the TDM value is 1010 TRIGger A B BUS B x AUDio DATa VALue This command sets the lower word value to be used when triggering on an audio bus signal The trigger condition must be set to DATa using TRIGger A B BUS B x AUDio CONDition The bus number is...

Page 786: ...er LEFt RIGht TRIGger A B BUS B x AUDio DATa WORD Arguments EITher aligns the trigger data to either left or right LEFt aligns the trigger data to the left RIGht aligns the trigger data to the right Examples TRIGger A BUS B1 AUDio DATa WORD LEFt sets the word alignment to the left TRIGger A BUS B1 AUDio DATa WORD might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 AUDIO DATA WORD EITHER indicating the trigger data is a...

Page 787: ...xamples TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION EOF indicating an end of file condition TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION DATA enables triggering on matching CAN data TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN DATa DIRection This command sets the data direction read write or nocare to be used to search on a CAN bus signal The trigger condition must be set to IDentifier using TRIGger A...

Page 788: ...N DATa VALue Arguments NR1 is an integer whose minimum and default values are 1 don t care and the maximum is up to 7 for CAN 2 0 or up to 63 for ISO CAN FD and Non ISO CAN FD The maximum is dependent on the number of bytes being matched and the CAN standard selected Its value is calculated as Absolute Maximum Data Match Size For CAN 2 0 the absolute maximum is 8 bytes For ISO CAN FD and Non ISO C...

Page 789: ...to trigger when the data is less than the qualifier value MOREthan sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is greater than the qualifier value EQual sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is equal to the qualifier value UNEQual sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is not equal to the qualifier value LESSEQual sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is less than or e...

Page 790: ...BUS B1 CAN DATa SIZe 2 sets the data size to 2 bytes TRIGger A BUS B1 CAN DATa SIZe might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA SIZE 1 indicating the data size is set to 1 byte TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN DATa VALue This command sets the binary data value to be used when triggering on a CAN bus signal The trigger condition must be set to IDANDDATA or DATa using TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN CONDition The bus num...

Page 791: ...MISS specifies triggering on a missing ACK field BITSTUFFing specifies triggering on a bit stuffing error FORMERRor specifies triggering on a CAN FD form error To use this option the CAN standard must be set to FDISO or FDNONISO ANYERRor specifies triggering on any error type Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN ERRTYPE ACKMISS specifies triggering on any missing ACK fields TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN ERRTYPE m...

Page 792: ...alue TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN FD ESIBit This command sets or queries the value of the error state indicator bit ESI bit for a CAN bus to triggering on The bus number is specified by x The trigger condition must be set to FDBITS and the CAN standard must be FDISO or FDNONISO Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN FD ESIBit ONE...

Page 793: ...RLoad TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN FRAMEtype Arguments DATa specifies a data frame type REMote specifies a remote frame type ERRor specifies an error frame type OVERLoad specifies an overload frame type Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA sets the CAN trigger frame type to DATA TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN FRAMETYPE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA indicating the frame type is data TRI...

Page 794: ...to be used when triggering on a CAN bus signal The trigger condition must be set to IDANDDATA or DATa using TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN CONDition The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN IDentifier VALue QString TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN IDentifier VALue Arguments QString is up to 29 bits specifying ...

Page 795: ...ame delimiter MACADDRess MAC addresses field MACLENgth MAC length type field IPHeader IP header field This argument is only available when PROTOCOL is set to IPv4 TCPHeader TCP header field This argument is only available when PROTOCOL is set to IPv4 DATa TCP IPv4 or MAC protocol client data field If the protocol is set to OTHER then DATa refers to the MAC client data EOP End of Packet field IDLe ...

Page 796: ...ng up to 32 bits Use the command TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet DATa SIZe to specify the size The allowable characters are 0 1 and X The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant bits leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged Examples TRIGger A BUS B1 ETHERnet DATa HIVALue XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX00001000 sets the upper limit of the range to XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX0000100...

Page 797: ...B BUS B x ETHERnet DATa QUALifier This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on an Ethernet bus signal The trigger condition must be set to DATa The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR ENET Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet DATa QUALifier EQual UNEQual LESSthan MOREthan LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OU...

Page 798: ...HERnet DATa SIZe NR1 TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet DATa SIZe Related Commands TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet CONDition Arguments The minimum and default values are 1 and maximum is 16 except when the qualifier is set to Inside Range or Outside Range In these cases the maximum size is 4 Examples TRIGger A BUS B1 ETHERnet DATa SIZe 4 sets the oscilloscope to trigger on 4 contiguous data bytes TRIGger A...

Page 799: ...ied in the quoted string replace the least significant bits leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged Examples TRIGger A BUS B1 ETHERnet DATa VALue 00001000 sets the binary data to trigger on to 00001000 assuming the qualifier is set to LESSthan MOREthan EQual UNEQual LESSEQual or MOREEQual and DATa SIZe is set to 1 byte TRIGger A BUS B1 ETHERnet DATa VALue 00001000 sets the lower limit of the ...

Page 800: ... VALue 00011001001000010110100000000001 sets the IP destination address to trigger on to 192 168 0 1 TRIGger A BUS B1 ETHERnet IPHeader DESTinationaddr VALue might return XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX01 TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet IPHeader PROTOcol VALue When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to IPHeader this command specifies the value of the 8 bit protocol field that is to be used in the t...

Page 801: ...PHeader this command specifies the value of the 32 bit source address that is to be used in the trigger along with the destination address and protocol value The IP source address is a standard IP address such as 192 168 0 1 The default is all X s don t care The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR ENET Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x...

Page 802: ...s the SR ENET Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet MAC ADDRess DESTination VALue QString TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet MAC ADDRess DESTination VALue Related Commands TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet CONDition TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet MAC ADDRess SOUrce VALue Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 48 characters where the allowable characters ar...

Page 803: ...of up to 48 characters where the allowable characters are 0 1 and X The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant bits leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged Examples TRIGger A BUS B1 ETHERnet MAC ADDRess SOUrce VALue XXXXXXXXXX01010111111100000001111010101010101000 would set the MAC destination address to trigger on to XX 35 FC 07 AA C8 hex TRIGger A BUS B1 ETHERnet ...

Page 804: ...ge TRIGGER A BUS B1 ETHERNET MAC LENGTH HIVALUE might return XXXXXXXX00001000 TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet MAC LENgth VALue When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to MACLENgth and the qualifier is set to LESSthan MOREthan EQual UNEQual LESSEQual or MOREEQual this command specifies the 16 bit value to trigger on When the qualifier is set to INrange or OUTrange this command specifies the lower l...

Page 805: ... When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to QTAG this command specifies the 32 bit Q Tag value to trigger on The default is all X s don t care The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR ENET Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet QTAG VALue QString TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet QTAG VALue Related Commands TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERne...

Page 806: ...e Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable characters are 0 1 and X The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant bits leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged Examples TRIGger A BUS B1 ETHERnet TCPHeader ACKnum VALue XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX00001000 sets the acknowledgement number to be used in the trigger to hexadecimal XXXXXX08 TRIG...

Page 807: ... upper bits unchanged Examples TRIGger A BUS B1 ETHERnet TCPHeader DESTinationport VALue XXXXXXXX00100010 would set the destination port address value that is to be used in the trigger to hexadecimal XX22 TRIGger A BUS B1 ETHERnet TCPHeader DESTinationport VALue might return XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TRIGger A B BUS B x ETHERnet TCPHeader SEQnum VALue When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to TCPHeader...

Page 808: ...ort VALue When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to TCPHeader this command specifies the 16 bit source port address that is to be used in the trigger along with the destination port address the sequence number and the acknowledgement number The default is all X s don t care The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR ENET Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax...

Page 809: ...ay CONDition SOF FRAMEType IDentifier CYCLEcount HEADer DATa IDANDDATA EOF ERRor TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray CONDition Arguments SOF sets the trigger condition to start of frame FRAMEType sets the trigger condition to frame type IDentifier sets the trigger condition to identifier CYCLEcount sets the trigger condition to cycle count HEADer sets the trigger condition to header DATa sets the trigger ...

Page 810: ...GGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE 110010 sets the cycle count high value to 110010 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX indicating the cycle count high value is don t care TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray CYCLEcount QUALifier This command specifies the qualifier not in range out of range to use when triggering on the FlexRay ...

Page 811: ...GER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating that the cycle count qualifier is set to EQUAL TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray CYCLEcount VALue This command specifies the low value when triggering on the FlexRay bus cycle count field Use TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue to set the upper value The trigger condition must be set to CYCLEcount using TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray CON...

Page 812: ...guments QString is a quoted string that is the binary data high value Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE 11001101XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX1 sets the binary data string high value to 11001101XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX...

Page 813: ... not in range out of range to use when triggering on the FlexRay bus data field The trigger condition needs to be set to ID or IDANDDATA using TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray CONDition The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray DATa QUALifier LESSthan MOREthan EQual UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual IN...

Page 814: ...number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray DATa SIZe NR1 TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray DATa SIZe Arguments NR1 is the FlexRay data string length in bytes Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 8 sets the data string size to 8 bytes TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 F...

Page 815: ...hen triggering on the FlexRay bus EOF field The trigger condition needs to be set to EOF using TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray CONDition The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray EOFTYPE STATic DYNAMic ANY TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray EOFTYPE Arguments STATic specifies triggering on the STATIC en...

Page 816: ...r type to SYNCFrame STARTupnosync sets the error type to STARTupnosync NULLFRStatic sets the error type to NULLFRStatic NULLFRDynamic sets the error type to NULLFRDynamic Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE SYNCFRAME sets the trigger type is SYNCFRAME TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER indicating the FlexRay trigger type is CRCHeader TRIG...

Page 817: ...ger condition needs to be set to IDentifier using TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray CONDition The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID QUALifier LESSthan MOREthan EQual UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID QUALifier Arguments LESSthan sets the f...

Page 818: ... and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID VALue QString TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID VALue Arguments QString is a quoted string that is the FlexRay frame ID low value Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE 11001100101 sets the frame ID value to 11001100101 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID V...

Page 819: ...mand specifies the CRC portion of the binary header string when triggering on the FlexRay bus signal The trigger condition needs to be set to HEADer using TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray CONDition The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray HEADER CRC QString TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray HEADER CRC...

Page 820: ... A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT 110010 sets the cycle count to 110010 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX indicating the cycle count is don t care TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID This command specifies the frame ID portion of the binary header string when triggering on the FlexRay bus header The trigger condition ...

Page 821: ...ger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray HEADER INDBits QString TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray HEADER INDBits Arguments QString is a quoted string that is the indicator bits portion of the binary header string Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS 11001 sets the indicator bits portion of the header string to 11001 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ...

Page 822: ... 10 bit The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR EMBD Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 ADDR10 TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C ADDRess MODe Arguments ADDR7 specifies the 7 bit I2C address mode ADDR10 specifies the 10 bit I2C address mode Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR10 sets the I2C address mode to 10 bit...

Page 823: ...to XXXXXXX TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C CONDition This command specifies the trigger condition for an I2C trigger The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR EMBD Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C CONDition STARt STOP REPEATstart ACKMISS ADDRess DATa ADDRANDDATA TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C CONDition Arguments STARt specifies a search based on s...

Page 824: ...x I2C DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C DATa DIRection Arguments READ specifies read as the data direction WRITE specifies write as the data direction NOCARE specifies either as the data direction Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA DIRECTION WRITE specifies write as the I2C data direction TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA DIRECTION might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA DIRECTION NO...

Page 825: ... bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR EMBD Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C DATa VALue QString TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C DATa VALue Arguments QString is the binary data string where the number of bits is 8 times the number of bytes specified The only allowed characters in the string are 0 1 and X Examples TRIGger A BUS B1 I2C DATa VA...

Page 826: ...ger condition to sleep ERRor sets the LIN trigger condition to error Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION ERROR sets the LIN trigger condition to error TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD indicating the LIN trigger condition is sync field TRIGger A B BUS B x LIN DATa HIVALue This command specifies the high data value string used for a LIN bus tri...

Page 827: ...res the SR AUTO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x LIN DATa QUALifier LESSthan MOREthan EQual UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange TRIGger A B BUS B x LIN DATa QUALifier Arguments LESSthan sets the LIN data qualifier to less than MOREthan sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than EQual sets the LIN data qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the LIN dat...

Page 828: ...s NR1 is the size of the data string in bytes Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 8 sets the data size to 8 bytes TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 1 indicating the data size is 1 byte TRIGger A B BUS B x LIN DATa VALue This command specifies the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger condition if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA The bus numb...

Page 829: ...NC PARity CHecksum TRIGger A B BUS B x LIN ERRTYPE Arguments SYNC sets the LIN error type to SYNC PARity sets the LIN error type to parity CHecksum sets the LIN error type to checksum Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE CHECKSUM sets the LIN error type to checksum TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC indicating the LIN error type is SYNC TRIGger A B BUS B x...

Page 830: ...ber is specified by x The trigger condition must be set to COMMAND and the address qualifier must be INrange or OUTrange Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B COMMAND ADDRess HIVALue QString TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B COMMAND ADDRess HIVALue Arguments QString is the address value Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B CO...

Page 831: ...ing that the address qualifier is set to equal TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B COMMAND ADDRess VALue This command sets or queries the low value when triggering on command word addresses for a MIL STD 1553 bus The bus number is specified by x The trigger condition must be set to COMMAND Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553...

Page 832: ... the value to X1000 TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B COMMAND COUNT might return XXXXX indicating that the value is XXXXX TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B COMMAND PARity This command sets or queries the value of the command word parity bit for a MIL STD 1553 bus to triggering on The bus number is specified by x The trigger condition must be set to COMMAND Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysi...

Page 833: ...st be set to COMMAND Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B COMMAND SUBADdress QString TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B COMMAND SUBADdress Arguments QString is the subaddress value Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B COMMAND SUBADDRESS X1000 sets the value to X1000 TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B COMMAND SUBADDRESS might return XX...

Page 834: ... MIL STD 1553 bus to trigger on The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B CONDition SYNC COMMAND STATus DATA TIMe ERRor TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B CONDition Arguments SYNC specifies triggering on the sync pulse of any word COMMAND specifies triggering on a matching command word STATus spe...

Page 835: ...t has a value of 0 NOCARE disables filtering of data words on the parity bit Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B DATA PARITY ONE specifies filtering data words for those where the parity bit has the value 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B DATA PARITY might return NOCARE indicating that data words are not being filtered based on the parity bit value TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B DATa VALue This command set...

Page 836: ...cifies triggering on an incorrectly calculated parity bit in any word SYNC specifies triggering on any sync pulse that does not transition in the middle of the pulse as required DATA specifies triggering on any non contiguous data words Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B ERRTYPE DATA specifies triggering on non contiguous data words TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B ERRTYPE might return PARITY indicating ...

Page 837: ...g on status word addresses for a MIL STD 1553 bus The bus number is specified by x The trigger condition must be set to STATus Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B STATus ADDRess QUALifier EQual UNEQual LESSthan MOREthan LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B STATus ADDRess QUALifier Argumen...

Page 838: ...the available address qualifiers Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B STATUS ADDRESS QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the address qualifier to less than TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B STATUS ADDRESS QUALIFIER might return EQUAL indicating that the address qualifier is set to equal TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B STATus ADDRess VALue This command sets or queries the low value when triggering on status word addresses ...

Page 839: ...BIT BCR Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the BCR bit has a value of 1 ZERo filters status words to only match those where the BCR bit has a value of 0 NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the BCR bit Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B STATUS BIT BCR ONE specifies filtering status words for those where the BCR bit has a value of 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B STATUS...

Page 840: ...lue of the dynamic bus control acceptance bit DBCA bit bit 18 in a status word for a MIL STD 1553 bus to triggering on The bus number is specified by x The trigger condition must be set to STATus Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B STATus BIT DBCA ONE ZERo NOCARE TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B STATus BIT DBCA Arguments...

Page 841: ...TR bit has a value of 0 NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the INSTR bit Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B STATUS BIT INSTR ONE specifies filtering status words for those where the INSTR bit has a value of 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B STATUS BIT INSTR might return NOCARE indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the INSTR bit value TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B STATus B...

Page 842: ...us Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B STATus BIT SRQ ONE ZERo NOCARE TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B STATus BIT SRQ Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the SRQ bit has a value of 1 ZERo filters status words to only match those where the SRQ bit has a value of 0 NOCARE disables filtering of stat...

Page 843: ... STATUS BIT SUBSF might return NOCARE indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the SUBSF bit value TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B STATus BIT TF This command sets or queries the value of the terminal flag bit TF bit bit 19 in a status word for a MIL STD 1553 bus to triggering on The bus number is specified by x The trigger condition must be set to STATus Conditions Requires the SR...

Page 844: ...53B STATus PARity Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the parity bit has a value of 1 ZERo filters status words to only match those where the parity bit has a value of 0 NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the parity bit Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B STATUS PARITY ONE specifies filtering status words for those where the parity bit has a value of 1 TRIGGER A B...

Page 845: ...s the upper limit to be used when triggering on response time inter message gap time for a MIL STD 1553 bus The bus number is specified by x The trigger condition must be set to TIMe Conditions Requires the SR AERO Triggering and Analysis application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B TIMe MORELimit NR3 TRIGger A B BUS B x MIL1553B TIMe MORELimit Related Commands TRIGger A B BUS B x...

Page 846: ... MIL1553B TIMe MORELimit Arguments Arguments are the available comparison qualifiers Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B TIME QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the time comparison qualifier to less than TRIGGER A BUS B1 MIL1553B TIME QUALIFIER might return OUTRANGE indicating that the qualifier is set to out of range comparison TRIGger A B BUS B x PARallel DATa VALue This command specifies the binary data st...

Page 847: ...n condition to Start EOp sets the Trigger on condition to End of Packet DATa sets the Trigger on condition to Data PARItyerror sets the Trigger on condition to Parity Error Examples TRIGger A BUS B1 RS232C CONDition DATA sets the trigger on condition to data TRIGger A BUS B1 RS232C CONDition might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C CONDITION START indicating start is the trigger condition TRIGger A B ...

Page 848: ...ditions Requires the SR COMP Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x RS232C DATa VALue QString TRIGger A B BUS B x RS232C DATa VALue Arguments QString specifies the address value The argument is a string of 0 1 or X representing a binary number Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C DATA VALUE 011XX11 sets the data address string used for the RS 232 bus trigge...

Page 849: ...er condition to Master In Slave Out and Master Out Slave In TRIGger A B BUS B x SPI DATa SIZe This command specifies the length of the data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger condition is DATa The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR COMP Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x SPI DATa SIZe NR1 TRIGger A B BUS B x SPI ...

Page 850: ...ets the data value to 11011010 TRIGger A BUS B1 SPI DATa VALue might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the data value is XXXXXXXX TRIGger A B BUS B x USB ADDRess HIVALue This command specifies the binary address string for the upper limit for inside of range and outside of range qualifiers for the USB trigger Use the command TRIGger A B BUS B x USB ADDRess VALue to set the...

Page 851: ...he SR USB2 Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x USB ADDRess VALue QString TRIGger A B BUS B x USB ADDRess VALue Related Commands TRIGger A B BUS B x USB CONDition Arguments QString within the range 0000000 to 1111111 00 hex to 7F hex Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB ADDRESS VALUE 0001000 sets the binary address to 0001000 08 hex TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB ADDR...

Page 852: ...ndshake packet SPECIALPacket indicates triggering on a special status packet ERRor indicates triggering on an error condition Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB CONDITION TOKENPACKET sets the trigger condition to be a token packet TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB CONDITION SYNC which indicates that the trigger condition is a sync field TRIGger A B BUS B x USB DATa HIVALu...

Page 853: ... that the upper limit is 01111111 7F hex TRIGger A B BUS B x USB DATa OFFSet This command specifies the data offset in bytes to trigger on The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR USB2 Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x USB DATa OFFSet NR1 TRIGger A B BUS B x USB DATa OFFSet Related Commands TRIGger A B BUS B x USB CONDition Argum...

Page 854: ... specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to OUTrange specifies the qualifier as Out of Range UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Not Equal to LESSthan specifies the qualifier as Less Than MOREthan specifies the qualifier as More Than Examples TRIGger A BUS B1 USB DATa QUALifier LESSTHAN sets the qualifier to less than TRIGger A BUS B1...

Page 855: ... USB2 Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x USB DATa TYPe ANY DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 MDATA TRIGger A B BUS B x USB DATa TYPe Related Commands TRIGger A B BUS B x USB CONDition Arguments ANY indicates either a DATA0 or DATA1 data packet type DATA0 indicates a DATA0 data packet type DATA1 indicates a DATA1 data packet type DATA2 indicates a DATA2 data packet ...

Page 856: ... VALUE 00001000 sets the binary address to 00001000 08 hex TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB DATA VALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB DATA VALUE 01000000 which indicates that the binary address is 0100000 40 hex TRIGger A B BUS B x USB ENDPoint VALue This command specifies the binary endpoint string to be used for the USB trigger The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR USB2 Serial Trigg...

Page 857: ...TSTUFFing TRIGger A B BUS B x USB ERRType Related Commands TRIGger A B BUS B x USB CONDition Arguments PID indicates the error type is set to packet ID CRC5 indicates the error type is set to 5 bit CRC CRC16 indicates the error type is set to 16 bit CRC BITSTUFFing indicates the error type is set to bit stuffing Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB ERRTYPE PID sets the error trigger condition to packet I...

Page 858: ...hake type as No response Yet 0110 Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB HANDSHAKETYPE ACK sets the handshake type to acknowledgement TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB HANDSHAKETYPE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB HANDSHAKETYPE STALL indicating that the handshake type is set to stall TRIGger A B BUS B x USB SOFFRAMENUMber This command specifies the binary data string to be used for start of frame number when the trig...

Page 859: ...Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x USB SPECIALType ANY ERROr PING PREamble RESERVed SPLit TRIGger A B BUS B x USB SPECIALType Related Commands TRIGger A B BUS B x USB CONDition Arguments ANY specifies the PID value as Any XX00 ERROr specifies the PID value as ERR 1100 PING specifies the PID value as PING 0100 PREamble specifies the PID value as PRE ...

Page 860: ...oint type BULK bulk endpoint type BULK IN or BULK OUT INTERRUPT interrupt endpoint type Interrupt IN Examples TRIGger A BUS B1 USB SPLit ET VALue iso sets the endpoint type to trigger on to isochronous TRIGger A BUS B1 USB SPLit ET VALue might return BULK indicating that the bulk endpoint type has been specified to trigger on TRIGger A B BUS B x USB SPLit HUB VALue When triggering on a high speed ...

Page 861: ...plit transaction port address value to trigger on The trigger condition must be set to Special with a packet type SPLIT The value can be up to 7 characters long The default is all X s don t care The bus number is specified by x Conditions Requires the SR USB2 Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x USB SPLit PORT VALue QString TRIGger A B BUS B x USB SPL...

Page 862: ...A B BUS B x USB SPECIALType Arguments NOCARE trigger on either the start or complete phase of the split transaction SSPLIT trigger on the start phase of the split transaction CSPLIT trigger on the complete phase of the split transaction Examples TRIGger A BUS B1 USB SPLit SC VALue SSPLIT specifies to trigger on the start phase of the split transaction TRIGger A BUS B1 USB SPLit SC VALue might indi...

Page 863: ...d to Full speed Data Relation 0 0 High speed data is the middle of the full speed data payload 0 1 High speed data is the end of the full speed data payload 1 0 High speed data is the beginning of the full speed data payload 1 1 High speed data is all of the full speed data payload Conditions Requires the SR USB2 Serial Triggering and Analysis Application Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B BUS B x U...

Page 864: ...SOF OUT IN SETUP TRIGger A B BUS B x USB TOKENType Related Commands TRIGger A B BUS B x USB CONDition Arguments ANY indicates any of the token types SOF indicates a SOF start of frame token type OUT indicates an OUT token type IN indicates an IN token type SETUP indicates a SETUP token type Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB TOKENTYPE SETUP sets the token type to SETUP TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB TOKENTYPE mi...

Page 865: ...DGE SLOpe Arguments DC selects DC trigger coupling which passes all input signals to the trigger circuitry HFRej coupling attenuates signals above 50 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry LFRej coupling attenuates signals below 80 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry NOISErej coupling provides stable triggering by increasing the trigger hysteresis Increased hys...

Page 866: ...ger slope to positive which triggers on the rising edge of the signal TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE might return TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE FALL indicating that the A edge trigger slope is negative TRIGger A B EDGE SOUrce This command sets or queries the source for the edge trigger For instruments that have an Auxiliary Input such as the MSO58LP AUXiliary can be selected as trigger source Group Trigger Syntax TR...

Page 867: ...Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B LEVel CH x NR3 TRIGger A B LEVel CH x Arguments NR3 specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts Examples TRIGGER A LEVEL CH1 1 5 sets the A trigger level for Channel 1 to 1 5 V TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 might return TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 1 3000E 00 indicating that the A trigger level for Channel 2 is set to 1 3 V TRIGger A B LOGIc DELTatime This command specifi...

Page 868: ...specifies to trigger if all conditions are true NANd specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are false NOR specifies to trigger if all conditions are false OR specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are true Examples TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION AND sets the logical combination of channels to be true when all conditions are true TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION might return TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTIO...

Page 869: ...larity for the clock channel when Use Clock Edge is set to Yes for Logic trigger type Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B LOGIc POLarity POSitive NEGative EITher TRIGger A B LOGIc POLarity Arguments NEGative specifies negative polarity POSITIVe specifies positive polarity EITher specifies either polarity Examples TRIGger A LOGIc POLarity EITHER sets the polarity to either positive or negative TRIGger...

Page 870: ...tion from the Logic Pattern drop down list Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B LOGIc WHEn TRUe FALSe MOREThan LESSThan EQual UNEQual TRIGger A B LOGIc WHEn Arguments TRUe triggers on an input pattern that is true FALSe triggers on an input pattern that is false MOREthan triggers on an input pattern that is true for a time period greater than a user defined Time Limit DELTatime value LESSthan triggers...

Page 871: ...t care state Examples TRIGger A LOGICPattern CH1 HIGH specifies triggering on a logic high TRIGger A LOGICPattern CH1 might return TRIGGER A LOGICPATTERN CH1 X indicating a don t care state for channel 1 TRIGger A LOGICPattern CH1_D0 HIGH specifies a logic high TRIGger A LOGICPattern CH1_D0 might return TRIGGER A LOGICPATTERN CH1_D0 X indicating a don t care TRIGger A B LOWerthreshold CH x This co...

Page 872: ... Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B PULSEWidth HIGHLimit NR3 TRIGger A B PULSEWidth HIGHLimit Related Commands TRIGger A B PULSEWidth WHEn TRIGger A B PULSEWidth LOWLimit Arguments NR3 is a floating point number that represents the higher value of the range Examples TRIGger A PULSEWidth HIGHLimit 110 0E 9 sets the high limit to 110 0 ns TRIGger A PULSEWidth HIGHLimit might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDT...

Page 873: ...it to specify the upper limit of the range This command also specifies the single limit to use in seconds when triggering on detection of a pulse whose duration is less than greater than equal to or not equal to this time limit Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B PULSEWidth LOWLimit NR3 TRIGger A B PULSEWidth LOWLimit Related Commands TRIGger A B PULSEWidth WHEn TRIGger A B PULSEWidth HIGHLimit Argum...

Page 874: ...Arguments CH x specifies an analog input channel as the pulse width trigger source CH x _D y specifies an digital input channel as the pulse width trigger source Examples TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the pulse width source TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH1 indicating that channel 1 is the pulse width trigger source TRIGger A B PULSEWidth ...

Page 875: ...not equal the time period specified in TRIGger A B PULSEWidth LOWLimit within a 5 tolerance WIThin causes a trigger when a pulse is detected that is within a range set by two values OUTside causes a trigger when a pulse is detected that is outside of a range set by two values Examples TRIGger B PULSEWidth WHEn LESSthan causes the oscilloscope to trigger when a pulse is detected that is shorter tha...

Page 876: ...her NEGative POSitive TRIGger A B RUNT POLarity Arguments POSitive indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling edge recrosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high threshold NEGative indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the rising edge recrosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the low threshold EIThe...

Page 877: ...ies the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it detects a runt Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B RUNT WHEn LESSthan MOREthan EQual UNEQual OCCURS TRIGger A B RUNT WHEn Related Commands TRIGger A B RUNT WIDth Arguments OCCURS argument specifies a trigger event if a runt of any detectable width occurs LESSthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with w...

Page 878: ...h TRIGger A B RUNT WIDth This command specifies the width in seconds for a runt trigger Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B RUNT WIDth NR3 TRIGger A B RUNT WIDth Related Commands TRIGger A B RUNT WHEn Arguments NR3 is a floating point number that specifies the minimum width in seconds Examples TRIGger A RUNT WIDth 15E 6 sets the minimum width of the pulse runt trigger to 15 µs TRIGger A RUNT WIDth mi...

Page 879: ...d CLOCk SOUrce CH x CH x _D y TRIGger A B SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Arguments CH x specifies the analog channel to use as the clock source waveform CH x _D y specifies the digital channel to use as the clock source waveform Examples TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce CH1 specifies channel 1 as the clock source for a setup and hold trigger operation TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce might return TRIGGER A SETH...

Page 880: ...ng This command is equivalent to selecting Setup Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the desired Setup Time Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B SETHold SETTime NR3 TRIGger A B SETHold SETTime Arguments NR3 is a floating point number that specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering Examples TRIGger A SETHold SETTime 3 0E 6 specifies that the current setup time for setup...

Page 881: ...annel in the configuration TRIGger A SETHOLDLogicval CH1_D0 include specifies including the specified channel in the setup and hold trigger input configuration TRIGger A SETHOLDLogicval CH1_D0 might return TRIGGER A SETHOLDLOGICVAL CH1_D0 DONTINCLUDE indicating the channel will not be included in the configuration TRIGger A B TIMEOut LOGICQUALification This command specifies whether or not to use ...

Page 882: ...e signal stays low during the timeout time specified by the command TRIGger A B TIMEOut TIMe EITher Trigger when the signal is either high or low during the timeout time specified by the command TRIGger A B TIMEOut TIMe Examples TRIGger A TIMEOut POLarity STAYSHigh specifies to trigger when the signal stays high during the timeout time when triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type TRIGger A TIMEO...

Page 883: ...as been set as the source for the timeout trigger TRIGger A B TIMEOut TIMe When triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type this command specifies the timeout time in seconds This command is equivalent to selecting Timeout from the Trig menu and setting a value for Time Limit The timeout trigger type is selected using TRIGger A B TYPe TIMEOut Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B TIMEOut TIMe NR3 TRIGger...

Page 884: ...DELTATIME 2 0000E 09 indicating that the delta time of the transition trigger is set to 2 ns TRIGger A B TRANsition LOGICQUALification This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a transition trigger Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A B TRANsition LOGICQUALification ON OFF TRIGger A B TRANsition LOGICQUALification Arguments ON specifies that the transition trigger type uses lo...

Page 885: ...ther positive or negative polarity Examples TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the transition polarity to negative TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY EITHER indicating that the polarity can be either positive or negative TRIGger A B TRANsition SOUrce This command specifies the source waveform for a transition trigger NOTE Digital channels are not supp...

Page 886: ...signal transition time is slower than the time set by TRIGger A TRANsition DELTatime EQual sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is equal to the time set by TRIGger A TRANsition DELTatime UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is not equal to the time set by TRIGger A TRANsition DELTatime Examples TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN SLOWER sets the trigger to o...

Page 887: ...cifies that a trigger occurs when a signal is found that meets the setup and hold parameters Transition specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified pulse is found that meets the transition trigger parameters BUS specifies that a trigger occurs when a signal is found that meets the specified bus setup parameters Examples TRIGGER A TYPE EDGE sets the A trigger type to EDGE TRIGGER A TYPE might ...

Page 888: ...En is INSIDEGreater the instrument triggers when the signal remains between the upper and lower thresholds for longer than the time limit TRIGger A B WINdow WIDTH and then exits through the lower threshold If TRIGger A B WINdow WHEn is OUTSIDEGreater the instrument triggers when the signal remains below the lower threshold for longer than the time limit TRIGger A B WINdow WIDTH and then crosses up...

Page 889: ... TRIGger A B WINdow LOGICQUALification ON OFF TRIGger A B WINdow LOGICQUALification Arguments ON specifies that the window trigger type uses logic qualification OFF specifies that the window trigger type does not use logic qualification Examples TRIGger A WINdow LOGICQUALification ON turns on logic qualification TRIGger A WINdow LOGICQUALification might return TRIGGER A WINDOW LOGICQUALIFICATION O...

Page 890: ...Width INSIDEGreater specifies a trigger event when the signal enters the window defined by the threshold levels for the time specified by Width ENTERSWindow specifies a trigger event when the signal enters the window defined by the threshold levels EXITSWindow specifies a trigger event when the signal leaves the window defined by the threshold levels Examples TRIGger A WINdow WHEn EXITSWINDOW spec...

Page 891: ...her user specified time TIMe or by an internally calculated random time value RANDom This command is equivalent to selecting Mode Holdoff from the Trig menu and then setting the Holdoff type Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A HOLDoff BY TIMe RANDom TRIGger A HOLDoff BY Related Commands TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe Arguments TIMe enables you to set the holdoff time via the TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe command RAND...

Page 892: ...off time to 10 s TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME might return TRIGGER A HOLDOFFTIME 1 2000E 06 indicating that the A trigger holdoff time is set to 1 2 µs TRIGger A LOGICQUALification This command sets or queries the type of logic qualification to perform Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A LOGICQUALification AND OR NAND NOR TRIGger A LOGICQUALification Arguments AND specifies to trigger if all conditions are t...

Page 893: ...pecified time period NORMal waits for a valid trigger event Examples TRIGGER A MODE NORMAL sets the trigger mode to normal TRIGGER A MODE might return TRIGGER A MODE AUTO indicating that the trigger mode is auto TRIGger AUXLevel For those instruments that have an Auxiliary Input such as an MSO58LP this command sets or queries the Auxiliary Input voltage level to use for an edge trigger Group Trigg...

Page 894: ...f events is specified by TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TIMe sets the B trigger to occur a set time after the A trigger event The time period is specified by TRIGger B TIMe Examples TRIGGER B BY TIME sets the B trigger to occur at a set time after the A trigger event TRIGGER B BY might return TRIGGER B BY EVENTS indicating that the B trigger takes place following a set number of trigger events after the A...

Page 895: ...er Syntax TRIGger B RESET SETLevel Arguments SETLevel sets the B reset trigger level to 50 Examples TRIGger B RESET SETLevel sets the B reset trigger level to 50 TRIGger B RESET EDGE COUPling Sets or queries the trigger coupling for a sequential edge trigger reset when the Source is set to an analog channel Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger B RESET EDGE COUPling DC HFRej LFRej NOISErej TRIGger B RESET ...

Page 896: ...EDGE LEVEL 50 0e 3 sets the level to 50 0 mV TRIGGER B RESET EDGE LEVEL might return TRIGGER B RESET EDGE LEVEL 0 0E 0 indicating the level is set to 0 0 V TRIGger B RESET EDGE SLOpe This command sets or queries the trigger slope for a sequential edge trigger reset Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger B RESET EDGE SLOpe RISe FALL EITher TRIGger B RESET EDGE SLOpe Arguments RISe specifies to reset the trig...

Page 897: ... CH4 sets Channel 4 as the input source for the trigger reset TRIGGER B RESET EDGE SOURCE might return TRIGGER B RESET EDGE SOURCE CH1 indicating that the current input source for the trigger reset is Channel 1 TRIGger B RESET TIMEOut TIMe This command sets or queries the reset timer for a sequential timeout trigger reset Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger B RESET TIMEOut TIMe NR3 TRIGger B RESET TIMEOu...

Page 898: ... RESET TYPe Arguments NONe defeats the trigger reset feature TIMEOut initiates a reset if the timeout conditions specified by TRIGger B RESET TIMEOut are met EDGE initiates a reset if the edge trigger conditions are met Examples TRIGGER B RESET TYPE NONE deactivates the sequential trigger reset TRIGGER B RESET TYPE This query might return TRIGGER B RESET TYPe TIMEOUT indicating that the sequential...

Page 899: ...causes trigger events TRIGger B TIMe This command sets or queries B trigger delay time in seconds The B Trigger time applies only if TRIGger B BY is set to TIMe Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger B TIMe NR3 TRIGger B TIMe Related Commands TRIGger B BY TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TRIGger B STATE Arguments NR3 is the B trigger delay time in seconds Examples TRIGGER B TIME 4E 6 sets the B trigger delay time to ...

Page 900: ...cquiring data TRIGGER indicates that the instrument triggered and is acquiring the post trigger information Examples TRIGGER STATE might return TRIGGER STATE ARMED indicating that the pretrigger data is being acquired TST Query Only Tests self test the interface and returns a 0 Group Miscellaneous Syntax TST Examples TST always returns 0 UNDO No Query Form Reverts the instrument settings to a stat...

Page 901: ...nt panel buttons and knobs are unlocked Examples UNLOCK ALL unlocks all front panel buttons and knobs USBDevice CONFigure This command may be used to configure the rear USB port to be off or enabled as a USBTMC device Users should be cautious using this command via the USBTMC interface as a change to the configuration of this interface from a USBTMC device will cause USBTMC communication to cease ...

Page 902: ...hich returns minimum length keywords for applicable setting queries ON sets the Verbose state to true which returns full length keywords for applicable setting queries A 0 returns minimum length keywords for applicable setting queries any other value returns full length keywords Examples VERBOSE ON sets the Verbose state to true and return the full length keyword for the applicable setting queries...

Page 903: ...u can specify when the propagation delay of the target FROM probe used for deskew cannot be detected automatically Examples VERTICAL DESKEW FROM CUSTOMPROPAGATION 0 25e 9 sets the custom delay to 250 ps VERTICAL DESKEW FROM CUSTOMPROPAGATION might return VERTICAL DESKEW FROM CUSTOMPROPAGATION 0 0E 0 indicating the custom delay is 0 0 s VERTical DESKEW FROM SOUrce This command sets or queries the s...

Page 904: ...ettings VERTical DESKew TO CUSTOMPROPAgation This command sets or queries a target TO delay that can be specified by the user when the propagation delay of the target TO probe used for deskew cannot be detected automatically Group Vertical Syntax VERTical DESKew TO CUSTOMPROPAgation NR3 Arguments NR3 is a target TO delay that can be specified by the user when the propagation delay of the target TO...

Page 905: ...y Form The WAI Wait command no query form prevents the instrument from executing further commands or queries until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your application program For more information refer to Synchronization Methods Group Status and Error Syntax WAI Related Commands BUSY OPC Example...

Page 906: ...Ta SOUrce command The preamble components are considered to be of two types formatting and interpretation The formatting components are ENCdg BN_Fmt BYT_Or BYT_Nr BIT_Nr The interpretation components are derived from the DATa SOUrce specified waveform Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMOutpre Examples WFMOUTPRE might return the waveform formatting data as WFMOUTPRE BYT_NR 2 BIT_NR 16 ENCDG BINARY B...

Page 907: ...t might return WFMOUTPRE ASC_FMT INTEGER indicating the ASCII format is integer WFMOutpre BIT_Nr This command sets and queries the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms contain as specified by the DATa SOUrce command Note that values will be constrained according to the underlying waveform data This specification is only meaningful when WFMOutpre ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMOutp...

Page 908: ...Examples WFMOUTPRE BN_FMT FP specifies that outgoing waveform data will be in single precision binary floating point format WFMOUTPRE BN_FMT might return WFMOUTPRE BN_FMT RI indicating that the outgoing waveform data is currently in signed integer format WFMOutpre BYT_Nr This command sets or queries the binary field data width bytes per point for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command N...

Page 909: ...rm data transfer when data points require more than one byte This specification only has meaning when WFMOutpre ENCdg is set to BIN Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMOutpre BYT_Or LSB MSB WFMOutpre BYT_Or Related Commands WFMOutpre ENCdg Arguments LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be transmitted first MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be transmitted first Examples ...

Page 910: ...to be in ASCII format Waveforms internally stored as integers will be sent as NR1 numbers while those stored as floating point will be sent as NR3 numbers BINary specifies that outgoing data is to be in a binary format whose further specification is determined by WFMOutpre BYT_Nr WFMOutpre BIT_Nr WFMOutpre BN_Fmt and WFMOutpre BYT_Or Examples WFMOUTPRE ENCDG ASCii specifies that the outgoing wavef...

Page 911: ...ing to the CURVe data points An error is reported if the DATa SOUrce waveform does not exist Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMOutpre PT_Fmt Related Commands CURVe DATa SOUrce Examples WFMOUTPRE PT_FMT might return WFMOutpre PT_Fmt ENV indicating that the waveform data is a series of min max pairs WFMOutpre PT_Off Query Only This query only command returns the trigger point relative to DATa STARt ...

Page 912: ...ption Examples Source The source identification string as it appears in the front panel scale factor readouts CH1 8 Math x Ref x Coupling A string describing the vertical coupling of the waveform the Source1 waveform in the case of Dual Waveform Math AC coupling DC coupling GND coupling Vert Scale A string containing the vertical scale factor of the unzoomed waveform The numeric portion will alway...

Page 913: ...This query only command returns the horizontal point spacing in units of WFMOutpre XUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command This value corresponds to the sampling interval An error is reported if the DATa SOUrce waveform does not exist Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMOutpre XINcr Related Commands DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre XUNit Examples WFMOUTPRE XINCR might return WFMOUTPRE XINCR...

Page 914: ...g on a regular basis this is the only part of the preamble that changes on each acquisition Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMOutpre XZEro Related Commands DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre XUNit Examples WFMOUTPRE XZERO might return WFMOUTPRE XZERO 5 6300E 9 indicating that the trigger actually occurred 5 63 ns before the trigger sample WFMOutpre YMUlt Query Only This query only command returns the vertical ...

Page 915: ... value An error is reported if the DATa SOUrce waveform does not exist Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMOutpre YOFf Related Commands DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre BYT_Nr Examples WFMOUTPRE YOFF might return WFMOUTPRE YOFF 50 0000E 0 indicating that the position indicator for the waveform was 50 digitizing levels 2 divisions below center screen WFMOutpre YUNit Query Only This query only command returns th...

Page 916: ...ure from previous instruments where the VZEro value represented the vertical position in vertical units and the VOFf value represented the vertical offset in digitizing levels For this instrument family the value of YOFf is always 0 0 An error is reported if the DATa SOUrce waveform does not exist Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMOutpre YZEro Related Commands DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre YUNit Examples ...

Page 917: ... Register SRER Status Registers The Standard Event Status Register SESR and the Status Byte Register SBR record certain types of events that may occur while the oscilloscope is in use IEEE Std 488 2 1987 defines these registers Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event such as an execution error or message available When an event of a given type occurs the oscilloscope sets ...

Page 918: ...ollowing an OPC command The Status Byte Register SBR Records whether output is available in the Output Queue whether the oscilloscope requests service and whether the SESR has recorded any events Use a Serial Poll or the STB query to read the contents of the SBR The bits in the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR the Event Status Enable Register ESER and the Output Queue ...

Page 919: ...s not recorded Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers The Enable Registers and the commands used to set them are described below The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER This register controls which types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event Queue The bits in the DESER correspond to those in the SESR Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER U...

Page 920: ... 5 in the SRER Subsequent power on cycles will generate a Service Request Queues The PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power on Sending PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows Output Queue The oscilloscope stores query responses in the Output Queue and empties this queue each time it receives a new command or query message after an EOM The controller must read a ...

Page 921: ...it from the queue Before reading an event from the Event Queue you must use the ESR query to read the summary of the event from the SESR This makes the events summarized by the ESR read available to the EVENT and EVMSG queries and empties the SESR Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous ESR reads but not read from the Event Queue Events that follow an ESR read are put i...

Page 922: ...SR is set to one and the event is recorded in the Event Queue 2 If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled 3 then the ESB bit in the SBR is set to one 4 When output is sent to the Output Queue the MAV bit in the SBR is set to one 5 When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER is enabled 6 the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is generated...

Page 923: ...below of commands that support this The following commands are used to synchronize the oscilloscope functions using Operation Complete See examples of how to use these commands later on in this section OPC sending the OPC command will set bit 0 of the SESR Standard Events Status Register The bit will only be set high when all pending operations that generate an OPC message have finished execution ...

Page 924: ...able 3 3 Oscilloscope operations that can generate OPC Command Conditions ACQuire STATE non zero NR1 ON RUN Only when in single sequence acquisition mode AUTOset EXECute CALibrate INTERNal CALibrate INTERNal STARt CALibrate FACtory STARt CALibrate FACtory CONTinue CALibrate FACtory PREVious CH x PRObe AUTOZero EXECute CH x PRObe DEGAUss EXECute DIAg STATE EXECute FACtory MEASUrement MEAS x RESUlts...

Page 925: ... MEAN The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time It may not finish before the oscilloscope takes an amplitude measurement see the following figure This can result in an incorrect amplitude value Figure 3 7 Command Processing Without Using Synchronization To ensure the oscilloscope completes waveform acquisition before taking the measurement on the acquired data you can synch...

Page 926: ... channel we re about to sequence MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC While serial poll 0 keep looping Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT MEAS1 RESUlts CURRentacq MEAN This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY Service Request Method Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event St...

Page 927: ...hat generates an OPC message is complete The OPC query does not return until all pending OPC operations have completed Therefore your time out must be set to a time at least as long as the longest expected time for the operations to complete The same command sequence using the OPC query for synchronization looks like this Set up single sequence acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CH1 S...

Page 928: ...orm data ACQUIRE STATE ON Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement WAI Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT MEAS1 RESUlts CURRentacq MEAN The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of the oscilloscope but the commands will not be processed by the oscilloscope until all in process OPC operations are complete If the input buffer becomes full the c...

Page 929: ...on which to measure REF ADDNEW REF1 Set up the measurement parameters on the reference MEASUrement MEAS1 TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUrement MEAS1 SOURCE REF1 Load the new waveform file RECALL WAVEFORM E waveform wfm REF1 OPC Wait for read from Output Queue Take amplitude measurement MEASUrement MEAS1 RESUlts CURRentacq MEAN Messages The information contained in the topics above covers all the programming ...

Page 930: ...improper syntax Check that the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules in the section on command Syntax Table 3 5 Command Error Messages CME Bit 5 Code Message 100 Command error 101 Invalid character 102 Syntax error 103 Invalid separator 104 Data type error 105 GET not allowed 108 Parameter not allowed 109 Missing parameter 110 Command header error 112 Program mnemonic too long 1...

Page 931: ...conflict 222 Data out of range 224 Illegal parameter value 241 Hardware missing 250 Mass storage error 251 Missing mass storage 252 Missing media 253 Corrupt media 254 Media full 255 Directory full 256 File name not found 257 File name error 258 Media protected 259 File name too long 280 Program error 282 Insufficient network printer information 283 Network printer not responding 284 Network print...

Page 932: ...9 Measurement error No valid edge No arm sample 2220 Measurement error No valid edge No arm cross 2221 Measurement error No valid edge No trigger cross 2222 Measurement error No valid edge No second cross 2223 Measurement error Waveform mismatch 2224 Measurement error WAIT calculating 2225 Measurement error No waveform to measure 2226 Measurement error Null Waveform 2227 Measurement error Positive...

Page 933: ...earch copy failed Device Error The following table lists the device errors that can occur during oscilloscope operation These errors may indicate that the oscilloscope needs repair Table 3 7 Device Error Messages DDE Bit 3 Code Message 310 System error 311 Memory error 312 PUD memory lost 314 Save recall memory lost System Event The following table lists the system event messages These messages ar...

Page 934: ...rror Preamble values are inconsistent 540 Measurement warning Uncertain edge 541 Measurement warning Low signal amplitude 542 Measurement warning Unstable histogram 543 Measurement warning Low resolution 544 Measurement warning Uncertain edge 545 Measurement warning Invalid in minmax 546 Measurement warning Need 3 edges 547 Measurement warning Clipping positive negative 548 Measurement warning Cli...

Page 935: ...egative 548 Measurement warning Clipping positive 549 Measurement warning Clipping negative Internal Warning The following table shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the oscilloscope Table 3 11 Internal Warning Messages Code Message 630 Internal warning 50Ω overload MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP Programmer 3 19 ...

Page 936: ...Status and Events 3 20 MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP Programmer ...

Page 937: ...Appendix A Character Set MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP Programmer A 1 ...

Page 938: ...Appendix A Character Set A 2 MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP Programmer ...

Page 939: ...UTOINCrement AUTORange AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT AUTOScale AUTOSet AUTOZero AUTOmatic AUXLevel AUXiliary AUXout AVAILable AVERage AVG AVPOSition AXPOSition AYPOSition B B0 B1 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BACKLight BACKWard BANDWidth BASE BASETop BASEline BASic BATHTUB BCR BDIFFBP BEGIN BELl BER BHPOSition BIN BINARY BIT BITAMPLITUDE BITCfgmode BITDelay BITEnd BITHI...

Page 940: ...ESKEW DEST DESTination DESTinationaddr DESTinationport DETECTPLEN DEVICEType DHCPbootp DIAg DIDT DIFF DIFFerential DIR DIRacmodel DIRection DISPLAYUnits DISabled DISplay DISplaymode DIVide DIVisions DJ DJDD DJDIRAC DMINus DNS DOMAINname DOMain DONTInclude DOTsonly DOUBLE DPLUs DRIve DUty DVDT DVM DYNAMIC DYNRange EDECAy EDGE EDGEIncre EDGES EDGEType EITHER ENABle ENCdg END ENDPoint ENET ENET100 EN...

Page 941: ...ue HIVALue HOLD HOLDTime HOLDoff HOMEDir HORDer HORIZontalscale HORZ HORZPOS HORZScale HORizontal HSOURce HTTPPort HUB HUNDREDBASETX HUNdred HYSTEREsis I2C I2S IBA2500 IBA_GEN2 ID IDANDDATA IDFORmat IDLE IDLETime IDentifier ILEVELAbs ILEVELPct IMAGe IMAGinary IMPEDance IN INCLUDEREFs INCLUde INDBits INDEPENDENT INFInite INFMAXimum INFMINimum INFPersist INIT INPUT INPUTSOurce INPut INSIDEGreater IN...

Page 942: ...EWIDTH NR1 NR2 NR3 NR_Pt NTIMES NULL NULLFRDynamic NULLFRStatic NUMACQs NUMACq NUMAVg NUMBins NUMFRAMESACQuired NUMSEQuence NUMber NWIDTH NWIDTTH NYET OC1 OC12 OC3 OC48 OCCURS ODD ODDEVen OFF OFFSet ON ONCE ONE ONEOVERDELTATVALUE ONFAIL OPPositeas OPTion OR OUT OUTPut OUTSIDEGreater OUTrange OUTside OVERLoad OVERRide OVErlay PACKET PALEtte PANKNOB PARItyerror PARallel PARity PASSWord PATLen PATTER...

Page 943: ...RISING RISe RISing RJ RJDD RJDIRAC RJDJ RMDir RMS ROLL ROSc RP RPBinary RS232C RUN RUNSTop RUNT RUNt RWINADDR RX SAME SAMESPLIT SAMEas SAMPLERate SAMPLEpoint SAMple SAS12_NOSSC SAS12_SSC SAS15_NOSSC SAS15_SSC SAS3_NOSSC SAS3_SSC SAS6_NOSSC SAS6_SSC SATA_GEN1 SATA_GEN2 SATA_GEN3 SAVEON SAVe SAVemask SC SCALE SCALERATio SCALe SCIentific SCREEN SDI SE SEARCH SEARCH1 SEARCHSource SEARCHtotrigger SEARC...

Page 944: ...RN TWENtyeighty TWENtyfive TWOFifty TWOThousand TX TXRX TXRXTHRESHold TYPE TYPE1 TYPE2 UNDERline UNDO UNEQual UNEQualLESSthan UNINSTALL UNIQue UNITINTERVAL UNITINtervals UNITs UNLock UNMOUNT UNWRap UPPERFREQuency UPPer UPPerthreshold USB USB3 USBDevice USBTmc USECLockedge USER UTCDELTa V1X V2X VALidate VALue VARpersist VBArs VCESat VDIFFXOVR VECtors VERBose VERTPOS VERTSCALE VERTical VGLevel VIEW ...

Page 945: ... INFINITE ACQUIRE STATE 1 ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP ACTONEVENT ACTION AUXOUT STATE 0 ACTONEVENT ACTION EMAIL SETUP TOADDRESS TestString ACTONEVENT ACTION EMAIL STATE 0 ACTONEVENT ACTION PRINT STATE 0 ACTONEVENT ACTION SAVEIMAGE STATE 0 ACTONEVENT ACTION SAVEWFM STATE 0 ACTONEVENT ACTION SRQ STATE 0 ACTONEVENT ACTION STOPACQ STATE 1 ACTONEVENT ACTION VISUAL STATE 0 ACTONEVENT EVENTTYPE NONE ACTONEV...

Page 946: ...B1 AUDIO CLOCK POLARITY RISE BUS B1 AUDIO CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 AUDIO DATA POLARITY NORMAL BUS B1 AUDIO DATA SIZE 24 BUS B1 AUDIO DISPLAY FORMAT SIGNEDDECIMAL BUS B1 AUDIO FRAME SIZE 8 BUS B1 AUDIO FRAMESYNC POLARITY RISE BUS B1 AUDIO FRAMESYNC SOURCE CH2 BUS B1 AUDIO TYPE I2S BUS B1 AUDIO WORDSEL POLARITY NORMAL BUS B1 AUDIO WORDSEL SOURCE CH2 BUS B1 CAN BITRATE 500000 BUS B1 CAN FD BITRATE 400...

Page 947: ... MINIMUM 4 0000E 6 BUS B1 MIL1553B SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT0 SOURCE D0 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT10 SOURCE D10 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT11 SOURCE D11 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT12 SOURCE D12 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT13 SOURCE D13 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT14 SOURCE D14 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT15 SOURCE D15 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT16 SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT17 SOURCE CH2 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT18 SOURCE CH3 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT19 SOUR...

Page 948: ... SPI CLOCK POLARITY RISE BUS B1 SPI CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 SPI DATA IN POLARITY HIGH BUS B1 SPI DATA IN SOURCE OFF BUS B1 SPI DATA OUT POLARITY HIGH BUS B1 SPI DATA OUT SOURCE CH3 BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 8 BUS B1 SPI FRAMING SS BUS B1 SPI IDLETIME 5 0000E 6 BUS B1 SPI SELECT POLARITY LOW BUS B1 SPI SELECT SOURCE CH2 BUS B1 STATE 0 BUS B1 TYPE PARALLEL BUS B1 USB BITRATE FULL BUS B1 USB PROBE DIFFERE...

Page 949: ...B2 CAN SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 CAN STANDARD CAN2X BUS B2 DISPLAY FORMAT HEXADECIMAL BUS B2 DISPLAY TYPE BUS BUS B2 FLEXRAY BITRATE 10000000 BUS B2 FLEXRAY CHANNEL A BUS B2 FLEXRAY SIGNAL BDIFFBP BUS B2 FLEXRAY SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 I2C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE 0 BUS B2 I2C CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 I2C DATA SOURCE CH2 BUS B2 LABEL Parallel BUS B2 LIN BITRATE 19200 BUS B2 LIN IDFORMAT NOPARITY BUS B2 LIN POLARITY NOR...

Page 950: ...URCE D4 BUS B2 PARALLEL BIT5 SOURCE D5 BUS B2 PARALLEL BIT6 SOURCE D6 BUS B2 PARALLEL BIT7 SOURCE D7 BUS B2 PARALLEL BIT8 SOURCE D8 BUS B2 PARALLEL BIT9 SOURCE D9 BUS B2 PARALLEL CLOCK EDGE RISING BUS B2 PARALLEL CLOCK ISCLOCKED NO BUS B2 PARALLEL CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 PARALLEL WIDTH 16 BUS B2 POSITION 0 0E 0 BUS B2 RS232C BITRATE 9600 BUS B2 RS232C DATABITS 8 BUS B2 RS232C DELIMITER LF BUS B2 R...

Page 951: ...LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 0 0E 0 BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH3 0 0E 0 BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH4 0 0E 0 BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD MATH 0 0E 0 BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD REF1 0 0E 0 BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD REF2 0 0E 0 BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD REF3 0 0E 0 BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD REF4 0 0E 0 BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 800 0000E 3 BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 800 0000E 3 BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH3 800 0000E 3 BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH4 800 0000E 3 BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD ...

Page 952: ...IDTH 1 0000E 9 CH2 COUPLING DC CH2 DESKEW 0 0E 0 CH2 INVERT 0 CH2 LABEL CH2 OFFSET 0 0E 0 CH2 POSITION 0 0E 0 CH2 PROBE FORCEDRANGE 0 0E 0 CH2 PROBE GAIN 1 0000 CH2 PROBE PROPDELAY 0 0E 0 CH2 SCALE 100 0000E 3 CH2 TERMINATION 1 0000E 6 CH2 YUNITS V CH3 AMPSVIAVOLTS ENABLE 0 CH3 AMPSVIAVOLTS FACTOR 10 0000 CH3 BANDWIDTH 1 0000E 9 CH3 COUPLING DC CH3 DESKEW 0 0E 0 CH3 INVERT 0 CH3 LABEL CH3 OFFSET 0...

Page 953: ... 0000E 3 CH4 TERMINATION 1 0000E 6 CH4 YUNITS V CURSOR FUNCTION OFF CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 0 0E 0 CURSOR HBARS POSITION2 0 0E 0 CURSOR HBARS UNITS BASE CURSOR MODE INDEPENDENT CURSOR SOURCE AUTO CURSOR VBARS POSITION1 12 00E 6 CURSOR VBARS POSITION2 12 00E 6 CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS CURSOR XY READOUT RECTANGULAR CURSOR XY RECTANGULAR X POSITION1 0 0E 0 CURSOR XY RECTANGULAR X POSITION2 0 0E 0 CU...

Page 954: ...0000E 3 D14 THRESHOLD 1 4000 D15 LABEL D15 POSITION 80 0000E 3 D15 THRESHOLD 1 4000 D1 LABEL D1 POSITION 80 0000E 3 D1 THRESHOLD 1 4000 D2 LABEL D2 POSITION 80 0000E 3 D2 THRESHOLD 1 4000 D3 LABEL D3 POSITION 80 0000E 3 D3 THRESHOLD 1 4000 D4 LABEL D4 POSITION 80 0000E 3 D4 THRESHOLD 1 4000 D5 LABEL D5 POSITION 80 0000E 3 D5 THRESHOLD 1 4000 D6 LABEL D6 POSITION 80 0000E 3 D6 THRESHOLD 1 4000 D7 L...

Page 955: ...LAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT HIGH DISPLAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT AUTODIM ENABLE 1 DISPLAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT AUTODIM TIME 60 DISPLAY INTENSITY GRATICULE 75 DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM 35 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE 0 0E 0 DISPLAY STYLE DOTSONLY 0 DISPLAY TRIGFREQUENCY 0 DISPLAY XY OFF DISPLAY XY WITHYT 0 DVM AUTORANGE 0 DVM DISPLAYSTYLE FULL DVM MODE OFF DVM SOURCE CH1 EMAIL SETUP FROMADDRESS TestString EMAIL SET...

Page 956: ... MARKER PEAK EXCURSION 30 0000 MARKER PEAK MAXIMUM 5 MARKER PEAK STATE 1 MARKER PEAK THRESHOLD 50 0000 MARKER TYPE ABSOLUTE MASK TEST SAVEWFM 0 MASK TEST SRQ COMPLETION 0 MASK TEST SRQ FAILURE 0 MASK TEST STATE 0 MASK TEST STOP FAILURE 0 MASK TEST THRESHOLD 1 MASK TEST TIME INFINITE MASK TEST WAVEFORM INFINITE MASK USER AMPLITUDE 1 0000 MASK USER HSCALE 400 0000E 6 MASK USER HTRIGPOS 500 0000E 3 M...

Page 957: ...AY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS2 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS2 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS2 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE PERIOD MEASUR...

Page 958: ... 10 0000 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID1 50 0000 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 50 0000 MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE ALL MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING 32 MESSAGE BOX 167 67 167 83 MESSAGE SHOW MESSAGE STATE 0 PICTBRIDGE DATEPRINT DEFLT PICTBRIDGE IDPRINT OFF PICTBRIDGE IMAGESIZE DEFLT PICTBRIDGE PAPERSIZE DEFLT PICTBRIDGE PAPERTYPE DEFLT PICTBRIDGE PRINTQUAL DEFLT REF1 HORIZONTAL DELAY TIME...

Page 959: ...ITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA OFFSET 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN FD BRSBIT X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN FD ESIBIT X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A ...

Page 960: ...TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C CONDITION START SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B...

Page 961: ...IL1553B TIME QUALIFIER MORETHAN SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 PARALLEL VALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 ...

Page 962: ...CH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN FD ESIBIT X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIE...

Page 963: ... B2 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 MIL1553B COMMAND ADDRESS HIVALUE XXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 MIL1553B COMMAND ADDRESS QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 MIL1553B COMMAND ADDRESS VALUE XXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 MIL1553B COMMAND COUNT XXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 MIL1553B COMMAND PARITY X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 MIL1...

Page 964: ...XXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA MOSI VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 USB ADDRESS HIVALUE XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 USB ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 USB CONDITION SYNC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 USB DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 USB DATA OFFSET 1 SEARCH S...

Page 965: ... LOGIC INPUT D0 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D1 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D10 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D11 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D12 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D13 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D14 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D15 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D2 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D3 ...

Page 966: ...EN LESSLIMIT 8 0000E 9 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 8 0000E 9 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH1 0 0E 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH2 0 0E 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH3 0 0E 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH4 0 0E 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD MATH 0 0E 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD REF1 0 0E 0...

Page 967: ...ESHOLD CH3 0 0E 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH4 0 0E 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD MATH 0 0E 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD REF1 0 0E 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD REF2 0 0E 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD REF3 0 0E 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD REF4 0 0E 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TIMEOUT POLARITY STAYSHIGH S...

Page 968: ...CT CH3 0 SELECT CH4 0 SELECT CONTROL CH1 SELECT D0 0 SELECT D1 0 SELECT D10 0 SELECT D11 0 SELECT D12 0 SELECT D13 0 SELECT D14 0 SELECT D15 0 SELECT D2 0 SELECT D3 0 SELECT D4 0 SELECT D5 0 SELECT D6 0 SELECT D7 0 SELECT D8 0 SELECT D9 0 SELECT DALL 0 SELECT MATH 0 SELECT REF1 0 SELECT REF2 0 SELECT REF3 0 SELECT REF4 0 TRIGGER A BUS B1 AUDIO CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B1 AUDIO DATA HIVALUE XXXX...

Page 969: ... QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVA...

Page 970: ...S232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI CONDITION SS TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA IN VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA OUT VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA START 0 0E 0 TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB ADDRESS HIVALUE XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 USB ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX TR...

Page 971: ...ER A BUS B2 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA QU...

Page 972: ...ERRTYPE SYNC TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 PARALLEL VALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI CONDITION SS TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA IN VALUE XXXXXXXX T...

Page 973: ...GE SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 20 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LEVEL 0 0E 0 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH1 0 0E 0 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 0 0E 0 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH3 0 0E 0 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH4 0 0E 0 TRIGGER A LEVEL D0 1 4000 TRIGGER A LEVEL D1 1 4000 TRIGGER A LEVEL D10 1 4000 TRIGGER A LEVEL D11 1 4000 TRIGGER A LEVEL D12 1 4000 TRIGGER A LEVEL D13 1 4000 TRIGGER A LEVEL D14 1 4000 TRIGGER A LEVEL D15 1 4000 TRIGGER...

Page 974: ... D4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D5 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D6 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D7 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D8 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D9 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME 8 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT 8 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 8 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH1 0 0E 0 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH2 0 0E 0 TRIGGER A...

Page 975: ...0 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D10 1 4000 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D11 1 4000 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D12 1 4000 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D13 1 4000 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D14 1 4000 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D15 1 4000 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D2 1 4000 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D3 1 4000 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D4 1 4000 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D5 1 4000 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D6 1 4000 TRIGGER...

Page 976: ...HRESHOLD D10 1 4000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D11 1 4000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D12 1 4000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D13 1 4000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D14 1 4000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D15 1 4000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D2 1 4000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D3 1 4000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D4 1 4000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D5 1 4000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D6 1 ...

Page 977: ...B LEVEL D11 1 4000 TRIGGER B LEVEL D12 1 4000 TRIGGER B LEVEL D13 1 4000 TRIGGER B LEVEL D14 1 4000 TRIGGER B LEVEL D15 1 4000 TRIGGER B LEVEL D2 1 4000 TRIGGER B LEVEL D3 1 4000 TRIGGER B LEVEL D4 1 4000 TRIGGER B LEVEL D5 1 4000 TRIGGER B LEVEL D6 1 4000 TRIGGER B LEVEL D7 1 4000 TRIGGER B LEVEL D8 1 4000 TRIGGER B LEVEL D9 1 4000 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 0 0E 0 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 ...

Page 978: ...R B LOWERTHRESHOLD D4 1 4000 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D5 1 4000 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D6 1 4000 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D7 1 4000 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D8 1 4000 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D9 1 4000 TRIGGER B STATE 0 TRIGGER B TIME 8 0000E 9 TRIGGER B TYPE EDGE VERBOSE 1 VIDPIC AUTOCONTRAST 1 VIDPIC AUTOCONTRAST UPDATERATE 20 ZOOM MODE 0 ZOOM ZOOM1 POSITION 50 0000 ZOOM ZOOM1 SCALE 4 0000E 6 ...

Page 979: ...gital and RF frequency domain waveforms Each command sequence example is followed by an explanation of the returned WFMOutpre results The WFMOutpre values act as settings that apply to the CURVe query data being transferred NOTE In order to guarantee that the waveform data returned from CURVE queries of multiple waveforms are correlated to the same acquisition you should use single sequence acquis...

Page 980: ...y changes the BYT_NR value accordingly ENCDG BINARY This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data To change this value the other possibility is ASCii use the WFMOutpre ENCdg command This value can also be set using the DATa ENCdg command which provides the ability to set the WFMOutpre ENCdg WFMOutpre BN_Fmt and WFMOutpre BYT_Or values using a single command BN_FMT RI This value specifies ...

Page 981: ...nly this value use the WFMOutpre XZEro query PT_OFF 0 This is a query provided only for compatibility with performance oscilloscopes The returned value is always 0 If you would like to determine only this value use the WFMOutpre PT_Off query YUNIT V This value indicates the vertical units of data points in the waveform record This can be any of several string values depending upon the vertical uni...

Page 982: ...the DATa WIDth command BIT_NR 8 This value specifies the number of bits per data point in the waveform data To change this value use the WFMOutpre BIT_Nr command Note that changing this value automatically changes the BYT_NR value accordingly ENCDG ASCII This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data To change this value the other possibility is BINARY use the WFMOutpre ENCdg command This ...

Page 983: ... time or frequency is relative to the time of the trigger which is always 0 So this XZEro time or frequency can be negative This is query only If you would like to determine only this value use the WFMOutpre XZEro query PT_OFF 0 This is a query provided only for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes The returned value is always 0 If you would like to determine only this value use the WF...

Page 984: ...B366 FB3E6 FB366 FB3E6 FB32E FB3A2 FB32E FB3AA FB366 FB3EA FB366 FB3E2 FB36 FB3E6 FB366 FB3E6 FB346 FB3C6 FB346 FB3C6 FB34E FB3C2 FB34E FB3CA NOTE The returned hexadecimal data values are formatted without leading zeroes For example a 4 byte digital value of FB386 should be interpreted as 000FB386 NOTE You can also use the WAVFrm query which concatenates the WFMOutpre and CURVe queries WFMOutpre Q...

Page 985: ...ta points in the waveform record In this case the value represents YT format This is query only the returned values can be Y for YT format or ENV for envelope format min max pairs If you would like to determine only this value use the WFMOutpre PT_Fmt query PT_ORDER LINEAR This value is always LINear XUNIT s This value indicates the units of the x axis of the waveform record This is determined by ...

Page 986: ...o a PC using 8 bytes per point and Zoom off Command Comment DATa SOUrce CH1_D1 ACQuire MAGnivu 0 DATa START 1 DATa STOP 25 WFMOutpre ENCdg ASCii WFMOutpre BYT_Nr 8 HEADer 1 VERBose 1 WFMOutpre Returns the following values Each value represents the current settings that a CURVe query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the oscilloscope to a PC or other device see next table fo...

Page 987: ...value to LSB use the WFMOutpre BYT_Or command Note this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding WFID Digital unknown coupling 100 0us div 10000 points Digital mode This quoted string represents information about the source waveform that would be returned by a WFMOutpre WFId query It cannot be changed NR_PT 25 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record to be transferre...

Page 988: ...y this value use the WFMOutpre YUNit query YMULT 1 0000 This value indicates the multiplying factor to convert the data point values from digitizing levels to the units specified by the WFMOUTpre YUNit command This is query only If you would like to determine only this value use the WFMOutpre YMUlt query YOFF 0 0E 0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform in digitizing le...

Page 989: ...To change this value automatically use the WFMOutpre BYT_Nr command Note that changing this value automatically changes the BIT_NR value accordingly This value can also be set using the DATa WIDth command BIT_NR 32 This value specifies the number of bits per data point in the waveform data To change this value use the WFMOutpre BIT_Nrcommand Note that changing this value automatically changes the ...

Page 990: ...his is query only If you would like to determine only this value use the WFMOutpre XINcr query XZER0 6 0606E 6 This value indicates the time in seconds or frequency in hertz of the first data point in the waveform record This time or frequency is relative to the time of the trigger which is always 0 So this XZEro time or frequency can be negative This is query only If you would like to determine o...

Page 991: ..._NR 8 BIT_NR 64 ENCDG ASCII BN_FMT RI BYT_OR MSB WFID Digital unknown coupling 100 0us div 10000 points Digital mode NR_PT 25 PT_FMT Y PT_ORDER LINEAR XUNIT s XINCR 1 2121E 9 XZERO 6 0606E 6 PT_OFF 0 YUNIT State YMULT 1 0000 YOFF 0 0E 0 YZERO 0 0E 0 CURVe Returns the following values Each value represents a data point CURVe 80000FB787 80000FB787 E8000FB787 8C000FB7E7 8C000FB7E7 84000FB7EF CC000FB7...

Page 992: ...nged NR_PT 25 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record If you would like to determine only this value use the WFMOutpre NR_Pt query Note this value is typically equal to the full record length but you also have the option to transfer only a portion of the record length by using the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands PT_FMT Y This value indicates the format of the data p...

Page 993: ...sition of the source waveform in digitizing levels There are 25 digitizing levels per vertical division This is query only If you would like to determine only this value use the WFMOutpre YOFf query YZERO 0 0E 0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform in units specified by the WFMOUTpre YUNit command This is query only If you would like to determine only this value use the ...

Page 994: ... the waveform data To change this value the other possibility for RF frequency domain traces is FPBINARY use the WFMOutpre ENCdg command This value can also be set using the DATa ENCdg command BN_FMT FP This value specifies the binary format which in this case is FP floating point This value is fixed for RF frequency domain traces Note This field is not applicable for ASCii encoding BYT_OR MSB Thi...

Page 995: ...o determine only this value use the WFMOutpre YMUlt query YOFF 0 0E 0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform This value is unused for RF frequency domain traces and is always 0 YZERO 0 0E 0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform This value is unused for RF frequency domain traces and is always 0 DOMAIN FREQUENCY This value indicates the domain in...

Page 996: ...Appendix D Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre and CURVe Query Examples D 18 MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP Programmer ...

Page 997: ...the CH2 waveform on AUTOset EXECute OPC Autosets the displayed waveform CH2 and waits for the auto setup to complete SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A TYPe EDGE Specifies that this will be an edge search a mark will be placed when the source waveform passes through a specified threshold level in the specified direction SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce CH2 Specifies the CH2 waveform as the source wavefo...

Page 998: ...e re crossing the upper threshold The pulse width must be less than 600 microseconds Command Comment RST Resets the oscilloscope Wait for the reset to complete approximately 3 seconds DISPLAY WAVEVIEW1 CH3 STATE 1 Turns the CH3 waveform on AUTOset EXECute Autosets the displayed waveform CH3 Wait for the autoset to complete approximately 3 seconds SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A TYPe RUNT Specifies that t...

Page 999: ...e displayed waveforms CH1 CH2 and CH3 Wait for the autoset to complete approximately 3 seconds SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A TYPe LOGIc Specifies that this will be a logic search a mark will be placed when all channels transition to the specified state SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH1 HIGH Specifies the Boolean logic criteria for channel 1 in this case high SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut ...

Page 1000: ...turns a list of 3 marks on 3 waveforms CH1 24 1600 24 1600 24 1600 1 0336E3 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 CH2 24 1600 24 1600 24 1600 1 0336E3 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 CH3 24 1600 24 1600 24 1600 1 0336E3 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 CH1 50 0000 50 0000 50 0000 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 CH2 50 0000 50 0000 50 0000 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 CH3 50 0000 50 0000 50 0000 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 0 0E 0 CH1 75 8300 75 8300...

Page 1001: ...many repetitions of the event This instrument uses a type of equivalent time sampling called random equivalent time sampling It utilizes an internal clock that runs asynchronously with respect to the input signal and the signal trigger The instrument takes samples continuously independent of the trigger position and displays them based on the time difference between the sample and the trigger Alth...

Page 1002: ...ing service return a status byte that indicates they do not need servicing TEKSecure A Tektronix custom command that initializes both waveform and setup memories This overwrites any previously stored data Glossary 2 MSO54 MSO56 MSO58 MSO58LP Programmer ...

Page 1003: ...mat 2 115 BUS B x ARINC429A POLARITY 2 116 BUS B x ARINC429A SOUrce 2 116 BUS B x ARINC429A THRESHold 2 117 BUS B x AUDio BITDelay 2 117 BUS B x AUDio BITOrder 2 118 BUS B x AUDio CLOCk POLarity 2 118 BUS B x AUDio CLOCk SOUrce 2 119 BUS B x AUDio CLOCk THReshold 2 120 BUS B x AUDio DATa POLarity 2 120 BUS B x AUDio DATa SIZe 2 121 BUS B x AUDio DATa SOUrce 2 121 BUS B x AUDio DATa THReshold 2 122...

Page 1004: ... 2 158 BUS B x MIL1553B THRESHold 2 158 BUS B x PARallel ALLTHResholds 2 159 BUS B x PARallel ALLTHResholds APPly 2 160 BUS B x PARallel BIT n SOUrce 2 160 BUS B x PARallel BIT n SOUrce THReshold 2 161 BUS B x PARallel CLOCk EDGE 2 161 BUS B x PARallel CLOCk ISCLOCKED 2 162 BUS B x PARallel CLOCkSOUrce 2 162 BUS B x PARallel CLOCKSOUrce THReshold 2 163 BUS B x RS232C BITRate 2 164 BUS B x RS232C B...

Page 1005: ...E 2 196 CH x PRObe FORCEDRange 2 197 CH x PRObe GAIN 2 197 CH x PRObe ID 2 198 CH x PRObe ID SERnumber 2 198 CH x PRObe ID TYPe 2 198 CH x PRObe RESistance 2 199 CH x PRObe SET 2 199 CH x PRObe UNIts 2 200 CH x PROBECal 2 200 CH x PROBECOntrol 2 200 CH x PROBEFunc EXTAtten 2 201 CH x PROBEFunc EXTDBatten 2 202 CH x PROBEFunc EXTUnits 2 202 CH x PROBEFunc EXTUnits STATE 2 203 CH x SCAle 2 203 CH x ...

Page 1006: ...FTView x CURSor WAVEform BPOSition 2 243 DISplay MATHFFTView x GRIDlines 2 243 DISplay MATHFFTView x MATH MATH x STATE 2 244 DISplay MATHFFTView x XAXIS SCALE 2 244 DISplay MATHFFTView x YAXIS SCALE 2 245 DISplay MATHFFTView x ZOOM XAXIS FROM 2 245 DISplay MATHFFTView x ZOOM XAXIS TO 2 246 DISplay MATHFFTView x ZOOM YAXIS FROM 2 246 DISplay MATHFFTView x ZOOM YAXIS TO 2 247 DISplay PERSistence 2 2...

Page 1007: ... DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor SCREEN BYPOSition 2 270 DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor SPLITMODE 2 270 DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor STATE 2 271 DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor VBArs APOSition 2 271 DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor VBArs BPOSition 2 272 DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor VBArs DELTa 2 272 DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor VBArs UNIts 2 273 DISplay REFFFTView x CURSor WAVEform AHPOSition 2 273 DISplay REFFFTVie...

Page 1008: ...Sor CURSOR x STATE 2 297 DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x VBArs APOSition 2 298 DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x VBArs BPOSition 2 298 DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x VBArs DELTa 2 299 DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x VBArs UNIts 2 299 DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x WAVEform APOSition 2 300 DISplay WAVEView x CURSor CURSOR x WAVEform BPOSition 2 300 DISplay WAVEView x FILTer 2 301 DIS...

Page 1009: ... 2 329 F FACtory 2 330 FILESystem 2 331 FILESystem COPy 2 331 FILESystem CWD 2 332 FILESystem DELEte 2 332 FILESystem DIR 2 333 FILESystem HOMEDir 2 333 FILESystem LDIR 2 334 FILESystem MKDir 2 334 FILESystem READFile 2 335 FILESystem REName 2 335 FILESystem RMDir 2 336 FILESystem UNMOUNT DRIve 2 336 FILESystem WRITEFile 2 337 FPAnel PRESS 2 337 FPAnel TURN 2 338 H HEADer 2 338 HORizontal 2 339 HO...

Page 1010: ... MATH x LABel FONT ITALic 2 368 MATH MATH x LABel FONT SIZE 2 369 MATH MATH x LABel FONT TYPE 2 369 MATH MATH x LABel FONT UNDERline 2 370 MATH MATH x LABel NAMe 2 370 MATH MATH x LABel XPOS 2 371 MATH MATH x LABel YPOS 2 371 MATH MATH x SOUrce x 2 372 MATH MATH x SPECTral HORZ 2 372 MATH MATH x SPECTral MAG 2 373 MATH MATH x SPECTral PHASE 2 373 MATH MATH x SPECTral SOUrce 2 374 MATH MATH x SPECT...

Page 1011: ... MEASUrement DIRacmodel 2 400 MEASUrement DISPLAYUnits 2 401 MEASUrement EDGE x 2 401 MEASUrement EYERENDER 2 402 MEASUrement FILTers BLANKingtime 2 402 MEASUrement FILTers HIGHPass FREQ 2 403 MEASUrement FILTers HIGHPass SPEC 2 403 MEASUrement FILTers LOWPass FREQ 2 404 MEASUrement FILTers LOWPass SPEC 2 404 MEASUrement FILTers RAMPtime 2 405 MEASUrement GATing 2 405 MEASUrement GATing ACTive 2 4...

Page 1012: ...AS x CLOCKRecovery ADVanced METHod 2 431 MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery CLOCKFrequency 2 431 MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery CLOCKMultiplier 2 432 MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery CONSTCLOCKMODe 2 432 MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery DAMPing 2 433 MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery DATAPath 2 433 MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery DATARate 2 434 MEASUrement MEAS x CLOCKRecovery EXPLICITCLOCKMODe 2 ...

Page 1013: ...ITTERSummary NPJ 2 459 MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary PJ 2 460 MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary RJDD 2 460 MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary TIE 2 461 MEASUrement MEAS x JITTERSummary TJBER 2 461 MEASUrement MEAS x LABel 2 462 MEASUrement MEAS x LOWREFVoltage 2 462 MEASUrement MEAS x MEASRange GLOBal 2 462 MEASUrement MEAS x MEASRange MAX 2 463 MEASUrement MEAS x MEASRange MIN 2 464 MEASUrement M...

Page 1014: ...OMinalfreq 2 486 MEASUrement MEAS x SSC NOMinalfreq SELECTIONtype 2 486 MEASUrement MEAS x TOEdge 2 487 MEASUrement MEAS x TOEDGESEARCHDIRect 2 487 MEASUrement MEAS x TRANSition 2 488 MEASUrement MEAS x TYPe 2 488 MEASUrement MEAS x WINDOWLENgth 2 494 MEASUrement MEASRange MAX 2 420 MEASUrement MEASRange MIN 2 420 MEASUrement MEASRange STATE 2 421 MEASUrement MINUI 2 495 MEASUrement POPUlation LIM...

Page 1015: ...LOT DELete 2 520 PLOT LIST 2 520 PLOT PLOT x BATHtub BER 2 521 PLOT PLOT x BATHtub XAXISUnits 2 521 PLOT PLOT x LABel COLor 2 521 PLOT PLOT x LABel FONT BOLD 2 522 PLOT PLOT x LABel FONT ITALic 2 522 PLOT PLOT x LABel FONT SIZE 2 523 PLOT PLOT x LABel FONT TYPE 2 523 PLOT PLOT x LABel FONT UNDERline 2 524 PLOT PLOT x LABel NAMe 2 524 PLOT PLOT x LABel XPOS 2 525 PLOT PLOT x LABel YPOS 2 525 PLOT P...

Page 1016: ...0 POWer POWer x PPULSEWIDTH INPUTSOurce 2 551 POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute FALLHigh 2 551 POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute FALLLow 2 552 POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute FALLMid 2 553 POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute HYSTeresis 2 553 POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute RISEHigh 2 554 POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute RISELow 2 554 POWer POWer x REFLevels ABSolute RISEMid 2 555 POWer POWer x REFLev...

Page 1017: ...x SOA SAVemask AUTOINCrement 2 584 POWer POWer x SOA SAVemask FILEName 2 585 POWer POWer x SOA SAVemask FOLDer 2 585 POWer POWer x SOA VSOURce 2 586 POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS DEVICEType 2 586 POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS GATESOurce 2 587 POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS ILEVELAbs 2 587 POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS ILEVELPct 2 588 POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS ISOURce 2 588 POWer POWer x SWITCHINGLOSS LEV...

Page 1018: ...VEON IMAGe FILEFormat 2 625 SAVEON TRIGger 2 625 SAVEON WAVEform 2 626 SAVEON WAVEform FILEFormat 2 627 SAVEON WAVEform SOURce 2 627 SEARCH ADDNew 2 628 SEARCH DELete 2 628 SEARCH LIST 2 629 SEARCH SEARCH x COPy 2 629 SEARCH SEARCH x NAVigate 2 629 SEARCH SEARCH x TOTAL 2 630 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ARINC429A CONDition 2 630 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ARINC429A DATa HIVALue 2 631 SEARCH S...

Page 1019: ... TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet MAC ADDRess SOUrce VALue 2 656 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet MAC LENgth HIVALue 2 657 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet MAC LENgth VALue 2 658 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet QTAG VALue 2 658 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet TCPHeader ACKnum VALue 2 659 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS ETHERnet TCPHeader DESTinationport VALue 2 660 SEARCH SEARCH x TR...

Page 1020: ...MAND COUNt 2 683 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND PARity 2 684 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND SUBADdress 2 684 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B COMMAND TRBit 2 685 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B CONDition 2 685 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B DATa PARity 2 686 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MIL1553B DATa VALue 2 687 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS MI...

Page 1021: ...TRIGger A BUS USB SPLIT SC VALue 2 711 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB SPLIT SE VALue 2 712 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS USB TOKENType 2 713 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe 2 713 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce 2 714 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A EDGE THReshold 2 715 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc CLOCk THReshold 2 715 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc DELTatime 2 716 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIG...

Page 1022: ...RCH x TRIGger A STATE 2 737 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A STOPAcq 2 738 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TIMEOut LOGICQUALification 2 738 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TIMEOut POLarity 2 739 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TIMEOut SOUrce 2 739 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TIMEOut THReshold 2 740 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TIMEOut TIMe 2 740 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANsition DELTATime 2 741 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRA...

Page 1023: ...Gger A B BUS B x CAN DATa DIRection 2 771 TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN DATa OFFSet 2 772 TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN DATa QUALifier 2 773 TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN DATa SIZe 2 774 TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN DATa VALue 2 774 TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN ERRType 2 775 TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN FD BRSBit 2 775 TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN FD ESIBit 2 776 TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN FRAMEtype 2 777 TRIGger A B BUS B x CAN IDentifi...

Page 1024: ...ADER INDBits 2 805 TRIGger A B BUS B x FLEXray HEADER PAYLength 2 805 TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C ADDRess MODe 2 806 TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C ADDRess VALue 2 806 TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C CONDition 2 807 TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C DATa DIRection 2 808 TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C DATa SIZe 2 808 TRIGger A B BUS B x I2C DATa VALue 2 809 TRIGger A B BUS B x LIN CONDition 2 809 TRIGger A B BUS B x LIN DATa HIVALue ...

Page 1025: ...IGger A B BUS B x USB DATa OFFSet 2 837 TRIGger A B BUS B x USB DATa QUALifier 2 838 TRIGger A B BUS B x USB DATa SIZe 2 838 TRIGger A B BUS B x USB DATa TYPe 2 839 TRIGger A B BUS B x USB DATa VALue 2 840 TRIGger A B BUS B x USB ENDPoint VALue 2 840 TRIGger A B BUS B x USB ERRType 2 841 TRIGger A B BUS B x USB HANDSHAKEType 2 841 TRIGger A B BUS B x USB SOFFRAMENUMber 2 842 TRIGger A B BUS B x US...

Page 1026: ... 2 759 TRIGger A HOLDoff BY 2 875 TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe 2 876 TRIGger A LOGICQUALification 2 876 TRIGger A MODe 2 877 TRIGger AUXLevel 2 877 TRIGger B BY 2 878 TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt 2 878 TRIGger B RESET 2 879 TRIGger B RESET EDGE COUPling 2 879 TRIGger B RESET EDGE LEVel 2 880 TRIGger B RESET EDGE SLOpe 2 880 TRIGger B RESET EDGE SOUrce 2 881 TRIGger B RESET TIMEOut TIMe 2 881 TRIGger B RESET T...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for MSO54

IBM xSeries 235 Maintenance & Troubleshooting preview
xSeries 235
Brand: IBM Pages: 214
Korenix AnyBus-X Installation Leaflet preview
AnyBus-X
Brand: Korenix Pages: 2
IBM eServer 130 xSeries User Reference Manual preview
eServer 130 xSeries
Brand: IBM Pages: 156
B&B VESR4X4 User Manual preview
VESR4X4
Brand: B&B Pages: 70
Olive Olive 2 User Manual preview
Olive 2
Brand: Olive Pages: 44
xFusion Digital Technologies FusionServer 2288 V5 Manual preview
FusionServer 2288 V5
Brand: xFusion Digital Technologies Pages: 86
Buffalo TeraStation WSS WS5020N6 User Manual preview
TeraStation WSS WS5020N6
Brand: Buffalo Pages: 115
ADLINK Technology DLAP-201 Series User Manual preview
DLAP-201 Series
Brand: ADLINK Technology Pages: 39
Premio FlacheSAN2-D5 Quick Manual preview
FlacheSAN2-D5
Brand: Premio Pages: 2
IBM 8668 - Eserver xSeries 232 Hardware Maintenance Manual preview
8668 - Eserver xSeries 232
Brand: IBM Pages: 182
MRV Communications LX-4000 Series Getting Started preview
LX-4000 Series
Brand: MRV Communications Pages: 65
Infrant Technologies ReadyNAS Duo User Manual preview
ReadyNAS Duo
Brand: Infrant Technologies Pages: 98
Fujitsu PRIMERGY SX940 Manual preview
PRIMERGY SX940
Brand: Fujitsu Pages: 44
Fujitsu PRIMERGY RX900 S2 Operating Manual preview
PRIMERGY RX900 S2
Brand: Fujitsu Pages: 114
Fujitsu PRIMERGY RX800 S2 Options Manual preview
PRIMERGY RX800 S2
Brand: Fujitsu Pages: 66
Fujitsu Primergy RX600 Start Manual preview
Primergy RX600
Brand: Fujitsu Pages: 8
Fujitsu PRIMERGY S60 Manual preview
PRIMERGY S60
Brand: Fujitsu Pages: 99
Fujitsu PRIMERGY SX05 S1 User Manual preview
PRIMERGY SX05 S1
Brand: Fujitsu Pages: 52

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands